Home

FP 5000 Protective Relay

Contents

1. e c o o 72 0 1 1 Multiples of Nominal Current I Inom Figure 13 15 Ground IT Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 19 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 20 Effective Date 12 05 13 5 Standards Compliance The following table shows the standards to which the FP 5000 complies and where appropriate the rating achieved under the standard s categories Note that in most cases the performance levels exceed the levels given This table is not a maximum performance specification rather it shows compliance to published numbers in the standards NORTH AMERICAN STANDARDS ANSI IEEE ANSI IEEE C37 90 1989 Performance Standard for Relay Systems associated with electric power apparatus ANSI C37 90 1 1989 Surge Withstand Capability Oscillatory Surge Wave Compliance OSWC 2 5 kV Fast Transient Surge Wave Compliance FTSWC 4 0 kV ANSI C37 90 2 1995 RF radiated immunity RF Radiation Withstand to gt 35 V M 27 1000 MHz UL CUL 5000 UL Compliance is covered under UL File Number E154862 Catalog FP 5000 00 5 Amp Version only FP5100 00 1 Amp version pending UL 1053 Ground Fault Interruption GFI f
2. OTHER PRODUCT Figure 10 1 INCOM Network Connection 10 1 3 Front RS 232 Port Connection The Front Panel RS 232 port provides the user convenient PC or lap top access to the data and update features of the FP 5000 The user may access all the data measured and calculated program and retrieve settings invoke or monitor logging or data capture activity and update firmware through the Front Panel RS 232 port The FP 5000 places its transmit onto pin 2 and its receive onto pin 3 making it a Data Set or Data Communication Equipment DSE or DCE interface under the definitions of the RS 232 standard PCs are generally defaulted to Data Terminal DTE which allows them to connect directly to a Data Set with straight through wiring Note that the FP 5000 communicates through a 9 pin D Subminiature Connector whereas a PC RS 232 connector may be either a 9 pin or a 25 pin D Subminiature Connector The straight through wiring for a 9 pin to 9 pin cable is not the case for a 9 pin to 25 pin cable See Figure 10 2 The wire names are related to the Data Terminal end thus RS 232 output of the FP 5000 is connected to the Receive line and its RS 232 input is connected to the Transmit line The FP 5000 uses none of the RS 232 hardware control lines Although the FP 5000 operates with the 3 wire connection shown in Figure 10 2 a standard off the shelf serial cable will allow c
3. 1 Multiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 4 IEC A Page 13 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 ETN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 9 IEC B Curves o c o o o o o E 1 Multiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 5 IEC B Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 9 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 10 Effective Date 12 05 IEC C Curves o c o o o E tiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 6 IEC C Page 13 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 11 IEC Curves D 1
4. E TN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 27 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Logic Gate 4 Logic gate 4 Settings 5 5 7 9 3 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable 9 7 to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Logic Gate 5 Logic gate 5 Settings 5 5 7 9 3 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable 9 6 to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Logic Gate 6 Logic gate 6 Settings 5 5 7 9 3 Function Select
5. 1 Multiples of Nominal Current I Inom Figure 13 12 Phase lt Page 13 16 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 17 Thermal Ground 14T Curves o o E 0 1 1 Multiples of Nominal Current I Inom Figure 13 13 Ground l t Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 17 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 18 Effective Date 12 05 Thermal Ground I2T Curves o 2 E 0 1 1 Multiples of Nominal Current 1 1 Figure 13 14 Ground Pt Page 13 18 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 19 Thermal Ground IT Curves
6. BF TRIP DISABLE DISARM CIN BKR BFI BF CFG EXTERNAL OR BOTH 5 IB 5 ICP5OBF S 1 1 1 gt IRP50NBF IX IXP50NBF CHECK SETTINGS LIST UI RESET LOCKOUT gt Figure 5 7 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram Disable disables the zone interlocking function Closing breaker equivalently applies voltage sources of AV across two systems this would disturb the systems to some degree Phase defining the zone interlocking function to be a phase depending on max Once maximum allowable max is determined signal and Afmax can be determined based on nmax Ground defining the zone interlocking function to be a phase asin signal 9 Af e 2 Pus max Both defining the zone interlocking function to be a phase or ground signal 2m 3t05 power cycles BCT See Section 8 5 for more information on zone interlocking 5 4 2 11 Sync Check Sync Check Settings The sync check function is provided for the applications where a line has two ended power sources The sync check function has the abilities to check voltage magnitude and angle differences frequency difference slip frequency between the bus and the line The sync check may supervise manually or automatically or both closing operation if enabled This function can be
7. MOTOR LOADS MOTOR LOADS Figure 4 6 Power Distribution Power Distribution Figures 4 4 and 4 6 Three conditions are typically encountered when monitoring power distribution systems as follows 1 Circuit breakers A and B are closed and C is open Power flow is in Quadrant 1 The power factor and Vars are positive 2 Circuit breakers A and C are closed and B is open Power flow for breakers A and C is in Quadrant 1 The power factor and Vars are positive 3 Circuit breakers and C are closed and A is open The power flow for breaker B is in Quadrant 1 and the metering conditions are the same as conditions 1 and 2 However the power flow for breaker C is reversed and is in Quadrant 3 The display units for Energy may be set to either kilo units or Mega units The Energy Unit setting is changed in the System Configura tion setting menu in the Set mode The screen displays a 9 digit energy reading Energy values roll over from 999 999 999 to 0 4 6 1 4 Selecting the Demand Sub menu This menu allows the user to view the following Demand parameters See Display 4 7 Current Demand IA IB IC Current Peak Demand IA IB Date and Time Stamp when Current Demand was last reset Power Demand Watt VAR VA Power Peak Demand Watt VAR VA Date and Time Stamp when Power Demand was last reset Page 4 8 Display 4 7 Demand Sub menu Current Demand IA Demand Magnitu
8. Note The I O Configuration Setting in the System Configuration settings menu must be set to custom for these set points to be configured Otherwise the default settings displayed are used See sections 5 4 5 and 5 4 6 for details Page 5 20 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 21 Table 5 6 Output Configuration Settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range MN j _ Monitor Select Breaker Trip coil circuit Off On ON Function Selectlogic output function for OR AND NOR NAND PARI EM DD RN Off Delay c select delay for Trip Relay to 5121 1 dropout after trip event clears 1 cycle increments Select logic input IN1 for Output See Logic Input Dons Trip AllProt pr SES Select logic input IN2 for Output See Logic Input Options mes ree IN3 Select logic input INS for Output See Logic Input Options Unused ma INA Select logic input 4 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused PE m esto Monitor Select Close coil circuit monitoring Off On Off HEN o RR Function Select logic output function for OR AND NOR NAND Disable RR Off Delay c select delay for Trip2 Relay to dropout after trip event clears 1 cycle increments IN1 Select logic input IN1 for Output See Logic In
9. Overcurrent Display _ 51 PH TOC Curve Shape MOD Reset Calc Phase Overcurrent b Direction Both D 51P PH TOC Curve ER 51P PH TOC Setting 51 PH TOC Setting 51 2 TOC Cure 2 Curve Em pu m Time Mult 1 00 51P2 PH TOC Setting Shape MOD 50P 1 PH IOC 1 Reset Calc 50P 2 PH IOC 2 _ Direction Both e 51P2 PH TOC Setting 50P 1PHIOC1 Pickup pu 1 00 Time Mult 1 00 Pickup pu 2 00 VRestraint Disable Delay c 0 Direction Both M L X 5OP 2PHIOC2 Pickup pu 2 00 Delay c 0 Direction Both Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Page 4 11 Page 4 11 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 12 Measured OC Display gt 51X IX TOC Curve Shape XTRM Reset Calc IX Measured OC Direction Both 51X IX TOC Curve 51X IX TOC Setting 51X IX TOC Setting 50X 1 IX IOC 1 pu 50X 2 IX IOC 2 Time Mult 1 00 EM 50X 1 IX IOC 1 Pickup pu 2 00 Delay 60 Direction Both 50X 2 IX IOC 2 Pickup pu 2 00 Delay 600 Direction Both Residual OC Display TOC Curve Shape Reset IR Residual OC Direc
10. Enable Yes Address 0x0001 Communications Baud Rate 9600 INCOM Accessory Bus Accessory Bus 5232 Address 0x0002 Baud Rate 9600 RS232 D Baud Rate 19200 4 6 3 Logs There are three types of logs Trip Log Event e Log and History Log Log Trip Log provides details for the most recent 16 trip events The Event Log is a sequence of event reports for the last 100 events The History Log provides a counter for the number of operations and or events that occurred on the unit See Section 12 for log details Press the Log pushbutton to go in to Log Mode and to view the FP 5000 Trip Event and History Logs The red LED in the upper left hand portion of the pushbutton area will illuminate while you are in the Log Mode The chart below shows the options provided by pressing the Log pushbutton Display 4 13 Log Main Menu Log Main Trip Log Event Log History Log 4 6 3 1 Trip Log The Trip Log stores the trip information for the last 16 trip events An example of the Trip Log Display showing two trip events is displayed below The 1 event will always show the latest trip event When the 16 trip event logs are filled the FP 5000 will overwrite the oldest log Trip Log 1 50P IOC 1 19 01 2 Relay Test 10 25 00 3 0 0 00 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 21 By using the Up Down pushbuttons the user can sele
11. BKR STATE CLOSED BKR STATE OPEN gt LATCH 5 jM BKR STATE TIME ALM R Figure 8 13 Close Breaker Times in cycles unless stated otherwise configuration maps the Open Breaker function to contact output relay Trip 1 see figure 8 14 below This relay can be made to operate for 30 line cycles after the removal of the opening signal The Open Breaker function can be initiated from different sources Front panel Open Breaker pushbutton if enabled by System Configuration Bkr Operation PB setting see Section 5 4 1 Test menu Open Breaker function Communication Open Breaker command if enabled by System Configuration Remote Bkr setting see Section 5 4 1 Contact input programmed to Remote Open By using the FP 5000 to open the breaker the following advan tages of built in logic are obtained A slow breaker alarm is raised if the breaker opens too slowly see 8 9 8 Slow Breaker Alarm e f the faceplate pushbutton is used a warning message is given if already in the open state or a breaker state alarm see 8 9 6 Breaker State Alarm is active or a slow breaker alarm see 8 9 8 Slow Breaker Alarm is active 8 9 4 Breaker Trip and Close Coil Supervision The FP 5000 includes optional Trip Coil Supervision on the Trip 1 output relay and Close Coil Supervision on the Trip 2 output relay When the coil supervision alarm activates it indicates wiring to a coil or the coil itself has an e
12. VX2 Aux 217 FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT 4 RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT DELTA OR OPEN DELTA PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF WYE GROUND CONNECTION Figure 6 9 Voltage Wye Input Wiring Options and Connection Schematics with Sync Check Page 6 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer AC DC POWER SUPPLY Tee L 5000 48 125 VDC 100250 Vdc 100 120VAC 100240 Vac Power Supply Input Input Power Supply _ i RLY Healthy Com RLY Healthy N O RLY Healthy N C Alarm Com Alarm N O Alarm N C FP5000 Effective Date 12 05 C In Source 2 Reserved Reserved VA Main VC Main VX1 Aux VX2 Aux N FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED 3 5000 CAN
13. 5000 Effective Date 12 05 AC DC POWER SUPPLY 48 125VDC 100 250 Vdc 100 120VAC 100 240 Vac FP5000 RLY Healthy Com RLY Healthy N O LY Healthy C R N A A A Reserved Reserved or lt VA Main VB Main VC Main VX1 Aux VX2 Aux T FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT DELTA OR OPEN DELTA PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF WYE GROUND CONNECTION Figure 6 8 Voltage Wye Input Wiring Options and Connection Schematics Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Page 6 7 Page 6 7 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 6 8 Effective Date 12 05 AC DC POWER SUPPLY 48 125VDC 100 250 Vac 100 120VAC 100 240 Vac FP5000 Power Supply 1 Input Power Supply EI m 202 e n RLY Healthy Ri Pe RLY Healthy C In Source 1 205 8 Lee 0 C In Source 2 AVT VA Main 213 VC Main 215 73 E
14. If the relay is closed or if the control power source and or wiring is compromised then the status should read Off Verify that the healthy relay is in the energized state Removing power to the FP 5000 power supply should disengage the healthy relay closing the NC contacts TB105 which should drive an Alarm indicator WARNING IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT AN ALARM ANNUNCIATION IS DRIVEN FROM THE FP 5000 HEALTHY RELAY THAT REQUIRES IMMEDIATE ATTENTION WHEN TRIPPED SINCE THIS MEANS THAT THE FP 5000 IS NO LONGER PROTECTING THE CIRCUIT AND THE SYSTEM SHOULD BE SERVICED Verify the functioning of the INCOM PowerNet communications if used Make sure that the FP 5000 INCOM slave address is unique and matches the system drawings The programmed address can be checked under the View Setting mode and modified under the Setting mode Verify that the FP 5000 is communicating over the INCOM network by getting confirmation of the device at the master polling device Visit the PowerNet or other INCOM master client and check the monitoring displays for the particular FP 5000 Confirm that you are viewing displays for the correct relay Disconnecting and reconnecting the network connector is a simple way to check this The INCOM PN Transmit LED viewed through the back chassis TB3 will light if a response is sent by the FP 5000 to a valid INCOM command reception Testing of Relay circuits each relay 1 6 can be
15. The Product Name in the relay FP5000 The Boot Code Ver amp Rev in the relay 02 00 waiting for acknowledge The Boot Code Rev Date in the relay 02 26 03 Waiting for acknowledge The Application Code Ver amp Rev in the relay 00 68 Waiting for acknowledge The Application Code Rev Date in the relay 03 07 03 Select the menu File Open SRecord File Operations Enter Flash Load Mode Exit Flash Loader Mode Erase Program Figure 12 2 Command Log Window Once the message log has been cleared you can open the S Record File from the file menu Simply select Open S Record File from the File drop down see figure 12 3 Mesiage Log Corw wur abor eitab eshed the menu Fle D pen 2 Fie Figure 12 3 Flash Programmer Once S Record File has been selected from the File drop down selections a message will be displayed to Click Browse to get the S Record file see Figure 12 4 Click the Browse button and a file similar to Fp5kapp s19 as an example will appear see Figure 12 5 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 ck Browse to get the S Flecord Figure 12 4 Flash Loader Open S Record File IL17569B Page 12 17 Browse to get the S Record Chek Verily to the checksum ol the S Recond erlyrg in progre
16. Zone Interlock Zone Interlock Trip Settings Trip Phase or Ground Select zone interlock trip function Disable Phase Ground Disable Both Direction Select zone interlock trip direction Fwd Rev or Both A Interlock 7 Interlock Out Settings p 2 8 or Ground Select zone interlock out function Disable Phase Ground peus T Both Direction Select zone interlock out direction Fwd Rev or Both UNE Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 11 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 12 Effective Date 12 05 Synch Check Function Select Synch check minimum live voltage characteristics and override device settings 25 Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Function Select to supervise closing Disable enable Disable Maximum breaker close time delay 0 to 9999 cycles e rece 1 second increments Hot Dead Vol Def Minimum amp Maximum Live amp Dead 5 5 2 11 P Min Live Voltage Minimum live voltage 10 to 250 Volts 65 _ Max Dead Maximum dead voltage 1 to 150 Volts 3 Ka _ Volt Dead Time dead time 0 to 9999 cycles 10 reme uet 25 In Synch Voltage Angle amp Slip Difference 5 5 2 11 Cues me Max Voltage Diff Maximum voltage across breaker 1 to 100 Volts 24 Jiecwendesng C s _ Max Angle Diff Maximum ang
17. Cutler Hammer Page 13 14 Effective Date 12 05 Thermal Phase I4T Curves 7 c o o o 72 S o E 1 Multiples of Nominal Current 1 Figure 13 10 Phase Page 13 14 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 15 Thermal Phase I2T Curves o o o o o i o E 0 1 1 Multiples of Nominal Current 1 1 Figure 13 11 Phase Pt Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 15 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 16 Effective Date 12 05 Thermal Phase IT Curves o uo o o 2 E
18. Description Display 4 2 1 Description 4 2 2 Display Sleep Mode 4 2 3 Self Check Failure 4 2 4 FP 5000 Other Warning or Transient Messages Pushbuttons 85 232 Communications Port Front Panel Communication Battery for Trip Indication Display Modes 4 6 1 Monitor 4 6 1 1 Selecting the Load S ub menu 4 6 1 2 Selecting the Fundamental P hasors S ub menu Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Page TOC 1 Page TOC 1 IL17569C FP 5000 Page TOC 2 Effective Date 12 05 4 6 1 3 Selecting the Energy Sub menu 4 6 1 4 Selecting the Demand S ub menu 4 6 1 5 Selecting the Minimum S ub menu 4 6 1 6 Selecting the Maximum S ub menu 4 6 2 View Settings 4 6 2 1 Protection 4 6 2 2 System Alarm 4 6 2 3 Logging 4 6 2 4 Contact Input CFG 4 6 2 5 Output Relay CFG 4 6 2 6 Programmable Logic 4 6 2 7 Cold Load Pickup 4 6 2 8 Communications 4 6 3 1 Trip Log 4 6 3 Logs 4 6 3 2 EventLog 4 6 3 3 History Log 4 6 4 Status Control 4 6 5 Set 4 6 6 Test 4 23 4 7 LEDs 5 SETTING THE FP 5000 5 1 Entering Set Mode 5 2 FP 5000 Setting Flowchart 5 3 FP 5000 Setting Table 5 4 Setting Descriptions 5 4 1 System Configuration Setting Descriptions 5 4 2 Protection Settings 5 4 2 1 Phase Overcurrent Settings 5 4 2 2 IX Measured OC Settings 5 4 2 3 IR Residual OC Settings 5 4 2 4 Unbalance Settings 5 4 2 5 Voltage P rotection Settings 5 4 2 6 Power Protection Settings 5 4 2 7 Frequency P rotection Settin
19. Eight electrically isolated contact inputs Cin1 8 A Zone Interlock input Zin Six flexible logic gates LG1 LG6 Six timer gates with programmable on delay and or programmable off delay TG1 TG6 Logic latches Q1 Q2 System status associated with Pickup and Timeout of protective functions operation of Monitoring Mode System Alarms Breaker monitoring and control and communication logic states e Seven flexible Output logic gates OGI OG7 The FP 5000 functions are processed in the following order to ensure proper and predictable operation of the logic functions One cycle values for rms and phasor quantities are computed The Contact Input states are read Logic Blocking Gate functions Protection functions Breaker monitoring and control functions Logic Gate Timer Gate and Latch functions LG1 LG6 then TG1 TG6 then Q1 Q2 7 Logic Output Gate functions OG1 OG7 8 Output Relay logic routine oc Remember the programmed logic is evaluated sequentially element at a time Consequently if this is not taken into account the user may encounter unexpected logic operation 9 6 Programming Logic Functions Some settings will so substantially change the structure of program ming that they force the user to make a choice to save immediately and re enter Set Mode in order to continue The System Configuration settings that permit
20. FP 5000 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Typical Downstream Breaker DT 3000 FP 5000 B1 5000 DT 3000 B2 B3 P Figure 8 10 Zone Interlocking Example with FP 5000 and DT 3000 In general if the Zone Interlocking Input is enabled the absence of a zone in signal active an TOC pickup occurs and the fault direction is permissive an immediate trip will occur The immediate trip has a 3 cycle pickup delay to make sure the downstream devices have a chance to activate the zone interlock signal If the zone in signal is active then the programmed delay time is used If the Zone In setpoint is set to Phase and the fault direction is in the Zone Interlock Trip direction then any phase current above the pickup or 1 5 times the TOC pickup will cause an immediate trip in the absence of an active zone in signal Ground or residual current IOC or TOC will not cause an immediate trip The 1 5 time multiplier is used so that a low level current overload does not cause an immediate trip If the zone in signal is active then the pro grammed delay time is used Page 8 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com If the Zone In setpoint is set to Ground and the fault direction is in the Zone Interlock Trip direction then
21. The following display messages replace the normal display for the indicated time duration or until a pushbutton is pressed The messages are in response to transient conditions as described in Table 12 2 Table 12 2 FP 5000 Transient Messages Condition Display Message Text Duration Display if current is sensed during fault simulation Fault Test Aborted 5 seconds Open breaker pushbutton with breaker open Error Breaker Open 5 seconds Close breaker pushbutton with breaker closed Error Breaker Closed 5 seconds Update clock Clock Update Confirmed 5 seconds Display if Set pushbutton is pressed Remote Setting Change 5 seconds while a remote setting download is in progress in Progress Displayed when a download of settings occur Remote Download Settings 1 second Settings are saved and being processed Saving Settings To EEPROM 1 second in Progress Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 12 3 IL17569B Page 12 4 Effective Date 12 05 12 2 Troubleshooting the Protected Circuit The FP 5000 contains information that can be used to discover the nature of power distribution faults which is contained in the Event log Trip log History log and waveform capture In addition the FP 5000 can be useful in detecting problems with the breaker and current and voltage transformers 12 2 1 Event Log The Event log contains a chronological list of events
22. a c o o N o E 1 Multiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 7 IEC Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 11 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 12 Effective Date 12 05 ANSI Curves D 1 o c o o o o E 1 Multiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 8 ANSI Page 13 12 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 ETN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 13 Thermal Curves D 10 Phase IT n o o o o 2 E o E i Ground IT Ground I2T 1 Multiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 9 Thermal Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 13 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N
23. setting should be used for three phase three wire medium voltage power systems The In setting should be used on a three phase 4 wire system where a 4 CT is connected in the neutral conductor on The 10 should be used on a three phase 4 wire system when a zero sequence ground CT is used See Section 8 for more information The primary connected current rating of the phase CTs For example set to 800 for phase CTs of 800 5 The FP 5000 is designed for use with current transformers CTs having a nominal secondary current of either 5 amperes or 1 ampere The FP 5000 CT Ratio setting is displayed as nnn 5 for a 5 ampere CT unit and nnn 1 for a 1 ampere CT unit where nnn is the primary rating of the main CT The setting range for the primary rating is from 1 5 for a 5 ampere CT to 6000 The primary connected current rating for the Prog Logic fourth current input usually for neutral or ground If the ground measurement is taken from a residual phase connection then this setting will be the same as the Phase CT Ratio setting above If a zero sequence or ground CT is used then the primary rating for that CT will be used Voltage transformer connection wye or open delta Main voltage transformer ratio to one Example 13 2 kV system 120 V VT set Main VTR to 110 13200 120 Auxiliary voltage transformer ratio See example above This set point is the voltage across the VT secondary
24. 120 Vac 5A 240 Vac 5A Q9 125 5A 250 Vdc IPONI Communications TB3 J1 Baud Rate 9600 Fixed Max distance 10 000 feet Protocol INCOM Slave Media Shielded Twisted pair CH IMPCABLE BELDEN 9463 3072F Signal lines J1 1 J1 2 polarity not needed Shield J1 3 Filter referenced to chassis dc input impedance 2 ohms ac input impedance 100 kHz 30k 100 ohms unterminated terminated Switch Accessory Bus 2 FUTURE INTERFACE Baud Rate 9600 Fixed Max distance 10 000 feet Protocol INCOM Media Shielded Twisted pair CH IMPCABLE Belden 9463 3072F Signal lines J2 1 2 2 polarity not needed Shield J2 3 Filter referenced to chassis dc input impedance 2 ohms ac Input impedance 100 kHz 100 ohms permanent termination resistor Zone Interlock TB3 J3 Zone Out J3 1 Open collector output 4 5 V to common Zone In J3 4 Approximately 300K ohms input impedance Zone Common J3 2 3 5 internally connected Zone Shield 43 3 referenced direct to chassis NOT REQUIRED Page 3 2 Cable For more information visit www eatonelectrical com 14 18 AWG Twisted Pair 250 between 1 and last unit Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 3 3 RS 232 Front temporary programming monitor port PowerPort Connection Baud Rate 38 4 kB 19 2 kB 9 6 kB C
25. Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 17 System Alarms continued Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec VA Demand System VA Demand 5 5 3 Alarm Alarm Setting Units Select units for VA demand kVA or MVA kVA Threshold Select magnitude threshold 1 to 40 000 Disable Disable in primary units increments of 1 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 Current Demand System Current Demand 5 5 3 Alarm Alarm Setting Pickup Select pickup in primary units 10 to 10 000 amps Disable Disable increments of 10 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 I THD Alarm System Current Total Harmonic 5 5 3 Distortion Alarm Setting Threshold Select magnitude of THD Phase CT Primary 100 to Disable in primary units Phase CT Primary 10 increments of Phase CT Primary 100 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 3600 seconds 0 increments of 1s V THD Alarm System Voltage Total Harmonic 5 5 3 Distortion Alarm Setting Threshold Select magnitude of V THD Main VTR 10 to Disable in primary units Main VTR 10 increments of Main VTR 100 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 3600 seconds 0 increments of 1s Breaker Alarm Breaker alarm of operations 5 5 3 amp sum of interrupting amps of Operation of breaker operations based 1 to 9999 9999 on the 52a and 52b contacts inc
26. Figure 6 8 shows the common neutral connection of the three phase CTs and the ground fault CT connected at one point to a non current carrying ground Do not use a neutral or current carrying conductor for this grounding the noise will disrupt FP 5000 measurements Residual connection of the phase CT secondaries to form a ground current signal will not give sensitivity approaching that of the flux canceling ground CT 6 3 2 VT Wiring TB2 Wiring of the VTs into the FP 5000 phase voltage input terminals can be achieved several ways Figures 6 8 amp 6 9 gives a common example of the VT Wye wiring In Figures 6 10 amp 6 11 a Delta configuration is implemented using only two transformers saving cost weight and size The transformer polarity indicated by polarity dots must be carefully considered when designing the VT into the System It should be noted that the secondary side of the transformer center tap is tied to common input VB terminal 214 and VG terminal 218 It should be noted that an FP 5000 can accommodate a reverse phase sequence providing that phase voltages and current are in sync See Section 5 CAUTION TERMINAL TB218 VG IS INTERNALLY REFERENCED TO GROUND THROUGH A CONTROLLED IMPEDANCE TO THE FP 5000 CHASSIS THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY RETURN MUST BE PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUNDED AND TB218 CONNECTED TO THIS RETURN TB218 VG MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PHASE OR NEUTRAL CONNECTIONS 6 3 3 Output Contac
27. IS BONDED TO HOUSING FILTER CLAMP FRONT RS 232 PROGRAMMING PORT SHELL IS BONDED TO HOUSING DIRECT GROUND Startup consists of Programming the necessary operational parameters verifying the operation of the FP 5000 checking the wiring and verifying the reasonable operation of the system components before attempting to place the equipment into continuous service The programming should already be done before FP 5000 is placed into service Protection parameters may be reviewed in the View Settings mode or adjusted in the Set Mode Refer to wiring Figures 2 2 and 2 3 and Figure 6 5 on terminal definitions Section 3 Specifications for nominal ratings during startup 7 1 Power Off Checks With the incoming ac distribution power locked off and after all Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 7 1 Sources of power to the FP 5000 are de energized including control system battery check the wiring for conformance to the wiring plan developed for the application Verify that the CT secondary current rating and the FP 5000 CT input rating style agree either 5 A or 1 A See Section 1 8 Ordering Information for catalog number identification Verify that the Voltage Inputs are referenced to Voltage transform ers where the common is earth ground TB2 Terminal 218 Vg is internally bonded within the FP 5000 to protective earth and can not
28. Operate Relays using the single arrow down key The following procedure will test relay 3 in this example Scroll down using the single arrow key to Operate Rly3 and press Enter then Enter once again to confirm With an ohmmeter measure between pins 113 and 114 of connector TB1 to verify that Relay 3 is closed The resistance should be close to zero ohms Now press the Previous button to return to the test menu Scroll down to Reset Relays and press Enter Scroll down using the single down arrow key to Reset RIy3 Press Enter and Enter again to confirm Measure between pins 113 and 114 of connector TB1 again The ohmmeter should read a high resistance or O L for an open circuit This exercise can be performed on all relays listed in the Operate Relays menu Note Trip 1 amp 2 relays have approximately 44K across the open contacts as part of the monitor circuit 11 3 Cleaning Instructions Never clean the FP 5000 with the system or FP 5000 power energized Clean only with a dry clean cloth Do not use water or Solvents of any kind 11 4 Trip Battery Check The battery backed trip circuit latch is sourced by a user accessible disc button type battery located under the bottom right hand communication cover which is shared with the PowerPort RS232 interface To test the battery simply push the test button to the left of the battery holder with or without the FP 5000 powered If the green LED indicator located above
29. The Reset pushbutton performs many Reset functions one of which resets the display to show the default rms current and voltage display screen from any display menu when the relay is in normal monitoring mode The FP 5000 has a Reset menu which is accessed by pressing the Reset pushbutton when the unit is in normal monitoring mode This menu allows the user to reset all of the relay functions trips alarms peak current and power demands min max values history log param eters relays and the data logger There is no password protection for the reset functions See Display 4 2 Effective Date 12 05 Display 4 2 Reset Reset Main Trip Alarm Bkr Lockout Slow Bkr ALM Relay Peak Demand Values Min Max Values History Log Datalog Energy Display Diag Warnings Reset Logic Latches The user can reset a function by selecting a reset sub menu function listed above Simply use the Up Down arrow to move the screen s arrow to the function you want to reset and push the Enter pushbutton Below is an example of the sub menu reset display Screen when the Trip function is selected Reset Trip Press ENTER To Confirm PREVIOUS To Cancel For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 4 3 IL17569C Page 4 4 Effective Date 12 05 Monitor Pushbutton uM The Monitor pushbutton allows the user to go Monitor in to Monitor Mode and view all of the metered
30. The following acronyms abbreviations and definitions are used throughout this document Algorithms A set of rules or equations by which a value is calculated or a relay strategy is implemented by the FP 5000 processor ADC Analog to Digital Converter ADT Adjustable Definite Time is the time value provided by the user as fixed reset delay independent of current Analog Signal Currents and voltages are analog signals Apparent Power Factor Real power watts divided by volt amperes using the true rms values ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Code with one byte per character used for AWG American Wire Gauge Standard wire cross section area External Breaker Fault Initiation Bit Binary digit either 1 or 0 The smallest unit of information handled by a computer CH Cutler Hammer Click To quickly press and release the mouse button without moving the mouse COM1 Serial communication port 1 on a PC COM2 Serial communication port 2 on a PC Crest Factor The crest factor is the ratio of the peak value to the rms value It is equal to 1 414 for a pure sine wave CT Current Transformer DAS Data Acquisition System Digital Signal Digital inputs such as on or off switches Displacement Power Factor Fundamental watts divided by fundamental volt amperes This definition is valid only for the system fundamental operat
31. The time multiplier is defined as the relay trip time at a current value equal to 3 times laom for phase and 1 times laom for ground The relay trip times are dependent on the curve type selected See Section 8 for curve equations and application of the protective curves and time multipliers The Vrestraint available on the 51P 2 TOC setting restrains operation which reduces pickup levels This allows the user to lower the pickup value of each phase time overcurrent in relationship with the corresponding phase input voltage The Vrestraint on the 51P 1 TOC setting is reserved for future use When the minimum fault phase current is close to the load current it may make the phase time overcurrent protection coordination difficult In this case an undervoltage function may be used to alleviate this situation When the voltage is low the phase time overcurrent pickup threshold may be set low accordingly so that the phase time overcurrent protection may achieve adequate sensitivity and better coordination The FP 5000 uses a simple linear model to determine the effective pickup by characterizing the relationship between the voltage and the phase time overcurrent pickup threshold Vmin 0 25 Vmax 25 P 25 if V lt Vmin P 1 Vmax V Vmin 25 if Vmin lt V lt Vmax P 100 if V gt Vmax Where Vmax is less or equal to the phase to neutral voltage for the wye connection or the phase to phase voltage
32. Wiring IPONI Specifications Multiple Hosts Ports RS 232 Specifications Settings Table Default Compliance Components Optional Connection Rules Contact Inputs CFG Display Cinl Cin8 Configuration Setting Table Specifications Wiring Control Disarm Set Control Power Specifications CT Connection Options Four Wire Diagram Three Wire Diagram Wiring Configuration CT Connect Current Detecting Failure Nominal Verifying Current Demand Alarm CurrentP rotection Negative Sequence Current Transformer Inputs Specifications Current Unbalance Curves 5 13 5 13 19 Overlapping Issues Cutout IL17569C Page 14 1 10 1 4 21 5 54 5 55 10 1 32 10 1 1 1 4 4 5 55 10 1 3 2 5 54 5 38 5 60 3 5 13 20 3 1 5 45 1 3 8 3 8 4 8 8 7 2 1 6 1 6 2 Page 14 1 Effective Date 12 05 IL17569C Page 14 2 D Data Capture 8 15 Data Communications 10 1 Data Logging 8 15 8 16 Setpoints 8 15 Datalogger 5 50 Delta Voltage Transformers 8 10 Demand 4 8 Alarm 5 49 Current 5 49 VA 5 49 Var 5 49 Watt 5 49 Current 4 8 5 49 Display 4 8 Power 4 8 5 50 Device Numbers 134 Diagrams Blocking Logic Gate 9 4 Close Breaker 8 13 CT Wiring Configuration 6 12 Curve with t Shape 8 5 Electronic Trip Curves 8 4 Four Wire with IG CT 8 1 Four Wire with IN CT 8 1 Instantaneous Setting Adjustment 8 6 Inverse Time OvercurrentP ickup 8 4 Loss of Potential Open Breaker Open Delt
33. aah m Select current pickup value in per 0 1 to 20 0 disable N unit values Xl 0 01 increments Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Direction Select direction Forward Reverse Both 1 7 46 2 Unbal Alarm Threshold 12 11 Select magnitude of unbalance required either 1 or I2 Percent negative sequence 12 divided by positive sequence l1 0 1 to 20 0 x disable 0 01 increments 2 to 40 percent 196 increments pom _ NN Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments 47 2 V Unbal Alarm Threshold V2N1 Effective Date 12 05 Voltage Unbalance Alarm Settings Select magnitude of unbalance required either V1 or V2 Percent negative sequence V2 divided by positive sequence V1 Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments 1 to 100 Volts disable 50 1 voltincrements 196 increments For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 14 Effective Date 12 05 Alarms cont Value Selection Setting EN Sec pee LE 2 Select th overvoltage phases for the Any one any two or all three Any one 1 one 2 any two all Threshold V Sel ei the magnitude of overvoltage i to 150 Volts E Disable Delay Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles NN iN
34. determination of trip and alarm conditions Each of these trip and alarm criteria are considered independently of each other Whichever condition occurs first will cause the fault with no additional coordination between the processes 8 5 Zone Interlocking Behavior and Application To minimize damage to the system faults should be cleared as quickly as possible Zone interlocking provides this capability better than a system with only selective coordination Zone interlocking functions must be programmed see Section 5 5 2 9 before they can be used By default the function is disabled The zone interlocking protection scheme provides a way for a protective device to determine if a device in a downstream zone picks up a fault and is taking action With this information the protective device can immediately trip if no other device is taking action or use its programmed time delay if another device is taking action 8 5 1 Compatible Zone Interlock Devices The Cutler Hammer FP 5000 and DT 3000 protective relays support the zone interlocking function and are compatible with each other Refer to the DT 3000 instruction book 17555 for details on the DT 3000 implementation of the zone interlocking function 8 5 2 Connection Rules Zone interlocking information is passed on a two wire Twisted pair communication pair see Section 6 11 for complete wiring details All devices in the same zone wire their zone out terminals J3 1 and J
35. has been customized then selecting the Default I O will change all the Custom I O settings back to the factor default settings Changing this setting will immediately ask you to confirm and save the settings and will exit you out of the setting mode You will need to enter back into the Set Mode to continue your pro gramming session Please note that all settings made prior to this point will be saved upon the confirmation to save the settings This update is necessary for the relay to know if I O configuration is permitted and to give access to these settings The user may select either the default program mable logic or customized programmable logic settings Choosing customized programmable logic allows the user to freely program all of the logic gates See Programmable Logic Table 5 7 settings and in the descriptions below for more information The unit is shipped from the factory with Prog Logic set to default The programmable logic cannot be changed from the default settings unless this setting has been set to Custom Programmable Logic A Default programmable logic setting will not give the user access to the Programmable Logic settings in the Set Mode To view programmable logic configuration the user will need to exit the Set Mode and enter the View Setting mode and Scroll to the appropriate section If the relay programmable logic has been customized then selecting the Default Programmable Logic will change all t
36. i deme NE U Off Delay Select delay for Relayto dropout 0 to 600 cycles Was Mau c Select logic input IN1 for Output See Logic Input Options Trip All Prot Po dme MP Select logic input IN2 for Output See Logic Input Options Trip All Alm o lene Select logic input IN3 for Output See Logic Input Options Sys Alm All am Select logic input IN4 for Output See Logic Input Options Breaker All lam acid 2 Function Select logic output function for OR AND NOR NAND Select logic input IN1 for Output Aux See Logic Input Options Unused pe dem O C esa o IN2 Select logic input IN2 for Output Aux See Logic Input Options Unused pe dem O o IN3 Select logic input IN3 for Output Aux See Logic Input Options Unused o dem O C C INA Select logic input IN4 for Output Aux See Logic Input Options Unused o de sr pues o Q This setting is only used if the Dropout setting is set to Off Delay Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 23 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 24 Effective Date 12 05 Output Configuration Settings cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Trip Indicator Output Trip Indicator Settings Dropout Selectt
37. reset Press the Status Control pushbutton to view all of the FP 5000 status and control parameters The red LED in the upper left hand portion of the pushbutton area will illuminate while you are in the Status Control Mode Display 4 17 shows the options displayed by activating the Status Control pushbutton By using the Up Down pushbutton and scrolling down through the menu the user can view additional information about the status of all inputs outputs and control logic of the FP 5000 relay see Display 4 17 below By selecting the Control sub menu the user can set the FP 5000 control parameters as shown in the Control display See Section 5 for programming the control parameters Version display gives the user access to view the version of the product s boot code and application code For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 23 Display 4 17 Status Control 4 7 LEDs i Status Self Test Status Active Set Group 1 Status Control Input Status Status Output Status Control Logic Status Version Pickup Status Copyright l Trip Status System Alarm Status Breaker Status i UN Copyright 2001 Eaton Corporation All Rights Reserved Direction Units Sync Control se 2 Alarm Causes Version ontro
38. 4 Magnitude amp 4 Gnd Current Phasors Sequence Voltages IX Magnitude V2 N1 Magnitude IR Magnitude System Power rms Average Current MWatt Magnitude Avg Magnitude MVAR Magnitude 9 12 11 Magnitude MVA Magnitude IX Magnitude amp Z IR Magnitude amp Z 3V0 Magnitude amp Z V1 Magnitude amp 4 V2 Magnitude amp Z Sequence Currents rms L L Voltages System Freq PF 310 Magnitude amp Aux Voltage Phasor 11 Magnitude amp Z 12 Magnitude amp 4 VX Magnitude amp Z L L Voltage Phasors VAB Magnitude Freq Hz VBC Magnitude DspPF Magnitude VCA Magnitude Apt PF Magnitude rms L N Voltages 96 THD Currents VA Magnitude IA Percent VB Magnitude IB Percent Magnitude IC Percent Page 4 6 VAB Magnitude amp Z VBC Magnitude amp Z VCA Magnitude amp Z For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 4 6 1 3 Selecting the Energy Sub menu This section allows the user to view the following Energy parameters See Display 4 6 Watt Energy Hours Forward Reverse Net Var Energy Hours Lead Lag Net VA Hours Start Date and Time stamp the Unit started measuring Display 4 6 Energy Sub menu FP 5000 System Watt Hour System VA Hours kWh Fwd Mag
39. 52a Open Trip Circuit Breaker Feedback Cin2 52b Close Circuit Breaker Feedback Cin3 External Breaker Failure Initiation Cin4 Breaker Trouble Cin5 Remote Breaker Open If Enabled in Settings Cin6 Remote Breaker Close If Enabled in Settings Cin7 Remote FP 5000 Reset Cin8 User Defined 9 2 Output Relays The FP 5000 is equipped with seven electromechanical output relays The relays include five Form A output relays Trip1 Trip2 Rly3 Rly4 Rly5 one Form C Alarm output relay and a Form C Relay Healthy Alarm relay The functionality of the Relay Healthy alarm is fixed The functionality of the remaining six relays is programmed via the Output Config setting sub menu activated by the Set pushbutton A 4 input logic gate is associated with each of these six outputs Each output of the logic gate can be configured as an AND OR NAND or NOR gate The relays are energized based on the output logic gate programming and de energized based on the dropout setting Page 9 2 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Output relay operation may be programmed as Latched Unlatched or Off Delay The output relay is energized when any of the features programmed to the Output Logic Gate operate A description of the dropout for each mode of operation follows Unlatched When configured for Unlatched operation the state of the output relay directly follows the output state of
40. ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OPERATION OR APPLICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT IN ADDITION ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONS SHOULD BE PERMITTED TO PERFORM ANY WORK ASSOCI ATED WITH THE EQUIPMENT ANY WIRING INSTRUCTIONS PRESENTED IN THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE FOLLOWED PRECISELY FAILURE TO DO SO COULD CAUSE PERMANENT EQUIPMENT DAMAGE WARNING THE LOSS OF CONTROL VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE THE FP 5000 TO BE INOPERATIVE IF AC CONTROL VOLTAGE IS USED AN APPROPRIATE RELIABLE POWER SOURCE SCHEME SHOULD BE SELECTED POSSIBLY A UPS SYSTEM TO SUPPLY POWER TO THE RELAY Page 1 1 IL17569C Page 1 2 FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 1 4 Referenced Documents IMPACC Communications Standard IL 17384 IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers and Contact Designations C37 2 1996 ISBN 0 7381 0732 8 Standard IEEE Device Numbers 1 5 Commercial and Trademarks E T N Cutler Hammer Bn AC DC Power IN CT IN VT IN FP 5000 40V DC Source I O Resources Contact Input Difference VX1 VXa2 Acrobat Adobe Corporation Explorer Microsoft Corporation IMPACC Eaton Cutler Hammer INCOM Eaton Cutler Hammer IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers PowerNet Eaton Cutler Hammer PowerPort Eaton Cutler Hammer Windows Microsoft Corporation 1 6 FP 5000 Hardware Resources and Description The FP 5000 has four cu
41. All six logic gates contain the same through 6 settings as shown below Blocking Logic Gates for IOC Function Set to OR AND NOR Disable The and TOC Function setting defines the output of the logic gates with inputs IN1 IN2 IN3 and IN4 The default setting is OR Setting Group This setting defines the Setting Group for Function which the logic gate programming is active This setting is also linked to the System Config settings which is where the total number of settings groups 1 to 4 is pro grammed Setting Group IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 These settings define the logic inputs to Logic Gates 1 through 6 See the settings table and Section 9 6 for a complete description of the logic input settings Timer Gates 1 six timer gates contain the same settings as IN1 IN2 IN3 INA through 6 shown below Setting Group This setting defines the Setting Group for which the timer gate programming is active This setting is also linked to the System Config settings which is where the total number of settings groups 1 to 4 is programmed IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 53 This setting defines the logic input to Timer Gates 1 through 6 See the settings table and Section 9 for a complete description of the logic input settings This setting selects if the delay is based on Cycles or seconds Sets the number of cycles or seconds the Timer Gate input must remain active before the Timer Gate output bec
42. Boot Code Application Sel Active Set Grp Default Settings Comm Version Trigger Datalogger rig Waveform Capt 4 6 5 Set The Set pushbutton can be accessed through the security door on the front panel See Figure 4 1 Once the Set pushbutton is activated a password screen will show up on the display The password must be entered to change the FP 5000 settings To enter the password use the single up down arrow pushbutton to change the selected character of the password and use the double up down arrow pushbutton to change the value of the character Once the password is entered the user must then press the Enter pushbutton to enter the password and to activate the setting screens See Section 5 for a complete description of the FP 5000 product settings 4 6 6 Test The Test pushbutton can be accessed through the security door on the front panel see Figure 4 1 Once the Test pushbutton is activated a password screen will show up on the display The default password is 0000 Press Enter to enter the Test Mode The Test Mode allows the user to initiate current simulation tests operate output relays open or close the breaker and test the Zone Interlocking outputs See Section 11 for complete details on the Test Mode operation Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com The LEDs are used to indicate a number of func
43. C Determination of correct voltage or current phasor relationships and or balance D Setting integrity Effective Date 12 05 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Page 1 5 Page 1 5 IL17569C Page 1 6 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 1 8 Ordering Information The FP 5000 and a wide variety of related and support products are available at Cutler Hammer Refer to the table below for ordering information Style 66D2041G01 Catalog FP5000 00 Option Description 5ACT 48 125 Vdc 100 120 Vac Power Supply standard comm board Phase 1 V1 03 66D2041G02 FP5100 00 1ACT 48 125 100 120 Vac Power Supply standard comm board Phase 1 V1 03 Style Catalog Option Description 66D2041G18 FP5200 01 5ACT 48 125 Vdc 100 120 Vac Power Supply MODBUS comm board Phase 2 V2 02 66D2041G19 FP5300 01 1 ACT 48 125 100 120 Vac Power Supply MODBUS comm board Phase 2 V2 02 66D2041G11 FP5200 00 5ACT 48 125 Vdc 100 120 Vac Power Supply standard comm board Phase 2 V2 00 66D2041G12 FP5300 00 1ACT 48 125 100 120 Vac Power Supply standard comm board Phase 2 V2 00 66D2041G14 FP5200 10 5ACT 100 250 Vdc 100 240 Vac Power Supply standard comm board Phase 2 V2 02 66D2041G15 FP53
44. Compliance European 13 20 North American 13 20 StartUp 2 9 7 1 Status Control 2 9 4 22 Display 4 23 Style Numbers 1 5 Supply Wiring 6 4 Sync Check 5 47 Diagrams 2 3 2 5 Display 4 15 Table 5 12 System Alarm Display 4 17 Table 5 16 5 17 Default 5 58 System Config 5 3 5 4 5 56 T TechnicalAssistance 12 1 Terminal Identification 6 4 Reserved 6 5 Standard Communication Board 6 5 VT Terminals 6 5 Test 4 23 LED 4 23 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Relay 9 4 Testing 11 1 122 Overvoltage Protection 112 Self Status 1 3 Trip Monitors 112 Undervoltage Protection 112 Bench 111 Cause Table 12 10 Menu 11 3 Thermal 82 Curve 13 13 Time Delay 8 2 Time Overcurrent Specifications 3 4 IR TOC Curve 5 44 IR TOC Setting 5 44 IX TOC Curve 5 44 IX TOC Setting 5 44 Phase Inverse 5 42 TOC Reset T 5 40 Time Current Characteristic Curves 8 3 Timer Gates 5 53 Transient Messages 4 2 12 3 Trends NetP ower 10 4 Trip Blocking 9 4 Breaker 8 13 Curves 8 4 Disarm 9 4 Indicator 5 52 9 3 Log 12 12 Log Cause Table 12 12 Log Record 12 13 12 14 Output 5 51 Test 7 3 11 2 Trip Accuracy Specifications 3 4 Trip Indication Battery 4 5 Test 11 3 Test LED 4 23 Trip Log 4 21 Display 4 21 Troubleshooting 12 1 12 14 U Unbalance Settings 4 13 5 44 Table 5 8 Voltage Unbalance 5 44 Underfrequency 5 45 Undervoltage 5 45 8 9 Testing P rotection 112 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 V
45. Custom programming of the I O Configuration and Programmable Logic fall into this category Programming logic consists of picking the logic gates as in any logic design and connecting them together Instead of signals Data Stores record the state of each of the important system parameters as of the last determination or sampling Instead of wires logical name references direct the FP 5000 code to obtain the logic input from a particular Data Store The computed outputs of the logic elements are also saved The stored results may be directed to additional logic gate inputs until an output is directed to an output gate Thus the user specified or default logic results in a relay contact closing or opening Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 9 5 Programming of the logic functions is accomplished by selecting an input category and element for each logic gate input Input categories include Unused Pickup Trip Logic Inputs System Alarms Breaker Control and Communications The Pickup and Trip input categories include selection of individual or groups of protective functions The System Alarm category provides selection of power demand THD and breaker operation functions The Input category provides selection of one of the eight contact inputs The communications category provides selection of any of the four communications logic states the use
46. Display Contact Input CFG 1 52 2 52b Cin3 BFI BFI Breaker Fail Initiate Cin4 Bkr Trouble Cin5 Remote Open Cin6 Remote Close Remote Reset Cin8 user defined Page 4 18 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 4 6 2 5 Output Relay CFG Output Relay CFG Display Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 19 Output Trip1 lt l _ p Output Trip2 Monitor On Monitor Off Function OR Function Disable Dropout Off Delay Dropout Unlatched Off Delay c 5 Off Delay c 5 IN1 Trip AllProt IN1 Unused IN2 Control Open Bkr IN2 Unused IN3 Unused IN3 Unused IN4 Unused IN4 Unused Output Trip 3 Output Rly4 Function OR Function Disable Dropout Latched Dropout Unlatched Off Delay c 0 Off Delay c 0 IN1 Trip BF IN1 Unused IN2 Unused IN2 Unused IN3 Unused Output Trip1 IN3 Unused Output Trip2 IN4 Unused Output Rly3 IN4 Unused Output Rly4 Output Rly5 Output Alarm Output Rly5 Function OR Output Alarm Function OR Dropout Off Delay Dropout Unlatched Off Delay c 10 Output Aux LED Off Delay c
47. Failure Bkr Config Bkr Config 50BF Bkr Failure BF Config OFF L X Bkr Failure IPh pu Disable IGnd pu Disable Delay c 0 Page 4 14 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Power Factor Display Power Factor IL17569C Page 4 15 FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 Apparent PF Trigger PF Disable 55A Apparent PF Reset PF Disable 55D Displacement PF Zone Interlocking Display C Zone Interlocking B Delay s 0 L 55D Displacement PF Trigger PF Disable Resent PF Disable Delay s 0 Zone Interlock Trip r Phase or Ground Disable Direction Both SW sf Zone Interlock Trip Zone Interlock Out gt Sync Check Display Synch Check 25 Synch Check Hot Dead Vol Def Synch Override Other Settings Effective Date 12 05 Zone Interlock Out Phase or Ground Disable Direction Both 25 Synch Check Function Disable Max BCT 3 Synch Timeout 1 S gt Hot Dead Vol Def 25 In Sync Characteristic Min Live Voltgage 65 25 In Sync Characteristic Max Dead Voltgage 3 Max Voltgage Diff 24 Max Angle Diff 20 Max Slip Diff Volt Dead Time 10 0 20
48. Figure 8 14 Open Breaker Times in cycles unless stated otherwise Effective Date 12 05 www eatonelectrical com For more information visit Page 8 13 IL17569C Page 8 14 Effective Date 12 05 The FP 5000 Breaker Failure function provides the option of local tripping when Contact Input is detected and optional output relay operation if local breaker failure is detected see figure 8 15 below Table 8 6 lists the relevant setpoints to the breaker fail functions see programming Section 5 1 Table 8 6 Breaker Failure Settings FP 5000 Parameter Range Step Breaker Off Int Ext Both Failure Configuration BF Phase 0 1t0 5x CT 0 01 x Current Rating Disable CT Rating BF Ground 0 1 to 5x CT 0 01 x Current Rating Disable CT Rating Breaker 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Failure Delay Time Contact BFI Input X Configuration Output Gate Rly X Trip BF If the Breaker Failure Configuration is programmed to Off then no Breaker Failure function is possible The default configuration for Breaker Failure Configuration is Off If the Breaker Failure Configuration is set to Int if an IOC or TOC phase ground or residual trip operation occurs if after Breaker Failure Delay Time cycles the current is above BF Phase or BF Ground current limits then the Breaker Failure BF Trip indication is given as well as the Breaker Failure Lockout indication BF CFG INTERNAL OR BO
49. For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Each timer gate has a single input and a single output with internal on delay and off delay timers The setting range on the timers is 0 to 9999 cycles with 1 cycle resolution The latches include a set input and a reset input The reset input has the highest priority If both the set and reset inputs are active the latch output is inactive A diagram of each logic gate is shown in Figure 9 3 Programmable Logic Elements A programmable logic gate or timer gate output may be connected to other timer or logic gates used to trigger waveform capture Logic Gate 6 or tied to an output gate to control an output relay Timer Gate LG1 LG6 On Delay TG1 TG6 Off Delay Logic Gate Output Gate 061 007 Reset In Figure 9 3 Programmable Logic Elements The default settings for the input and output functions are defined in the previous sections The default settings for the remaining logic functions are disabled or unused User Defined logic may only be entered under the Set Mode if the Prog Logic setting in the System Configuration menu is changed from Default to Custom If a diagnostic failure is detected the protective functions and logic functions are disabled and the Relay Healthy Alarm relay is de energized The other relays will not change state 9 4 Trip and Alarm Blocking The FP 5000 has blocking logic functions t
50. If 1 Pass is selected the datalogger will stop collecting data after 1024 records are logged The datalogger must be reset to restart data collection If Cont is selected the datalogger will continuously collect data and overwrite the oldest data The trigger can be set to Auto or Manual The manual Trigger is used to begin logging in the single pass mode from a pushbutton contact input or communication command 1 pass must be chosen to use data log in a manual mode Sets the interval in seconds 1 to 3600 s in 1 s steps for logging the specified data in the datalogger Each Value from 1 through 8 can be set to log monitored data from any of the following parameters IA IB IC IX IR lavg IO I1 12 VA VB VC VX VLNavg VAB VBC VCA VLLavg VO V1 V2 Freq W VAR Dsp PF App PF IA Demand IB Demand IC Demand W Demand var Demand VA Demand Cin1 Cin2 Cin3 Cin4 Cin5 Cin6 Cin7 Cin8 LG1 LG2 LG3 LG4 LG5 LG6 TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 TG5 TG6 IA THD IB THD IC THD VA THD VB THD VC THD VAB THD VBC THD VCA THD Oscillographic waveform information is available only through the communication interfaces but setup and configuration may be done from the front panel The FP 5000 can record 256 cycles of all 4 voltage and current waveforms at 32 samples per cycle Sets the number of records and record size to store waveform capture data Selection is either Effective Date 12 05 E T
51. Main V 4 13 Negative Sequence Current8 6 8 7 Neutral V 4 14 Number SetGroups 5 40 Phase Overcurrent 4 11 Power 4 14 Power Factor 4 15 Settings 5 42 Sync Check 4 15 Unbalance Settings 4 13 Voltage Settings 8 9 Zone Interlocking 4 15 Pushbutton 4 3 Arrows 4 4 Close 4 4 Page 14 4 FP 5000 Enter Log Monitor Open Page Up and Page Down Previous Reset Set Status C ontrol Test Up and Down View Setting R Rear Terminal Designations 6 6 Records Referenced Documents Relay Contacts Relay Ouput Contacts Specifications Relay Output Specifications Relay Test Remote Set Breaker Reset Retrofit Cutout Reverse Watthours RS 232 Specifications S Safety Set Control LED Mode Settings Default Discriptions Flowchart Multiple Groups Protection Restoring Table Sleep Mode Slow Breaker Alarm 5 39 5 55 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Specifications Accessory Bus 3 2 Compliance 3 5 Contact Inputs 3 1 Control Power 3 1 CurrentTransformer Inputs 3 1 Dimensions 3 5 Environmental Ratings 3 5 IPONI Communications 3 2 Metering Accuracy 3 3 Principal Parameters 3 3 Relay Output 3 1 Relay Output Contacts Rating 3 2 RS 232 3 2 Time Overcurrent 3 4 Trip Accuracy 3 4 Voltage Tranformer Inputs 3 1 Zone Interlock 3 2 Standard Communication Board J1INCOM PN 6 5 12 INCOM AB 6 5 3 Zone Interlock 6 5 4 5 6 5 Standard
52. Page 12 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 IL17569B Page 12 9 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 contact output changes will be logged in the event log and no programming is necessary If more than one relay changes state at exactly the same time because of a single causal event activating more than one relay only one log is entered into the event log Table 12 8 summarizes all output event causes that will be logged Table 12 8 Event Output Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given Relay Changed One of the first 6 relays Trip 1 Trip 2 RIy3 Rly4 Rly5 or Alarm has changed state Output Status contains the status flag for all contact outputs Healthy State The Relay Healthy contact output has changed state Output Status contains the status flag for all contact outputs Breaker commands that come through the FP 5000 breaker state changes and breaker alarms are all logged automatically in the event log Table 12 9 shows all possible causes for breaker event logs Table 12 9 Event Breaker Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given Open Breaker An Open Breaker command is given remotely or through the front panel pushbutton Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Close Breaker A Close Breaker command is given remotely or through the
53. Password The factory default password is 0000 A password of 0000 will always be accepted during the first 2 minutes after the FP 5000 is powered up This allows the user to enter a new password in case the password is forgotten To change the password select Change Password setting in the Setting Main display window Use the single arrow up down pushbuttons to move among the 4 character locations of the password and use the double arrow pushbuttons to change the value of the 4 character password Zero through nine and A to Z are available for each password character If the user presses Enter for the password window without changing any password character the default password of 0 is accepted The user can change the password to any nonzero values However if the user changes the password to any nonzero values pressing Enter will not permit entry to the settings or the test functions The correct password has to be entered The same password is valid for setting mode as well as the test mode The FP 5000 password is not valid for PowerNet PowerNet has its own password scheme Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 55 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 56 Effective Date 12 05 5 5 Default Settings The Default Settings Table shows all of the System Configuration settings and the remaining settings that are enabled or turned on when the FP 5000 leaves the factory If the us
54. Record Line by Line Line Display Description 1 Trip Unique number assigned to every trip event sequentially The numbers rolls over after 65 535 2 Time HH MM SS mmm The time of the event displayed in hours minutes seconds and milliseconds The hours will be in 24 hour mode or 12 hour mode with an AM PM designation according to the programmed setpoint 3 Event The event number is a unique number given for each log in the event log The event number is a reference to the event log of the trip relay activating This is useful to synchronize the event log to the trip log 4 Cause The cause of the trip relay activation is given and is detailed in Table 12 11 5 Fit Type Fault type details the phases or ground channel that has caused the fault Fault type will only have value for current TOC IOC protective functions and the main under and overvoltage protective functions 6 Set Seq Num The setting sequence number is a unique number given when new setpoints are saved It is a way of identifying which setpoints were in use at the time of the trip 7 WaveCap Index The waveform capture index is a unique number that is assigned to every waveform capture operation A waveform is automatically captured every time the Trip1 relay activates and can be programmed to capture a waveform when the Trip2 relay activates 8 ActiveSetGrp Active Setting Group in effect whe
55. Software application that facilitates logging of energy usage data from alternate sources PowerNet DDE Energy Logger uses DDE connectivity to gather and integrate energy data from third party sources into the PowerNet System The PowerNet DDE Energy Logger application utilizes the industry standard Dynamic Data Exchange DDE protocol to exchange information with a target DDE Server Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 11 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 11 1 Overview of Testing and Maintenance The FP 5000 is designed to be a self contained and maintenance free unit The printed circuit boards and related assemblies are calibrated and conformally coated at the factory no field calibration is required They are intended to be serviced by factory trained personnel only The drawout design allows for user hot swap out of the inner chassis if a failure is detected without disturbing the field circuit connections to the outer chassis The outer chassis provides shorting contacts for the current monitor inputs preventing breaks in the power distribution current loop monitoring circuits No external shorting terminals are necessary The FP 5000 uses a multifunctional microprocessor and an Analog to Digital converter to monitor current and voltage inputs The microprocessor also monitors all external digital and analog inputs The microprocessor performs self tests on power up initialization and periodically while powered and will report a
56. The outputs will need to be configured if the desired use is not an alarm function SYSALM pickup in the Event Log Enable settings must be set to Yes to enable logging of Pickup Dropout events related to system alarms Watt Power Alarm Units Sets the units for watts measurement KW or MW Threshold Sets the watts threshold level in units specified at or above which the power pickup Effective Date 12 05 Delay m Cutler Hammer FP 5000 1117569 event occurs After pickup if the watts fall below the specified threshold a power dropout event occurs Sets the number of minutes that the watts must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs VAR Power Alarm Units Threshold Delay m VA Power Alarm Units Threshold Delay m Sets the units for VAR measurement KVAR or MVAR Sets the VARS threshold level in units specified at or above which the power pickup event occurs After pickup if the VARS fall below the specified threshold a power dropout event occurs Sets the number of minutes that the VARS must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs Sets the units for VA measurement or MVA Sets the VA threshold level in units specified at or above which the power pickup event occurs After pickup if the VA falls below the specified threshold a power dropout event occurs Sets the number of minutes that the VA mus
57. V THD Alarm VA Demand Alarm VA Hours Var Demand Alarm Var Power Alarm Var Hours Lagging Leading Net View Settings Display Voltage Detecting Failure Verifying Voltage Delta Input Wiring Options and Connection Schematics with Sync Check Voltage Functions Voltage Protection Setting Loss Potential Overvoltage Table Undervoltage Voltage Restraint Voltage Transformer Inputs Specifications Voltage Wye Input Wiring Options and Connection Schematics with Sync Check VT Connect VT Secondary Rating VT Terminals W Watt Demand Alarm Watt Power Alarm Watthours Forward Net Reverse Waveform Capture Data NetPower Setpoints Wiring Wiring 6 10 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 48 31 6 8 5 39 5 39 6 5 5 49 5 48 Effective Date 12 05 IL17569C Page 14 5 Wye Connected Application Diagram 2 2 Wye Connected Application with Sync Check Diagram 2 3 Wye Voltage Transformers 8 10 7 Zone Interlock Application Behavior Connections Devices Display Operation Specifications Table Verify For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 14 5 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 14 6 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page 14 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 ETN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 14 7 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www e
58. any ground or residual current above the IOC pickup or the TOC pickup will cause an immediate trip in the absence of an active zone in signal Phase current IOC or TOC will not cause an immediate trip If the zone in signal is active then the programmed delay time is used In the case that the breaker that is taking action fails to open the circuit the zone out signal is removed in one of two ways 1 If the breaker fail function is active then the zone out signal is immediately removed See Section 5 Programming on page 5 1 and Section 8 9 Breaker Oriented Functions 2 If the protective relay has operated but the current is still sensed the zone out signal is removed 10 cycles after the operation Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 8 6 Voltage Functions and Protection 8 6 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Protection 47 The FP 5000 provides monitoring and protection based on the percent of voltage unbalance or negative sequence voltage The presence of negative sequence voltage identifies either a phase unbalance or reverse phase rotation condition The positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated from the three phase voltages The unbalance is the ratio of negative sequence voltage to positive sequence voltage Unbalance V V voltage unbalance pickup occurs when V V exceeds the VUB Unbalance setting and the V or the V magnitude exceeds the VUB Threshold setting The Voltage Unbalance trip is set whe
59. are defined by ANSI C37 112 and IEC curves are defined by IEC 255 3 These curve shapes combined with the customized capability of the short delay and instantaneous functions allow for very versatile coordinated protection schemes The thermal curve shape is also customized by the user for any desired type of coordinated protection scheme FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer These curves show how and when a particular relay will act for given values of time and current The more versatile the relay the easier it is to accomplish close coordination and achieve optimum protection Since the FP 5000 Protective Relay is very versatile the makeup of a typical curve is presented for clarification For the sake of simplification the curve discussion will center on a single line curve Keep in mind however that a characteristic curve in reality is represented by a band of minimum and maximum values not a line Figure 8 5 Sample Electronic Trip Curves below Minimum and maximum values are generally the result of manufac turing tolerances for components and the relay s accuracy Any expected value of tripping current or time could be the nominal value anticipated within a plus or minus tolerance The tolerances are usually stated in terms of the relay s accuracy and frequently highlighted on the actual working curves Accuracy is stated in terms of a plus or minus percentage and represents a permitted fluctuation on either side of the nominal tr
60. based on energy provider metrics such as rate schedules rate periods and seasons and energy user profile informa tion such as group charges individual charges and individual billing formulas PowerNet Trend PowerNet Trend is a PowerNet Software application that graphically displays energy data collected by the PowerNet DeviceServer PowerNet Trend plots energy utilization by kilowatt hours or demand by kilowatts over time PowerNet Trend can plot energy profiles of loads or combinations of loads which you can then save for viewing at a later time PowerNet Modbus Tools PowerNet Modbus Tools is a PowerNet Software application that is used to define Modbus register mapping in PowerNet DeviceServers A PowerNet DeviceServer serves as an interface between a Modbus Master and IMPACC devices and supports a subset of the standard Modbus serial protocol communication NetPower Monitor PowerNet Monitor is a PowerNet Software application used to monitor and control devices on PowerNet DeviceServers With PowerNet Monitor you can view all the detailed device information as well as a summary view of current and energy information and device alarm information PowerNet Waveform PowerNet Waveform is the PowerNet Software application that allows you to command certain IMPACC devices to capture waveform data to upload the waveform data from devices to a file and to view a graphical representation of waveform data PowerNet can r
61. be connected to neutral or a phase reference WARNING VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE OFTEN CONNECTED UP STREAM FROM THE BREAKER CIRCUIT MONITORED AND SO MAY BE DIFFICULT TO DISENGAGE 7 2 Initial Control Power On Checks All power sources should be disconnected as described in Section 7 1 Disable all trip and control circuits Disconnect and insulate the breaker trip coil load leads from any of the trip relay terminals typically Relay1 and Relay2 on TB1 terminals 116 and 118 to prevent breaker from energizing during most of this testing Disconnect and insulate any control circuit loads connected to the remaining control relays on the FP 5000 Verify FP 5000 power supply control power Disconnect the ac or dc control power lead to terminals TB101 4 Connect a voltmeter to the circuit that fed TB101 and the return on TB102 Energize the FP 5000 power supply power source and monitor the voltage Make sure that it is within nominal specifications Battery system 48 125 Vdc or control power transformer 100 120 Vac For 250V power supply Battey system 100 250 Vdc Control power transformers 100 240 Vac De energize the power supply source Verify trip relay control voltage Connect a voltmeter between each trip relay breaker trip coil load wire just disconnected from terminal 116 or 118 and the other meter lead to the control power source TB115 117 Ener
62. current Time Over 4 Gho A aiii var Or YAAA Current operation P 51R TOC A Residual current Time Over PUE 1 Demand var or WA arm operation Current operation 51X TOC An IX ground current Time Over RLY Test A Relay test has caused an operation Current operation THD CurAlm ATHD Current Alarm operation 55A PF An Apparent Power Factor operation THD VolAlm A THD Voltage Alarm operation 55D PF A Displacement Power Factor operation Zin Trip A Zone Interlock operation 59A OV An Auxiliary Overvoltage operation LOP ALM Loss of Potential Alarm operation 59M OV A Main Overvoltage operation 59N OV A Neutral Overvoltage operation Note The Cause of Trip is reported as Logic if the output Gate Function is set to AND NOR or NAND Page 12 12 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 13 From the main page of the trip log any one record of an event can be chosen Simply move the arrow using the arrow pushbuttons to the event you would like more detail on and then press Enter Each individual record has many lines of information Table 12 15 shows what information is included in every line Some lines contain another level of information that can be accessed by using the arrow keys to select the line and then pressing Enter All such lines in the trip log are marked with asterisks in Table 12 15 Table 12 15 Trip Log
63. does not enlarge or add to any such contract The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Eaton Cutler Hammer NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRAN TIES OF FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMA TION RECOMMENDATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN In no event will Eaton Cutler Hammer be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract in tort including negligence strict liability or otherwise for any special indirect incidental or conse quential damage or loss whatsoever including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment plant or power system cost of capital loss of power additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information recommenda tions and description contained herein Page 12 1 IL17569B FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 12 2 Effective Date 12 05 12 1 4 Self Test Failure indication When a diagnostic self test indicates a failure an error message is displayed instead of the default metering display and the Healthy Relay K7 is de energized no longer indicating proper operation All other display screens operate normally to permit display of diagnostic information during troublesh
64. enter selecting Trig Waveform Capt and pressing enter and pressing enter a second time This trigger is useful to test the waveform capture system Comm This enables waveform triggering through external communication means Each trigger described above can be set to one of three settings Disable Overwrite and Lock If programmed as Disable then the waveform trigger cannot occur If programmed as Overwrite or Lock when the trigger event occurs a new waveform will be captured if space is available The FP 5000 will use the pro grammed number of record space 16 8 or 4 records in the following order 1 If a waveform record space is empty it will be used A space is empty when no waveform has ever been written to it or the previous waveform was cleared after being downloaded over the communication channel 2 If a waveform record was recorded with an Overwrite trigger then the oldest overwrite record will be written over 3 If a waveform record has been recorded due to a Lock trigger event then no other waveform capture can overwrite this record until it has been downloaded over the communications channel The Trip 1 event is always a Lock trigger If all the previously recorded waveforms are locked then the new waveform capture is lost All new capture will be lost until wave forms are downloaded 8 11 Data Logging Functions The FP 5000 can capture selected measured data at selected periodic intervals
65. for the delta connection Once the voltage restraint is enabled the effective phase time overcurrent pickup threshold will be the calculated P times the phase time overcurrent pickup setting The effective pickup Page 5 43 IL17569C Page 5 44 Effective Date 12 05 threshold must be within the setting range allowed and if it s less the minimum pickup value will be used see figure 5 6 25 x max Figure 5 6 Voltage Restraint Characteristic 50P 1 PH IOC 1 and 50P 2 PH IOC 2 These are the two 50 device phase instantaneous overcurrent settings which are two independent elements Both units have time delay settings available One element could be used for a Short Time element with a short time delay and the other as Instanta neous element with zero time delay to improve flexibility and coordination of the OC curves The pickup setting range of 0 1 to 20 0 per unit in 0 01 steps The time delay may be set from zero to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps The cycle time is based on power System frequency The direction setting operates the same as described above in the 51P PH TOC Curve Settings 5 4 2 2 IX Measured OC Settings 51X IX TOC Curve This includes is the 51 device Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Setting based on the measured fourth CT input which is usually used for neutral or ground overcurrent protection It is independent from the phase elements and may have its measurement
66. front panel pushbutton Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Bkr Opened The Breaker State is determined to be Opened Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Bkr Closed The Breaker State is determined to be Closed Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Bkr Lockout The Breaker has failed to break the current in the programmed amount of time Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Slow Bkr Alm The Breaker has taken more than 40 cycles Breaker Status contains all the flags to close or more than 30 cycles to open related to the breaker Bkr State Alm There is a state disagreement between Breaker Status contains all the flags the 52A and 52B contact inputs related to the breaker Trip1 Mntr Alm The Breaker is determined to be in the closed state and no trickle open trip coil current is sensed around the Trip 1 contact output Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Trip2 Mntr Alm The Breaker is determined to be in the open state and no trickle close coil current is sensed around the Trip 2 contact output Breaker Status contains all the flags related to the breaker Whenever the communication variable input changes if so programmed it will be logged in the event log Table 12 10 shows the cause for this event log Table 12 10 Event Communication Ca
67. has picked up all system alarm pickups or dropped out LOP Loss of potential has pickup or dropped Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that off describe all under and overvoltage pickups Coldload Coldload pickup has been on or off Sync Control Status contains the status flags for sync check and cold load conditions Page 12 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 7 Every time a protective function operates it is recorded in the Event log by default and no extra programming is needed Note most values given with each log can be accessed by selecting the line immediately below the Cause and pressing Enter The information given is a group of status flag states at the time of the event Table 12 6 shows all of the protective operations that can be logged in the Event log Table 12 6 Event Operate Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given 50P IOC Phase Instantaneous Over Current has operated OC Trip Status contains status flags that describe the state of all possible IOC and TOC trip functions 50X IOC IX ground Instantaneous Over Current has operated OC Trip Status contains status flags that describe the state of all possible IOC and TOC trip functions 50R IOC IR Residual Instantaneous Over Current has operated OC Trip Status contai
68. initial power up of the FP 5000 the displayed Meter Menu values may not be what is anticipated for your specific system The unit must first be programmed with General Setup information relating to your electrical system CAUTION THE FP 5000 MUST BE SET FOR THE PARTICULAR APPLICA TION BEFORE ENERGIZING THE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM 2 2 lnitial Checks Your FP 5000 will either come pre installed in a panel or as a separate FP 5000 component assembly package including an Outer Chassis assembly and an Inner Chassis assembly containing the major portion of the operating electronics Follow Section 7 Startup if a review of the installation is required 2 3 Standard Mounting The FP 5000 is shipped with the Outer Enclosure assembled with a backing plate between the enclosure housing box and the front latching frame This factory assembled outer chassis allows for panel thickness variations minor panel distortions and has relaxed panel cutout tolerance requirements for easy faster panel mounting The panel footprint outline is equivalent to the Cutler Hammer DT3XXX and MP3XXX drawout designs However it differs from most Cutler Hammer IQ style panel mounts in that The panel cutout is slightly larger The enclosure is mounted from the front user side of the panel Four mounting studs nuts are used for panel mounting instead of 10 mounting screws The standard panel cutout is shown in Figure 2 1 Please refer to Sectio
69. ltteweincomensy Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 5 IL17569C Page 5 6 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 2 Protection continued 50P 2 PHIOC 2 Pickup Phase Overcurrent Element 2 Setting Select current pickup value in per unit values X lhom 0 1 to 20 0 or Disable 0 01 increments Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Direction Select direction Forward Reverse Both Measured OC Independent fourth CT time overcurrent 51 X and instantaneous 50 1 amp 50X 2 device settings Display Setting 51X IX TOC Curve Description Fourth CT Time Overcurrent Curve Setting Uses gnd CT ratio Select curve characteristic shape Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec IT 2 I4T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB IECC Reset Select curve reset characteristics Calc T Delay Direction 51X IX TOC Setting Pickup Select direction Forward Reverse Both 0 1 to 4 0 or Disable 0 50 0 01 increments Fourth CT Time Overcurrent Pickup and Time Multiplier Settings Select current pickup value in per unit values X lj Time Mult Select Time Multiplier 0 05 to 10 0 1 00 01 increments 50X 1 IX IOC 1 Pickup Fourth CT Overcurrent Element 1 Setting Select current pickup value in per un
70. neutral voltages for Wye connections The overvoltage pickup and trip functions are reset when the voltage drops below 9896 of the overvoltage set threshold Loss Potential This is the Loss of Potential setting it consists of LOP loss of Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 45 potential Block and Alarm Delay settings The LOP Block setting when enabled will block the voltage restraint function of the 51P2 time overcurrent and the under power protection functions and the LOPB flag bit which is one of the programmable logic input options The Alarm Delay 0 to 999 cycles in cycle steps is the time period a LOP must occur before the FP 5000 initiates an alarm 59N 1 Overvoltage This is the 59 device for the Neutral Overvoltage settings This function consists of a Source and Criterion setting The Source setting dictates if the function is operated based on internally calculated zero sequence voltage or the measured neutral voltage through auxiliary voltage input The criterion setting tells if the threshold is based on the fundamental Phasor or rms 59N 1 Overvoltage Trip This is the 59 device for the Neutral Overvoltage trip settings This function consists of a Threshold and Delay setting The Threshold sets the magnitude 5 to 250 V in 1 volt increments at which the neutral overvoltage function operates The delay setting 0 to
71. overridden by certain bus line operation conditions and can be bypassed with an external source The frequency measurement is based on the phase A on the bus side The voltage measurement on the line side can be any phase to ground or phase to phase voltage Suppose Figure 5 8 Sync Check Characteristic that the voltage difference between bus and line sides at breaker closing is Vp VL Sync Timeout Settings In the version V2 01 or later application code the setting Sync _ Timeout unit is changed from cycle to second extending Sync G Timeout limit to about 18 2 hours Note especially that 0 timeout means no timeout or infinity Depending on the value of the Sync AV _ VL timeout the sync check logic will behave differently Sn y V When Synch Timeout is set to zero the sync check function acts B B like a stand alone 25 device In this case the sync check function will only check two source voltages As long as two sources meet the in sync and override conditons the in sync flag will be set The Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 47 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 48 Effective Date 12 05 Wye or Delta Synch enable From Close Initiate 4 abo E OU iLive Vmin i 4 Synch Failure Time
72. panel mounting holes as shown in Figure 6 2 Secure the assembly from the inside of the panel with the four number 10 mounting nuts provided Use moderate torque of 10 inch pounds The front latching frame and backing plate should be snug against the mounting panel If it is not inspect the installation for accuracy of the panel cutout and possible interference correcting as necessary R 25 R6 4 MAX TYP OPTIONAL 3 43 87 0 Y bu 6 0 DIA gt 4 PLACES Figure 6 2 Panel Cutout and Mounting Holes Page 6 2 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer 6 2 IQ Panel Cutout Retrofit It is possible to retrofit the outer chassis to an existing IQ style panel cutout if the panel is guaranteed to be 125 inches thick and distortion free Insure that there are no mechanical problems that could effect the overall mounting thickness of the outer chassis from the termination back to the front of the latching frame Given an acceptable undistorted IQ cutout then the outer chassis must be disassembled to put the latching frame on the front and the outer chassis box on the back of the panel The six mounting nuts on the plastic mounting frame should be removed saved for reassem bly and the frame pulled from the outer chassis assembly The back plate frame is removed leaving the back metal chassis box This back pl
73. password protection and through the physical restraint of a security door which may be sealed with a lead seal CAUTION CHANGING THE SETTINGS OF THE FP 5000 WILL SUBSTANTIALLY IMPACT SYSTEM OPERATION ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL WHO ALSO POSSESS THE PASS WORD MAY MAKE MODIFICATIONS TO THE FP 5000 SET TINGS 2 5 4 Entering Set Programming Mode Lift the security door cover over the Set and Test buttons on the front panel and press the Set pushbutton The Set LED at the upper right corner of the Set pushbutton will illuminate and the display will change to the Password request Window Unauthorized programming is prevented by password protection and by means of the security door over the Set pushbutton which may be secured with the lead seal making apparent any programming access Minimal programming will be described in this Quick Start section Please refer to the complete programming instructions in Setting the FP 5000 Section 5 2 5 2 Password The Setting Mode from the Front Panel is password protected to prevent access by unauthorized users In order to access the programming mode of the FP 5000 a password must be entered Each Password is a 4 character alphanumeric value The FP 5000 is shipped with the password protection effectively disabled set to the default of 0000 Entering Program Mode or Test Mode with acceptance of the default password is done by pressing the Enter button with the 4 asterisk Passwor
74. required settings return the FP 5000 to its default programmed settings Press the Status Control pushbutton to access the Default Setting Control After pressing Status Control select Default Setting Ctr and press the Enter pushbutton Select Load Default Setting and press Enter again The Password Window will appear to verify your authorization to make the desired change in the settings After password entry select Load ALL Settings and press Enter A final verification display will enable you to accept the change by pressing Enter or cancel by using the Previous pushbutton 2 5 8 Programming Programming consists of selecting System Config or Protection from the Setting Main list For the System Config items simply Scroll to the item select with Enter vary with Up Down and select with Enter For Protection select Setting Group 1 the only default group enabled and scroll to select the functions to be changed as for System Config To save settings press Previous until the screen requires Enter to Save or Previous to Cancel Update Settings ENTER to Save Previous to Cancel Reset to Exit Set Press the key desired and this operation is completed Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 2 9 2 5 9 Active Alarm Status The FP 5000 default settings provide connection and monitoring of breaker state and t
75. source provided Double click on the file using Widows Explorer and follow the installation instructions 12 4 2 Preparation for Downloading with FlashLoader Make sure that the FP 5000 is active and not in standby mode If the display is blank press any key to activate the unit Start the FlashLoader program on your PC and follow the instructions The operation of the program is self explanatory however the following description will enhance the user s understanding of this program Verify the Baud rate setting for the front panel RS 232 port The setting may be viewed by pressing the View Setting button selecting Communications RS 232 and reading the Baud rate The default Baud rate for the FP 5000 is 19 200 The default Baud rate setting for the FlashLoader is 9600 In order to decrease the download time consider setting both to 38 400 Set the FP 5000 Baud rate setting before starting the FlashLoader Connect your PC to the front panel RS 232 connector on the front panel of the FP 5000 using a standard DTE to DSE cable The FP 5000 front panel RS 232 connector is wired as a 9 socket Female Data Set DSE D Subminiature under the RS 232 standard Typical PCs are wired as a 9 pin Male Data Terminal DTE under the RS 232 standard Sometimes PCs might have a 25 position D Subminiature connector In the case of the 9 position configuration an off the shelf Male DB9 to Female DB9 straight through connection cable
76. the current transformer input terminals TB4 See Section 6 for phase identification and wiring tips Also provide a three phase voltage input to the unit under test Refer to the FP 5000 time current curves Set the unit s setpoints as desired and note the expected trip time as indicated on the trip curve Apply the test current and note the start time Select the Monitor button on the front panel and verify the proper current and voltage inputs Polarity and phasing of the currents and voltages must be considered Next note the trip time of the trip coil The FP 5000 should trip within the time indicated on the time current curves For tolerances see the Table of Specifications in Section 3 1 11 2 3 2 Verify Zone Interlock Connect the contact of the Zone Interlock output to the contact of the Zone Interlock input Verify settings input current and expected trip times as mentioned above in Section 11 2 3 1 In the View Settings menu verify the Zone Interlock is enabled Test the unit by applying current as in the test in 11 2 3 1 Trip times should be as indicated in Table specification Remove the short from Zone Interlock Out to Zone Interlock In Repeat the previous test The trip times should be much faster around 050 seconds The Zone Interlock output can be checked through the use of the Test Zone Interlock menu item from the test menu A simple voltmeter can be used for this test This function is available under the bottom l
77. the Main 3 phase VT This function consists of a Phase Threshold V and Delay setting The Phase setting allows the user to select which phase any one any two or all the undervoltage function operates The Threshold V setting is the magnitude 10 to 150 V in 1 volt steps at which the undervoltage function operates The Delay setting 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps is the time period an undervoltage must occur before the FP 5000 initiates a trip This function will operate if any of the 3 phase voltages drop below the set point This setting is based on line to line voltages for Delta configurations and line to neutral voltages for a Wye configuration The undervoltage pickup and trip functions are reset when the voltage raises above 102 of the undervoltage set threshold 59M 1 Overvoltage This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Main VT This function consists of a Phase Threshold V and Delay setting The Phase setting allows the user to select which phase any one any two or all the overvoltage function operates The Threshold V setting is the magnitude 10 to 150 V in 1 volt steps at which the overvoltage function operates The Delay setting 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps is the time period an overvoltage must occur before the FP 5000 initiates a trip This function will operate if any of the 3 phase voltages rise above the set point This setting is based on line to line voltages for Delta configurations and line to
78. the VA demand falls below the specified threshold a power demand dropout event occurs The demand interval is set in the Demand Setting section described later in this section Delay m Sets the number of minutes that the VA demand must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs Current Demand Alarm Pickup Sets the current demand pickup level at or above which the current pickup event occurs After pickup if the current demand falls below the specified pickup a current demand dropout event occurs The demand interval is set in the Demand Setting section described later in this section Delay m Sets the number of minutes that the current demand must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs NOTE Check the Demand Logging interval The delay for alarm starts after the demand is logged and the demand remains at or above threshold for the time specified in the setting delay for alarm For example if the demand interval is set to 15 minutes and the delay for the demand alarm is set to 15 minutes the system alarm pickup event occurs after 30 minutes I THD Alarm Threshold Sets the current THD magnitude threshold level at or above which the current THD pickup event occurs After pickup if the current THD magnitude falls below the specified threshold a current THD dropout event occurs Delay s Sets the number of seconds that the current THD magnitude must rema
79. the associated Output Logic Gate The output relay remains in the energized state until all features programmed to operate the relay return to the non operated state Off Delay When configured for Off Delay operation the output relay remains energized for an additional Off Delay time after the Logic Gate output clears The output relay remains energized until all features programmed to operate the relay return to the non operated state and the number of cycles specified in the Off Delay setpoint has expired The off delay timer is started when all features programmed to operate the relay return to the non operated state Latched With the dropout set to Latched a reset signal is required to de energize the output relay The Trip1 Trip2 and Alarm output relays are de energized by a reset from the front panel Reset Trip the Remote Reset contact input or a communication Remote Reset command The six programmable relays may be de energized by a reset from the front panel Reset Relay menu or a communication Deactivate Relay command This mode is used to provide a lockout function or for operations that must be acknowledged The FP 5000 provides optional Trip Coil Supervision of the Trip1 output relay and Close Coil Supervision of the Trip2 output relay The coil monitoring functions are enabled in the Output Config setting menu activated by the Set pushbutton for the Tript and Trip2 relays The FP 5000 is shipped from the f
80. this command however different versions of the firmware have different setting structures For this reason Cutler Hammer recommends verifing and changing the settings if necessary prior to placing the FP 5000 back into service If the command is executed properly an acknowledgment will be displayed in the text box and the relay will reset The Boot amp APP Ver amp Rev 397 command is required for Phase 2 Firmware This command will get the version and revision of the boot and application codes To speed up programming time it is recommended to select the FP 5000 RS 232 baud rate to 38 4 K baud To avoid port conflicts it is also recommended to close other programs that effect serial comm port communications Then click the OK button initializing the relay to respond If the relay has not responded in 5 seconds a message will appear indicating the possible causes Once the cause has been resolved the operator can re initialize the Flashloader program so that the relay will respond to the request Page 12 16 When communications have been established a new window will appear see Figure 12 2 listing the product boot code and applica tion code information This message log must be cleared to continue operation Click the Clear Command Log button is FP5000 Flash Programmer File Communication x Warning Save all log data files Firmware changes may compromise data Clear Command Log Message Log
81. to apply to logic OR AND NOR Disable gate disable Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused a pf IN2 Selectlogic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused x MEME RN C IN3 Selectlogic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused mes IN4 Selectlogic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused LEN OO RN Block 51P2 TOC Logic gate setting to block 51P2 TOC operation Function Select logic function to apply to logic OR AND NOR NAND Disable gate disable Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused sa s IN2 Selectlogic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused O mesa o IN3 Selectlogic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused s OO testo IN4 Selectlogic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused LEN REM C RN Block 54R TOC Logic gate setting to block 51R TOC operation Function Select logic function to apply to logic OR AND NOR NAND Disable gate disable Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused s s IN2 Selectlogic type for logic input 2 See L
82. to configure the outputs of the FP 5000 are shown below Output Trip1 This Form A relay output is intended to be the main trip relay to energize the Breaker Trip coil The Trip1 relay is set per the Settings described below Set to On or Off If set to on the Breaker Trip coil circuit will be monitored by the FP 5000 for continuity through Output Trip1 relay See Section 8 9 Breaker Oriented Functions for more detailed information Monitor Set to OR AND NOR NAND Disable The Function setting defines the configuration of the output logic gate with inputs IN1 IN2 IN3 and IN4 that energizes the Output Trip1 relay The default setting is OR See Section 9 for a description of the logic input settings Function Set to Latched Unlatched or Off Delay This setting refers to when Output Trip1 relay is Dropout Page 5 51 IL17569C Page 5 52 Effective Date 12 05 de energized after a trip event has occurred The default setting is Off Delay Latched setting means that the Output relay will stay latched until a Reset is initiated either manually or remotely Unlatched setting means that the state of the Output Trip1 relay directly follows the state of the associated Output Logic gate Example If the FP 5000 trips on time overcurrent then the Output Trip1 relay will stay energized until the sensed overcurrent drops below the hysteresis of the current pickup setting Off Delay mean
83. to enter the Set Mode and begin programming the setpoints Once the Set pushbutton is activated a password screen will show up on the display The FP 5000 is shipped with a default password 0000 Every time the Password Window appears the password is initialized to 0000 If the password has not been changed or set then you simply press the Enter button to begin your programming session If the password has been changed then you will need to enter the new password in order to begin your programming Session To enter the password use the single up down arrow pushbutton to change the selected character of the password and use the double up down arrow pushbutton to change the value of the character Once the password is entered the user must then press the Enter pushbutton to enter the password and to activate the setting screens In addition to the front panel pushbutton access as described above the FP 5000 settings can be programmed two other ways 1 Via the front panel RS 232 communications port using the Cutler Hammer PowerPort software or 2 Via TB3 rear access communications terminals using either Cutler Hammer PowerNet or PowerPort software An INCOM to RS 232 converter or a CONI card is required to access the rear communica tions port See Data Communications Section 10 for more informa tion on using PowerPort and PowerNet to program setpoints into the FP 5000 The following sections describe all the FP 50
84. well as the system clock should be periodically read from the FP 5000 monitor menu The Operational LED on the top center of the front nameplate is the first indicator that should be verified A blinking 1 Hz LED signifies the microprocessor is executing its protection routine A solid LED signifies a product failure If the LED is out this could also signify product failure or it may just indicate lack of adequate power to TB101 and TB102 Secondly the Healthy Alarm relay should be used to indicate the FP 5000 health status This relay is energized when the FP 5000 is powered up and protection is active If the power source goes out or if the FP 5000 senses an internal error this relay will open This is a Form C relay and the NO contact can be used for example to drive an all ok light indicator while the NC contact can alarm an enunciator Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 11 1 The following features should be verified Load conditions should be verified and recorded for future reference Zone interlock inputs These should be verified to ensure proper System coordination Proper operation of output relays Coil monitors and breaker status 52a and 52b Breaker control operation can be performed but will interrupt the System power This feature will remotely close and open the circuit breaker Setpoints Compare
85. when nominal voltage is applied to the primary Selection of Primary units for metering voltage and current displayed values If setting is Yes then all voltages and currents including sequence voltages and currents will be displayed in primary values which are System values If setting is No then all voltages and currents including sequence voltages and currents will be displayed in secondary values which Remote Set For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 39 are the actual values measured at the FP 5000 inputs Power and energy readings are always in primary values The user may select either default input output configuration or customized input output configura tion The refers to the contact inputs and output relays Choosing customized allows the user to freely program the contact inputs and relay outputs See Table 5 16 Contact Input CFG and Output CFG settings and the following descrip tions for more information The unit is shipped from the factory with I O Config set to default The cannot be changed from the default setting unless this setting has been set to Custom A Default I O setting will not give the user access to the configured I O settings the Set Mode To view I O configuration the user will need to exit the Set Mode and enter the View Setting mode and scroll to the appropriate section If the relay
86. will work properly even though only the Transmit Receive and common wires are required The front panel Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 15 RS 232 connector uses a 3 wire connection not relying on the hardware handshaking lines Place the provided S Record file into an accessible data path preferably loading it onto a convenient place on your hard drive to minimize access time during the download process CAUTION VERIFY THAT YOU HAVE THE PROPER S RECORD FILE BEFORE ERASING THE FLASH MEMORY IN YOUR FP 5000 ONCE THE FLASH MEMORY HAS BEEN ERASED FURTHER OPERATION OF THE FP 5000 WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE UNTIL A PROPER S RECORD FILE IS DOWNLOADED ONE MEANS OF ASSURANCE IS TO VERIFY THE DATE AND SIZE OF THE FILE WITH REPRESENTATIVES OF CUTLER HAMMER BEFORE PROCEEDING 12 4 3 Running the FlashLoader Program Using Windows Explorer double click on the FlashLoader exe program installed in the previous section If you expect to run the FlashLoader program frequently you might want to provide a shortcut icon on the desk top or in an appropriate group on the start up menu by right clicking on the file name in Explorer and selecting Create Shortcut Drag the shortcut to the desired group or to the desktop Page 12 15 IL17569B FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 16 12 4 4 Initializing t
87. 0 Trip Indicator sas C s EN IN1 Control Close BK Alarm Indicator IN1 Trip AllProt IN2 Unused IN2 Trip All Alm IN4 Unused IN4 Contrl All Alm Output Aux LED L Trip Indicator ion R Pune tion x Dropout Latched MI Trip1 Enable INS Trip2 Enable s y Rly3 Disable Rly4 Disable Alarm Indicator Be Bisabla Dropout Latched Alarm Disable Trip1 Disable Rly Healthy Disable Trip2 Disable Rly3 Disable P Pickup Indicator Rly4 Disable Dropout Unlatched Rly5 Disable Enable TOC Enable Alarm Enable Rly Healthy Enable Volt Enable OverFreq Enable UnderFreq Enable Unbalance Enable Prot Alarm Disable Power Prot Disable Page 4 19 IL17569C Page 4 20 Effective Date 12 05 4 6 2 6 Programmable Logic Programmable Logic Display FP 5000 Programmable Logic Logic Gate 1 through 6 4 Function Disable Set Group 1 IN1 Unused IN2 Unused IN3 Unused IN4 Unused E Logic Latch 1 and2 4 Set Group 1 Sin Unused Rin Unused 4 6 2 7 Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Display Desensitize Ph TOC x _ 51P 1 Pickup 2 00 51P 2 Pickup 2 00 5 ickup 0 50R 1 Pickup Yes 50R 2 Pickup Yes 50R 3 Pickup Yes E T N Cutler Hammer Logic Gate 1 Logic Gate 2 Logic Gate 3 Logic Gate 4 Logic Gate 5 Logic Gate 6 Timer Gate 1 2 3 Gate
88. 0 3X lhowa 80 x lios 400 A for 1 sec 100 x Inom 100 A for 1 sec CT Burdens 0 25 VA Q 5 A Nominal lt 0 05 VA 1 A Nominal Contact Inputs TB201 204 206 209 Source TB205 210 Number of contact inputs Cin1 Cin8 Rating 40 Vdc 2 mA C In draw wetting voltage provided with internal return only Voltage Transformer Inputs TB213 217 VA VB VC VX1 VX2 Nominal 07120 Vac Line to common Operating Range 07 144 Vac 20 Line to common Internal Burden Loading 1 Meg Input Impedance Reference TB218 Vg internal 120 ohm PTC to chassis ground Relay Output TB103 118 Number amp type of output contacts 2 Form C NO amp NC TB103 105 106 108 5 Form A NO only TB109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 3 1 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 3 2 Effective Date 12 05 Relay Output Contacts Rating Both Form A amp C Standard Power Supply Board 250V Power Supply Board Momentary Make 30 A ac dc for 0 25 s up to Make 30A ac dc for 0 25s up to 120 Vac or 125 240 Vac or 250 Vdc Break 0 5 A 125 Vdc resistive Break 0 5A 125 Vdc resistive Break 5 A 30 Vdc Break 0 25A 250 Vdc resistive Break 5A 120 Vac Break 30 Vdc Break 5A 240 Vac Continuous
89. 0 Hz and this frequency will be used for sampling in the case where phase A voltage is unavailable 8 1 3 Discrete Input Sampling The eight discrete contact inputs Cin1 Cin8 and the zone interlock ing input states are declared every cycle 8 2 CT Connection Options The Current Transformers may be connected in several ways and the specified configuration affects the way system measurements are made and results computed The computation of the residual current la is dependent on the System Configuration setting for the CT Connection The configura tions resulting from the three setting options are shown as well as the calculated la residual current Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit lg lg lA lg 1 ly x IN Figure 8 2 Four Wire with IN CT lg lA lg 1 lg lu x 7 lg Figure 8 3 Four Wire with IG CT www eatonelectrical com Page 8 1 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 8 2 Effective Date 12 05 8 3 Overcurrent Functions Instantaneous Reset and Time 8 3 1 Instantaneous The Instantaneous Trip occurs when any of the phase currents exceeds the pickup current defined by the user That is Instantaneous Trip may be set for a delay from zero 0 to 9999 cycles after the pickup current is exceeded Since the current is evaluated twice per cycle the initiation of
90. 0 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 8 1 8 APPLICATION AND SETTINGS 8 1 Overall Measuring Principles of the FP 5000 8 1 1 Analog Input Sample Processing The four current la lg Ic Ix and four voltage Va Va Vc Vx inputs are sampled 32 times per cycle The residual current l is computed from the phase currents during each update The definition of la is dependent upon the System Configuration setting for the Connection Diagrams of the system configurations and definitions of In are included in Section 8 2 CT Connection Options below For most protection purposes the values of voltage and current are updated every frequency cycle In the case of instantaneous overcurrent protection 50X and the values are updated every half cycle For the monitoring function values are the sums of one cycle rms values averaged over 32 cycles The averaged rms quantities provide stable values of current and voltage for display on the front panel The phase angle for voltages and currents is computed from the one cycle voltage and current phasor values every 32 cycles for updating the current phasor angle displays 8 1 2 Frequency Measurement The line frequency is obtained through the measurement of the period of the phase A voltage The frequency measurement is used to determine the dynamic sampling rate of all other voltage and current inputs A system configuration setting is used to declare the nominal frequency as 50 or 6
91. 00 10 1ACT 100 250 Vdc 100 240 Vac Power Supply standard comm board Phase 2 V2 02 66D2041G16 FP5200 11 5ACT 100 250 Vdc 100 240 Vac Power Supply MODBUS comm board Phase 2 V2 02 66D2041G17 Page 1 6 FP5300 11 1ACT 100 250 Vdc 100 240 Vac Power Supply MODBUS comm board Phase 2 V2 02 Renewal Parts 66D2038G01 FP5000 00 IC Relay Inner Chassis 5 A Phase 1 V1 03 66D2038G02 FP5100 00 IC Relay Inner Chassis 1 Phase 1 V1 03 6602038611 FP5200 00 IC Relay Inner Chassis 5 A Phase 2 V2 00 66D2038G12 FP5300 00 IC Relay Inner Chassis 1 Phase 2 V2 00 66D2039G01 FP5XX0 OC Outer Chassis for FP5XX0 00 IC Contact your Eaton Cutler Hammer Sales office by calling Power Quality Technical Support at 1 800 809 2772 option 4 option 4 or visit us on the web www eatonelectrical com and click on Find Us For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 1 9 Function Matrix IL17569C Page 1 7 All of the protective functions found in the FP 5000 are listed in the matrix below Each entry includes the numbers for the pages in the manual that provide additional information for that function Device Protective Function Configure in Pa
92. 00 settings and setting groups A setting table is provided that includes all the settings as shown on the FP 5000 display a short description setting range and the factory default settings Only the Configuration Settings and Protection Settings need to be programmed for most power system feeder applications The table also includes a column Selected Value for the user to record settings For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 1 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 2 Effective Date 12 05 5 2 FP 5000 Setting Flowchart Below is a flowchart showing an example of how to program the protection settings The display window shows 4 lines at a time so use the up down arrows to view all items in a menu Access the Set and Test door in the lower left corner of the front panel and Password Window press the Set pushbutton to get into the password display window factory default password is 0000 A password of 0000 will always be accepted during the first 2 minutes after the FP 5000 is powered up See Sec 5 3 10 A Arrow For Bit for changing password Press Enter pushbutton to advance to next menu Dual Arrow For Value Select Protection settings using upldown arrows and press the Enter Setting Main pushbutton to access the Protection settings System Config Protection System Alarms Select Setting Group 1 setting
93. 1 through 6 Set Group 1 i In Unused Timer Gate 4 Timer Gate 5 Delay Unit Cycle Ti Gate 6 On Delay 0 Logic Latch 1 Off Delay 0 Logic Latch 2 Block 50X 1 IOC Block 50X 2 IOC Block 50X 3 IOC Block 50R 1 IOC Block 50R 2 IOC Block 50R 3 IOC Block 50P 1 IOC Block 50P 2 IOC Block 50P 3 IOC Block 51P TOC Block 51R TOC Block 51X TOC Block 51P2 TOC Cold Load Pickup gt Block I Unbal 46 46 1 Pickup Yes 46 2 Pickup Yes Page 4 20 Off Time m Disable Set Group 1 CL Pickup 1 00 Time Out s 600 Settle Time c 60 Desensitize Gnd TOC Desensitize Ph TOC Block Ix IOC Block Ir IOC Block Phase IOC Block Unbal 46 Block Power 32 3 4 Block Power 32 32 1 Pickup Yes 32 2 Pickup Yes 32 3 Pickup Yes For more information visit www eatonelectrical com gt Desensitize Gnd TOC Block Phase IOC y Block 50 51 X R P amp 51P2 Function Disable Set Group 1 IN1 Unused IN2 Unused IN3 Unused IN4 Unused 51X Pickup 1 00 51R Pickup 1 00 Block Ix IOC 50X 1 Pickup Yes 50X 2 Pickup Yes 50X 3 Pickup Yes 1 Pickup Yes 2 Pickup Yes 50P 3 Pickup Yes Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 4 6 2 8 Communications Communications Display
94. 1000 6 2 e 61000 4 2 ESD Immunity 61000 4 3 RF Radiated Immunity 61000 4 4 EFT Immunity EN 61000 4 5 Surge Withstand EN 61000 4 6 RF Conducted Immunity EN 61000 4 8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Dips Short Interruption and Voltage Variation Immunity See Appendix Section 13 5 for compliance levels and related information Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 3 5 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 3 6 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page 3 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 1 4 FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4 1 Description The FP 5000 front panel is the local operator interface that provides a means to monitor program and test the relay It consists of a 4 line by 20 character vacuum fluorescent display 6 display mode pushbuttons with integral LEDs 9 status LEDs 6 pushbuttons for display menu navigation a Reset pushbutton 2 pushbuttons for breaker control DB 9 communication port and a battery for trip indication Each will be identified and described in the following sections FP 5000 Operational and Breaker Status LEDs Cutler Hammer Operational Feeder Protection Breaker Closed Reset Mode Butt Breaker Open 2 e 4 Line X
95. 2 14 Trip 4 21 12 12 Trip Record 12 13 12 14 Loss of Potential 5 45 8 10 Diagram 8 11 Settings Table 8 10 M Main V Protection 4 13 Table 5 8 Main VTR 5 39 Maintenance 111 Maximum 4 9 Display 4 9 Table 4 9 Measurement Frequency 8 1 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com FP 5000 Measuring P rinciples Messages Transient Metering Accuracy Specifications Minimum Display Table Modbus NetP ower Monitor Mode In Service NetPower Mounting Holes Multiple Setting Groups N Navigation Negative Sequence Current P rotection Settings Table Voltage P rotection Voltage Protection Table Net Var Hours Net Watthours NetP ower NetP ower Neutral Overvoltage Settings Table Neutral V Protection Table Nominal Current Nominal Input Range Number S et Groups Open Coil Supervision Open Delta Application with S ync Check Operational LED Optional Components Ordering Other Trip LED Output Alarm Aux LED Cause Table 8 1 4 2 4 3 12 3 5 50 4 23 5 52 5 52 12 9 Configuration Default R elay Settings 9 3 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 14 3 Contact Wiring 6 4 Relay 5 52 9 2 Trip 5 51 Output Configuration S etting 5 51 Table 5 21 5 25 Default 5 59 Output Relay CFG Display 4 19 Overcurrent Functions 8 2 Timed Protection 8 5 Overfrequency 5 46 Overlapping Issues Curve 8 7 Overvo
96. 2 2 Power 1 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 59A 1 Voltage Aux Over 0 5 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 27 1 Voltage Aux Under 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 810 1 Over Frequency 0 02 Hz 0 to 6 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 81U 1 Under Frequency 0 02 Hz 0 to 6 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 47 1 Voltage Unbalance 1 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 47 2A Voltage Unbalance 1 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 46 1 Current Unbalance 1 2 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 46 2A Current Unbalance 1 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater Time Overcurrent 51P Phase Trip Ph TOC 0 5 3 or 2 Cycles whichever is greater 51P2 Phase Trip Ph TOC 0 5 3 or 2 Cycles whichever is greater 51R Ground Trip Residual 39 9 3 or 2 Cycles whichever is greater IR TOC 51X Ground Trip IX TOC 0 5950 3 or 2 Cycles whichever is greater Page 3 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Common Mode Voltage Withstand FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 3 5 21500 Vrms 1 minute any port to chassis Environmental Ratings Operating Temp 40 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F Dry heat 70 C 158 F Storage Temp 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 4185 F Humidity 5 to 95 Relative Humi
97. 20 Character Display Display Mode Buttons and LEDs Monitor View Setting m og mee Single Arrow Double Arrow Buttons e Buttons Page by item Page by screen Display e Naviaati En Previous Phase Trip Ground Trip t gt Other Trip t Alarm Pickup Auxiliary e Status LEDs e Front RS 232 Security Door Port DB9 Setting Test Mode Display Battery Buttons Backup for Trip Indicators Breaker Control Buttons Breaker Figure 4 1 Panel Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 4 1 IL17569C FP 5000 Page 4 2 Effective Date 12 05 4 2 Display 4 2 1 Description The display is a 4 line by 20 character vacuum fluorescent display The first line of all display screens is reserved for the screen title When the FP 5000 is first powered the display lights should display the system three phase currents and voltages This is called the default display screen which is shown below Note Pushing the Reset pushbutton will default to the following screen Display 4 1 Default Display Screen Currents Voltages IA rms value VA or VAB rms value IB rms value VB or VBC rms value IC rms value VC or VCA rms value For all other display screens the first column is reserved for the line pointer selector All display screen data fits within the allocated 3 lines by 20 columns 4 2 2 Display Sleep Mode When t
98. 3 2 in parallel see Figure 8 10 Zone Interlocking Example with FP 5000 and DT 3000 This daisy chained wire pair is then connected to the upstream zone protection device zone in terminal J3 4 and J3 2 Up to 10 devices can have their zone out terminals wired in parallel Only one device in the upstream zone should have these wires connected to its zone in terminals Any downstream device can drive the daisy chained wire pair active signaling that the device is going to take action In this case the upstream device will not trip immediately but will use the pro grammed time delay Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit directional permissive phase current IOC or TOC pickup will activate the zone out signal Ground or residual current IOC or TOC will not activate the signal If the Zone Out setpoint is Ground then any directional permissive ground or residual current IOC or TOC pickup will cause activation of zone out signal Phase current IOC or TOC will not activate the signal If the Zone Out setpoint is Both then any directional permissive phase ground and residual current IOC or TOC pickup will cause the zone out signal to activate If the Zone Out setpoint is set to Disable then the zone out signal will not activate www eatonelectrical com Page 8 7 IL17569C Page 8 8 Effective Date 12 05 Typical Main with FP 5000 Protection Zone Zone Com Typical Feeder DT 3000 FP 5000 F1
99. 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Logic Gate 2 Logic gate 2 Settings 5 5 7 9 3 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable 9 6 to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Logic Gate 3 Logic gate 3 Settings 5 5 7 9 3 Function Select logic function OR AND NOR Disable 9 6 to apply to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Page 5 26 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05
100. 5 Page 12 3 Table 12 1 Self Test Displays and Status Flag continued Display Status Flag Protection Description Recommended Action Protection Calibration Disabled The calibration The circuit is not protected replace Disabled constants have been FP 5000 immediately Calibrate Failure corrupted Setting Warning Enabled A recoverable Check the settings in the FP 5000 corruption of the making corrections if needed If setpoints has this warning repeats then replace occurred the FP 5000 Test in Progress Disabled A test simulation has To stop the test press the Test begun button select Fault Simulation and select Stop Simulation Calibrate Enabled A recoverable Check the accuracy of the voltage Warning corruption of the current input measurement If this calibration setpoints warning repeats then replace the has occurred FP 5000 EEPROM Write Enabled The EEPROM has Call the factory for troubleshooting Warning been written to a help large number of times and is in danger of wearing out EEPROM Write Enabled Because the Call the factory for troubleshooting Lockout EEPROM has been help written to a large number of times no more writes are permitted Relay Tripping Disabled The Disarmed The Disarmed feature can be Disarmed function has been turned off by pressing the Test activated pushbutton selecting Arm Disarm Trip and selecting Arm Trip 12 1 5 Transient Messages
101. 5000 Ct Input Terminals On Rear Chassis B2 B1 C2 C1 3 Phase 3 Wire FP 5000 Ct Input Terminals On Rear Chassis A1 B2 B1 C2 C1 3 Phase 4 Wire Ground Figure 6 12 Common CT Wiring Configurations Page 6 12 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 7 STARTUP General This section lists the procedure for applying power to an FP 5000 for the first time Use it as a checklist to reduce the chance of skipping an item DANGER ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL FAMILIAR WITH THE FP 5000 THE BREAKER AND ITS ASSOCIATED MECHANICAL EQUIP MENT SHOULD PERFORM THESE STARTUP PROCEDURES FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS OR FATAL INJURY AND OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE CAUTION NEVER HIGH POT THE FP 5000 CIRCUITS BEYOND 1500 VRMS 1 MIN DO NOT USE MEGGER OR OTHER HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION TESTER ON THE FP 5000 TERMINALS IT HAS BEEN FACTORY TESTED AND FIELD TESTING MAY CAUSE UNNECESSARY STRESS REMOVE THE FP 5000 INNER CHASSIS WHEN TESTING THE PROTECTIVE RELAY SYSTEM CAUTION DO NOT USE A MEGGER HI POT OR OTHERWISE HIGH VOLTAGE TO TEST THE FOLLOWING TERMINALS OR POINTS J1 3 SHIELD IS BONDED TO HOUSING FILTER CLAMP TB3 J2 3 SHIELD IS BONDED TO HOUSING FILTER CLAMP TB3 J3 5 SHIELD IS BONDED TO HOUSING DIRECT GROUND TB2 218 VG REF
102. 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 12 12 Effective Date 12 05 12 2 2 Trip Log Pwr Prot A power Protection operation The trip log contains detailed information on the last 16 trips An event is considered a trip if it causes either or both Trip 1 and Trip 81 OF An Overfrequency operation 2 to activate The trip log gives detailed information on the state of 81 UF n Under ti all I O the state of all pickups and operations of protective functions n e nderirequency operation and the state of all voltages and currents at the time of trip The trip log is useful in determining how why and when a trip operation has AccuCurAlm An Accumulated interrupted A Breaker Failure operation Each set of trip data recorded in the log is numbered from 1 to 16 The most recent trip event is always denoted number 1 the oldest Bkr Closed A Closed Breaker state has caused number 16 Once 16 trips are recorded and a new trip occurs the an operation oldest trip is discarded as the new trip is recorded pi Bkr Open An Open Breaker state has caused an Every time the Trip 1 or Trip 2 relay activates the display immedi operation ately goes to the Trip Log page unless the user is changing the settings On this page is a list of trip events starting with number 1 BkrAlm A Breaker Alarm breaker state breaker and going to 16 Each line of the trip log will contain the index time close or open coil supervision number 1 16 the cause of the event and the
103. 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 9 10 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page 9 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B 10 DATA COMMUNICATIONS 10 1 Overview of Ports The FP 5000 is designed to provide several communication options The major options are single point RS 232 and 2 wire INCOM Local Area Network LAN This section describes these two communication ports and the two major software packages which make use of these ports to interface with the FP 5000 One additional software package the FlashLoader is treated in Section 12 Troubleshooting That program updates the firmware an infrequent event which is not part of the day to day operation of the FP 5000 10 1 1 Handling of Multiple Communication Hosts The FP 5000 is designed to handle simultaneous communications with the front and rear communications channels Monitoring functions can occur in parallel however service routines like setpoint download or control functions will be handled on a first come first serve basis Whichever port starts first will lock the other port out until finished 10 1 2 INCOM Network Information and Wiring The following simplified rules apply given a system consisting of a single daisy chained main cable link between master and slave devices For more complex considerations including star configura tions or systems containing old and
104. 569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 7 3 7 7 Checks After Closing the Breaker CAUTION ITIS POSSIBLE TO GET A TRIP ON THE INITIAL CLOSING OF THE BREAKER DUE TO MIS PROGRAMMING AND WIRING PROBLEMS AND ALL PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN IN ANTICIPATION OF A TRIP EVENT CAUTION THE BREAKER CONTROL CIRCUIT IS TO BE RECONNECTED AT THIS TIME THE LOAD S ASSOCIATED WITH THE APPLICA TION MAY BE STARTED IT IS IMPORTANT TO ENSURE THAT ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE LOAD EQUIPMENT AND THE ASSOCIATED MECHANISM BE TAKEN FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS OR FATAL INJURY AND OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Disconnect all control power from the system Reconnect the breaker lead to FP 5000 trip relay terminals 116 and 118 Clear away any loose or foreign objects Clear all personnel from the area of the breaker and loads Turn on all control power Make sure the FP 5000 green Operational LED is flashing on and off and that the display shows the normal Currents Voltages values Follow any startup procedures for the load equipment Close the breaker the external Start Switch or contacts Using the information supplied by the application engineer or equipment manufacturer verify that the breaker is operating properly and the load is energized With a load on the breaker use a clamp on type ammeter to measure the ac current on each of the line phases Verify that the IA IB and IC currents as indicated
105. 7569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 6 Effective Date 12 05 ANSI Very Inverse Curves G ai o o o o amp 1 Multiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 2 ANSI Very Inverse Page 13 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 7 ANSI Extremely Inverse Curves o c o o o o 1 Multiples of Pickup Current I Ipickup Figure 13 3 ANSI Extremely Inverse Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 7 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 8 Effective Date 12 05 IEC A Curves c o o E o E
106. 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps is the time period a neutral overvoltage must occur before the FP 5000 initiates a trip 27A 1 Undervoltage This is the 27 device Undervoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT This device setting works exactly the same as the 27 M1 device above except it is a single phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input Note The expanded threshold V setting range 10 250 is available for the Auxiliary Undervoltage setting 59A 1 Overvoltage This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT This device setting works exactly the same as the 59M 1 device above except it is a single phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input Note The expanded threshold V setting range 10 250 V is available for the Auxiliary Overvoltage setting 5 4 2 6 Power Protection Settings 32 1 and 32 2 Pwr This is the 32 1 and 32 1 device Power Protection settings This function provides control or monitors the power flowing through a feeder Each power element can be configured as either forward reverse or both and can operate based on either under or over criterion The overpower function can be used for a conventional reverse power protection The reverse power protection is conven tionally applied to a generator or a motor The under power protection is mainly used to detect load loss or generation loss The FP 5000 includes two power trip units and one alarm unit The power threshold is com
107. AB Voltage VAB VBC Voltage VBC VCA Voltage VCA VA Voltage VA VB Voltage VB VC Voltage VC System Watts MWatts System Vars gt MVAR System VA MVA Frequency Freq Apparent PF Apt PF Displacement PF Disp PF Tne minimum values for each of ine above parameters is compared to the last minimum value for that parameter every 32 cycles If the new value is less than the last minimum the value is updated Power Factor Minimum is the most leading power factor value measured Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 9 4 6 1 6 Selecting the Maximum Sub menu This menu allows the user to view the following system parameters See Display 4 9 Maximum Sub menu Maximum currents IA IB IC IX IR Maximum L L Voltages VAB VBC VCA Maximum L N Voltages VA VB VC Maximum Power Watt Var VA Maximum Frequency Maximum Power Factor Apparent Displacement Maximum Reset Date amp Time Display 4 9 Maximum Sub menu Max lt Variable gt Variable Magnitude Date mm dd yy Time hh mm ss Min Rst Date amp Time Date mm dd yy Time hh mm ss Table 4 3 Maximum Sub menu Where lt Variable gt Variable IA Current IA IB Current gt IB IC Current IC IX Current IX IR Current IR VAB Voltage VAB VBC V
108. Alarm is off If the Zone Interlock In is connected ensure that the input is off Navigate to Status Control gt Status gt Input Status gt Zone Int In to check the state Any Trip or Alarm indications should be investigated and elimi nated before continuing Verify that the Relay output contacts are in the expected state An ohm meter can be used to determine if they are open high impedance gt 1Meg ohm or closed low impedance lt 1 ohm In the case of the Trip Relay contacts the open circuit impedance is equal to the monitor circuit impedance of 44K ohm Page 7 2 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer f the status is what is expected secure all power sources and reconnect the wiring to the contact inputs Otherwise trouble shoot the FP 5000 wiring Turn the relay power source s back on Verify the Trip Monitor status Navigate to Status Control gt Status gt Input Status gt Trip 1 2 Monitor to check status See Section 11 2 3 4 Testing Trip Monitors If there is adequate voltage across trip relay 1 or 2 and the relay is open then the status should read On A voltmeter across the relay contacts can be used to verify if the source and load are properly connected and the source energized Note The trip monitor circuit requires at least 38 Vdc to detect the presence of a source ac detection operates well below 55 Vac
109. C 1 Direction Page 2 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 2 5 6 Default Settings Please refer to the default settings as listed in Section 5 3 FP 5000 Setting Table The default settings are those loaded into the program memory at the factory Restoration to default settings can only be accomplished by deliberate user actions No internal control action can cause the FP 5000 to reset itself to default settings Restoring settings to factory defaults shown in Section 5 3 once alternative values are programmed involves one of three actions 1 Manually input the default values for those changed through the Settings mode 2 Completely restore to default settings through the Default Setting Control under the Status Control mode function 3 Execution of external communication commands The user may also reprogram individual settings or return all settings to default by INCOM Command s through either the rear INCOM port J1 or through the front panel RS 232 Serial port This functionality is incorporated into the Cutler Hammer software that operates through these ports for instance PowerNet or PowerPort The following section will discuss restoring the defaults utilizing action No 2 above using the front panel capabilities of the FP 5000 2 5 7 Restoring Default Settings To ensure a known starting point unless you know that the FP 5000 is pre programmed to the
110. CT Overcurrent Element 5 2 ui WM Pickup pus icai value in per 0 1 to 20 0 or Disable Delay Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 7 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 8 Effective Date 12 05 Unbalance Setting Selects voltage 47 1 unbalance and current 46 1 unbalance device settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range 47 1 Voltage Voltage Unbalance Alarm Settings eee RET Threshold Select magnitude of unbalance 1 to 100 Volts or Disable Disable required either V1 or V2 1 Volt increments 771 96 V2 N1 Percent negative sequence V2 2 to 40 percent 20 divided by positive sequence V1 1 increments AMEN Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles e o 46 1 Current Current Unbalance Alarm Settings 5 2 twa o _ Ba Threshold Select magnitude of unbalance 0 1 to 20 0 or disable Disable eM required either 11 or 12 0 01 u increments 12 11 Percent negative sequence l2 2 to 40 percent divided by positive sequence 11 196 increments Delay Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles puse esser ee V FroteckHon Selecis tage 27 1 overv ltage 59 1 device settings 27M 1 Main VT Undervoltage Settings Select the undervoltage phases Any o
111. D Bkr Ops 51 Al Direct or Negated Breaker Control OpenBkr CloseBkr Open Closed BkrFail Alm StateAlm Mntr1 Alm Direct or Negated Mntr2Alm Alm 67G F 67G R 67V F 67V R 67Q F 67Q R 671 671 R 67X F 67X R 67VIXF 67VIXR 67A F 67B F 67C F InSync SyncFail SlipAlm 25BL 25LL Coldload pu or Comm4 Direct or Negated See Tables 9 4 through 9 7 for the definitions of the options Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 35 IL17569C Page 5 36 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 9 Cold Load Pickup Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Cold Load Pickup Load Off Time Set Grp Enable Max Block Time Threshold Settle Time Desensitize Gnd TOC 51X Pickup Select CT time overcurrent pickup in 51R Pickup Desensitize Ph TOC 51P1 Pickup 51P2 Pickup Block Ix IOC elect the outage time required for 0 to 120 minutes Disable a load to be considered cold 121 disable Increments of 1 NEN 1 2 3 4 or All 1 that the cold load pickup will be Select the maximum amount of time 0 to 65535 seconds allowed for cold load pickup to be Increments of 1 EN Increments of 0 01 0 to 65535 cycles aaa T active Setthe load currentinrush 0 1 to 45 Increments of 0 01 0 1 to 4 Increments of 0 01 p C S Select the protection s
112. D Total Harmonic Distortion is the ratio of the rms of the harmonic content to the rms value of the fundamental quantity expressed as a percent of the fundamental where n is the highest harmonic value available TOC Time Over Current protective function typically Inverse Time VA VB VC Phase voltages for phases a b and c respectively VAB VBC VCA Line to line voltage between phase a amp b phase b amp c phase c amp a respectively VT Voltage Transformer Vx Voltage measured on differential voltage input VX1 VX2 Waveform data The numeric oscillographic values that may be captured These values can be retrieved by PowerNet or PowerPort Window An area of the computer screen that displays an application 13 2 Display Abbreviations Apt Apparent Aux Auxiliary Dsp Displacement Config Configuration Ctr Control or counter depending on context Fwd Forward L N Line to neutral L L Line to line LOP Loss of potential LOPB Loss of potential block Mag Magnitude Rev Reverse OC Over current Rst Reset rms Root means square Varh Var hour Wh Watt hour Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 3 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 4 Effective Date 12 05 13 3 Standard IEEE Device Numbers Standard IEEE Device Numbers for power devices are covered under IEEE document I
113. E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE FP 5000 PROTECTIVE RELAY I IL17569C ume For more information visit www eatonelectrical com INSTRUCTION LEAFLET IL17569C 1 Cutler Hammer Feeder Operational eeder Protection E FP 5000 Breaker Closed Rese Breaker Open Moniter Previous View Setting Log Statss Control A TL Phase Trip Ground Tng Other Trig Narm Pickup Auxiliary Breaker Effective 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 2 3 4 Effective Date 12 05 Table of Contents PRODUCT OVERVIEW 11 12 13 General Description Audience Safety and Caution Notices Disclaimers 1 3 1 WARRANTY AND LIABILITY INFORMATION Referenced Documents Commercial and Trademarks FP 5000 Hardware Resources and Description FP 5000 Features Ordering Information Function Matrix QUICK START 2 6 Introduction Initial Checks Standard Mounting Wiring 2 4 1 Powering the FP 5000 2 4 2 Typical Application Wiring Introduction to P rogramming 2 5 1 Entering Set Programming Mode 2 5 2 Password 2 5 3 Navigation Within Settings Mode 2 5 4 Minimum P rogram R equirements 2 5 5 Functions Which Must be Programmed 2 5 6 Default Settings 2 5 7 Restoring Default Settings 2 5 8 Programming 2 5 9 Active Alarm Status Startup 2 6 1 Battery Installation SPECIFICATIONS 31 32 Table of Specifications Standards Compliance FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4 1 42
114. EEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers and Contact Designations 4 C37 2 1996 ISBN 0 7381 0732 8 Some typical device numbers are used frequently within this document and throughout Cutler Hammer s product and other documentation For a complete list please see the IEEE document referenced above Device Description Function Number 25 Sync Check Operates when two ac circuits are within the desired limits of frequency phase angle or Function voltage to permit or to cause the paralleling of these two circuits 27 Undervoltage Relay Relay that operates when the voltage drops below a programmed value 32 Power Protection Functions on a desired value of power flow in a given direction or upon reverse power 46 Reverse Phase Relay which functions when the polyphase currents are of reverse phase sequence or Phase Balance or when the polyphase currents are unbalanced or contain negative phase sequence Current Relay components above a given amount 47 Phase Sequence Functions upon a predetermined value of polyphase voltage in Voltage Relay the desired phase sequence 50 Instantaneous Relay that functions instantaneously on an excessive value of current or on an exces Overcurrent or sive rate of current rise thus indicating a fault in the apparatus or circuit being protected Rate of Rise Relay 51 ac Time Over Relay with either a definite or inverse time characteristic that func
115. Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 3 5 3 FP 5000 Setting Table NOTE All voltage settings are in secondary units All current settings are in per unit All System settings are in primary units Time delay setting is in cycles c seconds s or minutes m Program Date Control Schematic FP 5000 Relay ID Breaker ID Work Order Line Protected Table 5 1 System Config a EMEN Value Selection Setting Value Sec Frequency Nominal system operating 50 Hz or 60 Hz 5 5 1 Phase Seq Nominal system phase sequence or ACB ABC 5 5 1 CT Connect CT connect determins how residual 3 wire 4CT In 4CT lg 3 wire 5 5 1 current IR is calculated 8 2 3 wire 4th CT is independent 4CT 19 4 wire system with 4th CT on ground conductor PH CT Ratio CT ratio of the phase current CTs lom to 6000 500 lrom 3 5 5 1 IX CT Ratio CT ratio of the fourth CT to 6000 BOO 5 5 1 reme fee 6 3 2 Main VTR Main voltage transformer ratio 1 1 to 8000 100 5 5 1 E e Aux VTR Auxiliary voltage transformer ratio 1 1 to 8000 100 5 5 1 menas D VT Secondary Select the secondary nominal 50 to 250 V 69 28 Rating voltage rating Increments of 1 phase to neutral voltage for wye phase to phase voltage for delta Prim Units Selection of primary or secondary No units of displayed values me Nm Config Default input output configuration or Default or Custom Default pene
116. Groupi gt Alarms gt 50P 3 PH IOC Alarm gt Pickup and enter value of 0 85 Use programmable logic to turn on the Auxiliary LED and energize Output Relay 4 Require the 50P 3 function pickup to be present for 1 second to prevent spurious operation Maintain the output signal for 5 seconds after the current drops below the pickup level Add an external switch to Contact Input 8 to enable or disable the High Load Alarm at the user s discretion A Timer Gate has an On Delay and or an Off Delay that can be set for up to 9999 cycles 166 minutes at 60 Hz or 9999 seconds 166 minutess at 60 Hz Use 60 cycles for an On Delay of 1 second and 300 cycles for an Off Delay of 5 seconds Figure 9 5 is an implementation of the High Load Alarm The logic functions are programmed as follows from the main settings menu Programmable Logic gt Logic Gate1 gt Function AND IN1 Input 8 IN2 Pickup 50P 3 Programmable Logic gt Timer Gate1 gt In Logic LG1 On Delay 60 Off Delay 300 Output Config gt Output Rly4 gt Function OR IN1 Logic TGI Output Config gt Output Aux LED gt Function OR IN1 Logic TGI Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 9 7 Table 9 6 Control Option Definitions Control Option Description Open Bkr A command to open breaker Close Bkr A command to close breaker Open A flag to indicate that
117. H IOC 2 Pickup 3 00 Delay c 15 Direction Both IX Overcurrent IX Settings Default Setting 51X IX TOC Shape XTRM Reset Calc Direction Both Pickup 0 50 Time Mult 1 00 50X 1 IX OC 1 Pickup 1 00 Delay c 60 Direction Both 50X 1 IX OC 2 Pickup 2 00 Delay c 6 00 Direction Both IR Overcurrent IR Settings Default Setting 51R IR TOC Shape XTRM Reset Calc Direction Both Pickup 0 5 Time Mult 1 00 50R 1 IR IOC 1 Pickup 1 00 Delay c 60 Direction Both 50R 1 IR IOC 2 Pickup 2 00 Delay 600 Direction Both 47 1 V Unbal 47 1 Voltage Unbalance Alarm Settings Default Setting Threshold Disable 12 11 20 Delay 600 46 1 Current Unbal 46 1 Current Unbalance Alarm Settings Default Setting Threshold Disable V2 N1 20 Delay 600 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatoneieciricai com IL17569C Page 5 58 Table 5 13 System Alarms FP 5000 FTN Effective Date 12 05 Cutler Hammer Breaker Alarm Breaker Alarm Settings Default Setting of Operation Isum INTR Amp 9999 50 000 Table 5 14 Logging Settings Current Demand Current Demand Settings Default Setting Interval m 15 Power Demand Power Demand Settings Default Setting Window Interval m Fixed 15 Event Log Enable Event Log Enable Settings Default Setting I Pickup Yes Data Logger Data Logger Se
118. INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT A RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT A WYE GROUND PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF DELTA OR OPEN DELTA CONNECTION Figure 6 10 Voltage Delta Input Wiring Options and Connection Schematics Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Page 6 9 Page 6 9 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 6 10 Effective Date 12 05 AC DC POWER SUPPLY 48 125VDC 100 250 Vdc 100 120VAC 100 240 Vac FP5000 Power Supply Input i Power Supply Input RLY ENT Com RLY Healthy NO RLY Healthy NC las RLY 5 Com 209 BREAKER 110 HRLY 5 NO C In Source 2 CLOSE o 5 RLY 4 Com Reserved 4 NO Reserved RLY 3 Com VA Main IP RLY NO VB Main Trip 2 Com VC Main H trip 2 NO VX1 Aux Trip 1 Com VX2 Aux 217 HTrip 1 0 Vg Main A B2 B1 FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT RESIDUAL CO
119. LY 5 h Under Freq ALARM RLY Unbalance HEALTHY RLY Alarms Figure 9 2 Trip and Alarm Indicator Pickup Indicator The Pickup Indicator is programmed as the OR of the protective functions Each of the protective categories TOC Voltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Unbalance and Protection Alarms is enabled or disabled from inclusion in the OR function The dropout of the Trip Alarm and Pickup Indicators can be set to latched or unlatched operation See Default settings in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Output Configuration Default Indicator Settings Output Gate Function Inputs Dropout Auxiliary LED OG7 OR unused Trip Indicator N A OR Trip 1 Trip 2 Latched Alarm Indicator N A OR Alarm Relay Healthy Relay Dropout Latched Pickup Indicator N A OR TOC Voltage Frequency Unbalance Unlatched Note Relay K7 is always Relay Healthy It is energized when all internal diagnostics pass and de energized when any diagnostic warning or failure is detected Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 9 3 IL17569B Page 9 4 Effective Date 12 05 9 2 1 Relay Test The FP 5000 has provisions for testing the output relays individually or as a group From the front panel Test menu use the Operate Relays and Reset Relays menu functions to energize and de energize the relays The same functionality is provided via the com
120. N Cutler Hammer 16 records of 16 cycles each 8 records of 32 cycles each or 4 records of 64 cycles each PreTrigger Sets the number of cycles to record before trigger OSC Trigger All parameters under OSC Trigger can be disabled Trip2 Sets the buffer to be overwritten or locked when Trip 2 output is activated Locked will prevent the record triggered by this type of event from being overwritten dV dl Sets the buffer to be overwritten or locked The dV dl looks for approximately 1796 change in either the voltage or current signals and can be used to record waveforms for any disturbance greater than 1796 Logic LG6 Sets the buffer to be overwritten or locked when logic gate 6 is activated Cntrl PB Sets the buffer to be overwritten or locked when the waveform capture is initiated manually from the front face plate of the FP 5000 relay To initiate waveform capture from the relay enter the Status Control mode and select Control function Select waveform capture and press the enter button Sets the buffer to be overwritten or locked when waveform capture is initiated through communications command Comm Example of Waveform Capture with trigger options Set Trip2 in Out Relay Config to any protection function Set Trip2 under OSC Trigger in Waveform Capture to Overwrite Any Trip2 event will trigger an oscillographic data capture and write the buffer with new data This buffer can however be overwritten Example 1
121. NA which are set the same as the Output Trip1 settings shown above Trip Indicator The trip indicator function reports the presence of a trip condition This setting is programmed to operate based upon the operation of the output relays Trip Trip2 Rly3 Rly4 Rly5 Alarm and Healthy This setting consists of the settings below Dropout Set to Latched or Unlatched This setting determines if the trip indicator stays active after a trip event clears Page 5 52 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Latched setting means that the Trip Indicator and the appropriate trip indicator LED lights on the front panel will stay latched until a Reset is initiated either manually or remotely Unlatched setting means that the state of the Trip Indicator directly follows the state of the associated output relay Set to enable or disable Trip2 Set to enable or disable RIy3 Set to enable or disable Rly4 Set to enable or disable Rly5 Set to enable or disable Alarm Set to enable or disable Set to enable or disable The indicator is active when the Healthy Alarm is de energized to report a failure Healthy The default configuration sets the Dropout to Latched and enables the Trip Indication when Trip1 or Trip2 output relays are energized Alarm Indicator The Alarm indicator function reports the presence of an alarm condition This function is set the sam
122. NN ua 27 2 UV Alarm Main VT Undervoltage Alarm Settings Select the undervoltage phases for Any one any two or all three Anyone the alarm 1 one 2 any two 3 all Threshold V Selectthe magnitude of to 199 Volts 2 Disable Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles pue uum c 59N 2 OV Neutral Overvoltage Settings Definition Select if overvoltage operation is Calculated measured Calculated based on calculated or measured ERN voltage Criterion Select if the threshold is based Phasor RMS Phasor 59N 2 OV Alarm Neutral Overvoltage Alarm Settings 5 2 Threshold Select the magnitude of overvoltage 5 to 250 Volts disable Disable 6 required Increments of 1 251 disable Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1200 1 cycle increments _ 59A 2 OV Alarm Auxiliary VT Overvoltage Alarm Threshold V Select the magnitude of overvoltage 10 to 150 Volts disable Disable 6 required 1 Volt increments Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Page 5 14 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 15 Alarms cont Selection Setting Value 27A 2 UV Alarm Auxiliary VT Undervoltage Alarm 52 Threshold V Select magnitude of undervoltage 10 to 250 Volts disable Disable 6 Delay Select delay ti
123. NNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT 5 WYE GROUND PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF DELTA OR OPEN DELTA CONNECTION Figure 6 11 Voltage Delta Input Wiring Options and Connection Schematics with Sync Check Page 6 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 6 5 Drawout Alarm The drawout alarm is implemented by use of the spare N C CT terminals When the relay chassis is inserted in the case these contacts are open When the relay chassis is removed from the case these contacts close self shorting thus providing an alarm These are the only spare terminals and they have the desired characteristic of changing state mechanically when the relay chassis is withdrawn 6 6 Zone Interlocking Connections The zone interlocking connection between relays is done by means of a twisted shielded cable Downstream Zone Interlock outputs may be paralleled from up to ten devices FP 5000 or DT 3000 or a combination of both for connection to upstream Zone Interlocked relays See Section 8 5 Page 6 11 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 6 11 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 6 12 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 Ct Input Terminals On Rear Chassis 1 B2 B1 C2 C1 3 Phase 4 Wire Neutral Protection FP
124. NTER SETTING VALUES WITHOUT USING THE APPROPRIATE SET POINT RECORD SHEET IMPROPER OPERATION AND OR PERSONAL INJURY COULD RESULT IF THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT FOLLOWED The real time clock should be set It can be viewed under monitor load and page up If it needs to be adjusted then navigate to the Setting mode Clock menu and adjust The history trip and data logs should be cleared Navigate to the reset mode and select the appropriate function to clear The functioning of the Contact Inputs should be verified The functioning of the inputs can be verified Verify that there is 40 Vdc between the Contact Input source TB 205 or 210 and open Contact Inputs 1 8 TB201 204 and 206 209 For applications where the initial state is to have the Contact Inputs off they can be forced on With a wire strap attached to either TB205 or 210 touch each of the Contact inputs 1 8 in order while monitoring the status Navigate to Status Control gt Status gt Input Status gt Input Status gt view Cin1 8 If the default contact input configuration is used then the state of the 52a and 52b inputs should be confirmed The Breaker Open LED should be on If not or if the Breaker Closed LED is on while the breaker is open a wiring error has occurred To make sure that the 52a and 52b contact inputs are not in the same state examine breaker status flags in the status control mode and make sure that the Bkr State
125. Note that the sync check function in the case of non zero timeout is independent of a closing command A closing command is used only to initiate the sync failure time out process The sync failure flag can be used to block closing breaker through an output gate When a closing command from either front panel or PowerNet or remote is received and an in sync condtion is detected the closing breaker flag will be set In turn this flag can directly intiate a closing breaker action through an output gate Page 5 48 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com 5 4 2 12 Alarms Protection Alarm Settings A full set of protection alarm settings complement the protection elements for overcurrent over undervoltage unbalance and over underfrequency They are designated as another protection element for example 50P 3 and are programmed to the alarm output relay and alarm LED indication The settings are similar to the protection settings described above These elements may be used for alarm tripping or logic functions Custom programming of the output relay is required if the desired use is not as an alarm function 5 4 3 System Alarm Settings This setting menu contains the settings needed to configure all of the FP 5000 system alarm functions Each alarm function can be disabled The system alarms are programmed to the alarm output relay and alarm LED indication These elements may be used for alarm tripping or logic functions
126. Output Pickup Indicator Settings Dropout Select pickup inidcator dropout Latched unlatched Unlatched NEN Enable or disable IOC pickup Disable enable Enable indicator TOC Enable or disable TOC pickup Disable enable Enable indicator Volt Enable or disable voltage pickup Disable enable Enable indicator OverFreq Enable or disable overfrequency Disable enable Enable pickup indicator UnderFreq Enable or disable underfrequency Disable enable Enable Unbalance Enable or disable voltage current Disable enable Enable Power Enable or disable power pickup Disable enable Enable indicator Prot Alarm Enable or disable protection pickup Disable enable Disable indicator Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 25 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 26 Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 7 Programmable Logic Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Logic Gate 1 Logic gate 1 Settings 5 5 7 9 3 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable 9 6 to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table
127. P 5000 transmits communications on pin 2 and it receives communications on pin 3 making it a Data Set or Data Communica tion Equipment DSE DCE under the definitions of the RS 232 standard The FP 5000 does not use the RS 232 hardware control lines Although the FP 5000 operates with the 3 wire connection a standard off the shelf serial cable will allow communication See Figure 4 2 for the DB9 cable connections An example of an off the shelf cable is the RadioShack 26 117B Male DB9 to Female DB9 Shielded RS 232C Cable See Section 10 for a detailed description of the FP 5000 communica tions and the Cutler Hammer PowerPort software Effective Date 12 05 ETN Female 9 Pin D Sub FP 5000 OCE Cutler Hammer FP 5000 COM All Other Lines Unconnected Male 9 Pin D Sub PC DTE gt lt Y Female 9 Pin D Sub FP 5000 DCE All Other Lines Unconnected y 25 Pin D Sub PC DTE Figure 4 2 RS 232 Cable for 9 and 25 pin D Subminiature Connectors 4 5 Battery for Trip Indication Beneath the front panel communications port lays a receptacle for a lithium disc style battery The battery is used when there s a control power failure to latch the FP 5000 trip state and to operate the front panel trip LED The FP 5000 can last 72 hours in this state on a completely charged lithium battery When the FP 5000 is energized the trip latch and LED indicators are powered by syst
128. Program Mode may be entered with the circuit breaker either open or closed or open only depending on how it is programmed in the System Configuration Settings The relay comes from the factory in the Either open or closed program mode The circuit breaker position is determined via the breaker b and or breaker a contact Refer to the typical wiring described in Section 6 3 settings that are changed during a programming session will not be saved unless the Enter pushbutton is pressed after the display shows Update Setting ENTER to save PREVIOUS to cancel RESET to Exit set To get the Update Setting window to display the user may 1 Keep pressing the Previous pushbutton until the window appears or 2 Press any of the following pushbuttons while in the Set Mode Monitor View Setting Log or Status Control 4 The Set Mode may be exited without saving any programmed settings by pressing the Reset pushbutton at any time in the programming session The FP 5000 will automatically exit the setting mode and revert back to the default operation if programming has ceased for 15 minutes CAUTION THE ENTER PUSHBUTTON MUST BE PRESSED AND RE LEASED AT THE UPDATE SETTING WINDOW BEFORE EXITING THE SET MODE FOR THE CHANGED SETPOINTS TO BE SAVED Page 5 1 5 1 Entering Set Mode The Set pushbutton can be accessed through the security door on the front panel See Figure 4 1 Push the Set button
129. Relay Healthy Output 12 12 Failures That Disable P rotection 12 1 3 TechnicalAssistance 12 14 Self Test Failure indication 12 1 5 Transient Messages 12 2 Troubleshooting the P rotected Circuit 12 2 1 EventLog 12 2 1 1 Active Alarm 12 2 2 Trip Log 12 2 3 History Log 12 2 4 Using Waveform Data 12 2 5 Detection of Breaker Failures 12 2 6 Detection of Failed Current or Voltage Transformer 12 3 Getting Help from Cutler Hammer 12 4 Firmware Upgrading 12 4 1 FlashLoader Installation 12 4 2 Preparation for Downloading with F lashLoader 12 4 3 Running the FlashLoader Program 12 4 4 Initializing the FlashLoader 12 4 5 Upgrading Firmware 13 APPENDIX 13 1 Glossary 13 2 Display Abbreviations 13 3 Standard IEEE Device Numbers 13 4 Time Current Curves 13 5 Standards Compliance 14 INDEX Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 IL17569C Page TOC 5 12 1 12 1 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 4 12 10 12 12 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 15 12 15 12 15 12 15 12 15 12 16 12 20 13 1 13 1 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 20 141 Page TOC 5 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page TOC 6 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page TOC 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 1 General Description The Eaton Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Protective Relay is a mul
130. Rev Date in the relay 03 07 03 S Record file is valid Click Enter Flash Load Mode Operations Enter Flash Load Mode Program Figure 12 8 Flash Programmer Exit Flash Loader Made When the user clicks on the Enter Flash Load Mode pushbutton the Erase pushbutton and the Program pushbutton become active Clicking the Enter Flash Load Mode pushbutton switches the relay from normal mode to flash load mode see figure 12 9 inl xl File Communication Flash Loader 5000 Flash Programmer Warning Save all log data files Firmware changes may compromise data Clear Command Log Message Log Waiting for acknowledge An ACK was received amp CKed Waiting for acknowledge An ACK was received ACKed The relay is in the flash load mode the following actions may be taken Click Erase to erase the application code Or click Program to download the application code if the code has already been erased Or click Exit Flash Loader Mode to return the normal mode Operations Enter Flash Load Mode Erase Program Ea Fish Loader Mose FP 5000 Figure 12 9 Flash Programmer The recommended procedure is to first erase the memory by pushing the Erase button A message will be displayed stating that Erasing in progress see Figure 12 10 The FP 5000 will display Flash Loader Mode Erase in progress Th
131. Select logic input to set latch See Logic Input Options Unused P Rin Select logic input to reset latch See Logic Input Options Unused m ooo aes Page 5 34 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 35 Table 5 8 Logic Input IN1 IN2 IN 3 amp IN4 Programming Option Settings Logic input settings for the 8 logic categories Input Category Available Setting Options Setpoint Range Value Selection Unused Pickup PH OC G OC IOC TOC All Alm Volt Freq AllProt 50X 1 50X 2 Direct or Negated 50X 3 50R 1 50R 2 50R 3 50P 2 50P 3 51P 1 51 2 51 51X 59 1 594 2 27A 1 27 2 59M 1 59 2 27 1 27M 2 46 2 47 1 47 2 81U 1 31U 2 810 1 810 2 BF 55A 55D 55N 1 59N 2 32 1 32 2 32 8 LOP LOPB PH OC G IOC TOC OC All Alm Volt Freq AllProt 50X 1 50X 2 Direct or Negated 50X 3 50R 1 50R 2 50R 3 50P 2 50P 3 51 1 51 2 51 51X 59A 1 59A 2 27A 1 27A 2 59M 1 59M 2 27M 1 27M 2 46 2 47 1 47 2 81U 1 31U 2 810 1 810 2 BF 55A 55D PhZone GndZone 59N 1 59N 2 32 1 32 2 32 3 LOPA LG1 LG2 LG3 L54 L G5 L G6 TG1 TG2 TG4 TG5 TG6 OG1 Direct or Negated OG2 OG3 OG4 OG5 OG6 OG7 p Cin1 Cin2 Cin3 Cin4 Cin5 Cin6 Cin7 Cin8 or ZI In Direct or Negated p Power Power Demand Current Demand TH
132. Set Cntrl PB under OSC Trigger in Waveform Capture to Locked Trigger oscillographic data capture by entering Trig Waveform Capture under Control in Status Control from the front panel The data will be captured in a buffer and then the buffer will be locked This buffer cannot be overwritten Example 2 5 4 5 Contact Input Configuration Settings Contact input CFG These settings are directly linked to the Configuration setting The I O Config setting in the System Config settings menu must be set to custom for the Contact input CFG settings to be configured by the user otherwise the Contact input CFG settings are set to the default settings as shown in Section 5 6 There are eight contact inputs Cin1 to Cin8 that can be configured as inputs to predefined FP 5000 functions or for user defined custom logic The contact inputs are either on external contact closed or off external contact open User Defined This setting is user defined 52a Breaker contact 52a Open Trip circuit breaker feedback Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 51 52b Breaker contact 52b Close circuit breaker feedback External Breaker Failure Initiation Bkr Trouble Breaker Trouble Remote Open Remote Breaker Open Remote Closed Remote Breaker Closed Remote Reset Allows remote reset of the Trip and Alarm Relays and Indicators Datalo
133. Start PowerPort by selecting it from the Windows Start Menu The program may be run off line not connected to an FP 5000 if desired In order to change anything in the FP 5000 the user must be logged on and on line After installation the password is ADMIN When logged on the password should be changed to assure that unautho rized users will not use this program installation to change the programming of the FP 5000 A CAUTION KEEP YOUR PASSWORD SECRET AND RECORD IT IN A SAFE PLACE IF THE PASSWORD IS LOST A NEW PASSWORD MAY BE ENTERED DURING THE FIRST 2 MINUTES AFTER CON TROL POWER IS APPLIED TO THE FP 5000 10 2 4 What PowerPort Can Do Off line an existing file of FP 5000 settings may be reviewed printed revised and re saved Also a new file of FP 5000 settings may be created starting from a template file provided with the default settings On line not logged on the real time operating data of the FP 5000 may be observed Settings may also be observed or retrieved and saved to the PC On line and logged on the FP 5000 may be controlled and the settings may be updated in addition to all the functions above www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 10 2 5 Quitting PowerPort You may go on line or off line repeatedly however once logged on you may not log off except when quitting the program Quitting is done in the standard manner for all Windows programs After quitting disconn
134. T IOC OR TOC OPERATION s OR UR 1 DISABIL DISARM CIN BKR BFI F CFG EXTERNAL OR BOTH E T N Cutler Hammer If BF Trip is true then a programmed contact output relay will activate By default Output Gate Relay 3 is programmed for this function When the Breaker Failure Lockout is true then the FP 5000 close command is locked out until reset Reset is accom plished with a special reset command in the reset menu different from the trip reset If the Breaker Failure Configuration is set to Ext and if a contact input is configured to be and is true then a breaker failure pickup initiates a trip operation without delay If after Breaker Failure Delay cycles the current is above BF Phase or BF Ground current limits then the Breaker Failure BF Trip indication is given along with the BF lockout indication By default contact input 3 is configured to Reset is accomplished with a special reset command in the reset menu different from the trip reset It can be seen that a downstream device might use the Breaker Failure Configuration Int to issue a breaker failure event and use the Ext setting in an upstream breaker to immediately trip upon downstream breaker failure If the Breaker Failure Configuration is set to Both then both Int and Ext function operate independently as explained above 8 9 6 Breaker State Alarm The Breaker State Alarm report
135. Table 5 11 Communications Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec INCOM INCOM Communications Settings 5 5 10 Enable Enable INCOM communications Yes or No Yes 5 5 10 Address Select Communication address 1 to OxFFE Hex Value 1 5 5 10 of FP5000 increments of 1 Baud rate Baud rate fixed at 9600 baud Fixed at 9600 Baud 9600 5 5 10 Accessory Bus Accessory Bus Address 5 5 10 and Baud rate setting Address Select Communication address 1 to 0xFFE Hex Value 2 5 5 10 of FP5000 increments of 1 Baud rate Baud rate fixed at 9600 baud Fixed at 9600 Baud 9600 5 5 10 RS 232 RS 232 Baud Rate Setting 5 5 10 Baud rate Select baud rate 9600 19200 19200 5 5 10 for RS 232 communications or 38400 Baud Page 5 38 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E TN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 5 4 Setting Descriptions This section discusses the settings in a little more detail than the settings table 5 4 1 System Configuration Setting Descriptions System Config Config The System Config settings contain all of the settings to configure the power system Frequency Phase Seq CT Connect PH CT Ratio IX CT Ratio VT Connect Main VTR Aux VTR VT Secondary Rating Prim Units Effective Date 12 05 Nominal system operating frequency ABC or ACB system phase sequence or rotation The 3 wire
136. _ gt Synch Override DBDL Disable DBHL Disable Line Phase A LBDL Disable Ext Bypass Disable M Sync Block Other Settings b For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 4 15 IL17569C Page 4 16 Effective Date 12 05 Alarms Display FP 5000 Alarms 50P 3 PH IOC Alarm 50X 3 IX IOC Alarm 50R 3 IR IOC Alarm 46 2 Unbal Alarm 47 2 V Unbal Alarm 59M 2 Over V Alarm E T N Cutler Hammer 50X 3 IXIOC Alarm Pickup Disable Delay 0 Direction Both X 46 21 Unbal Alarm Threshold 0 10 96 Unbal 12 11 40 Delay c 60 gt 59M 2 Over V Alarm Phase Any One Threshold V Disable Delay 0 50P 3 PH IOC Alarm gt Disable Delay c 0 Direction Both 50R 3 IR IOC Alarm 4 Pickup Disable Delay c 0 Direction Both 47 2 V Unbal Alarm 4 _ Threshold V 50 96 V2 V1 40 Delay c 60 27M 2 Under V Alarm Phase Any One Threshold V Disable Delay 0 zl 27A 2 Under V Alarm Threshold Disable Delay 0 c y c 3 2 Alarm Threshold Disable Delay c 1200 Delay c 9 81U 2 Under Freq Al 4 Threshold Disable Delay 0 e y c 0 32 3 Power Alarm T
137. a Application with S ync Check Overall Logic Diagram Phase Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve 5 42 8 11 8 13 24 2 5 9 1 Three Wire CT Connection 8 1 Time Multiplier Adjustment 8 5 Time Current Characteristic Curves 8 3 Voltage Delta Input Wiring Options with Connection Schematics 6 9 with S ync Check 6 10 Voltage Wye Input Wiring Option and Connection Schematics 6 7 with Sync Check 6 8 Wye Connected Application 2 2 with S ync Check 2 3 Zone Interlocking 8 8 Dimensions 3 5 Disarm Control 5 40 Page 14 2 FP 5000 isarm Trip isclaimers iscrete Input Sampling isplay odes eep Mode isturbance Detection Drawout Case Dropout UU E Energy Display Parameters Energy Unit Environmental R ating Event Clear Active Alarm Log 12 10 Display Enable F Failures Detecting Fault Simulation Features Communication Control Design Mechanical Metering Monitoring Protection Self Test Firmware Upgrading FlashLoader Forward Watthours Frequency Measurement Frequency Protection 10 Breaker Configuration Overfrequency Settings Settings Table Table Underfrequency 12 11 4 21 124 4 22 5 50 12 1 122 12 15 11 3 12 15 12 20 4 7 8 1 4 14 5 39 8 5 46 5 46 5 45 8 11 5 10 5 45 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Functions Breaker 8 12 Fundamental P hasor 4 6 Display 4 6 G Glossary 13 1 13 3 Groun
138. a positive power flow is power into the load and a negative power flow is power being generated by the load Power should be greater than 296 of the full load to be sure the result has significance Zero power should default to a positive power flow Reactive Power VARs Reactive power or energy associated with the displacement power factor is power factor correctable Volt Amperes Reactive It is sometimes referred to as the Q or Q Hours Calculation of the Q will use the technique of multiplying voltage samples by the associ ated current samples taken 90 earlier Thus a leading power factor will follow the conven tion of being positive Real Power Watts Real power is computed by summing the product of the individual current and voltage readings over one cycle Right Mouse Button The secondary mouse button unless you have configured your mouse differently Use the right mouse button only when specifically instructed to do so rms The rms value of a quantity X follows the standard definition of With sufficient sampling harmonics will be included in the rms values RS 232 A standard that defines the electrical characteristics of a widely used serial communication link T H Track and Hold Page 13 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 3 TH
139. able Off Delay c Select delay for Relay to dropout 0 to 600 cycles after trip event clears or E NN IN1 Select logic input IN1 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused RN IN2 Select logic input IN2 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused IEEE mes IN3 Select logic input INS for Output See Logic Input Options Unused IEEE RN RR INA Select logic input IN4 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused B tees Q This setting is only used if the Dropout setting is set to Off Delay Page 5 22 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 23 Output Configuration Settings cont posse pee s Ei Value Selection Setting Value Sec oe Te Function Select logic output function for OR AND NOR NAND LENNON RN MR MR REO Off Delay Select delay for melay to dropout to 600 cycles WEE Wadi oo NE 7 NNI Select logic input IN1 for Output See Logic Input Options Breaker UMEN s Select logic input IN2 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused HEN RR NN IN3 Select logic input IN3 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused __ INA Select logic input IN4 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused PE jme resto Output Alarm Output Alarm Relay 6 Settings 5 E Function Select logic output function for OR AND NOR NAND
140. able 1 Volt increments Auxiliary VT Overvoltage Settings Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1200 00 1 cycle increments Select magnitude of overvoltage required 10 to 250 Volts disable Disable 1 Volt increments Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1200 1 cycle increments Neutral V Protection Select neutral voltage device settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec 59N 1 OV Definition Source Criterion 59N 1 OV Trip Neutral Overvoltage Trip Settings Threshold Neutral Overvoltage Settings Select if the operation is based on calculated or measured voltgage Select if the threshold is based on fundamental or rms Calculated measured Calculated D 5 Phasor a 5 to 250 Volts Select magnitude of overvoltage required Increments of 1 251 disable 0 to 9999 cycles 1200 1 cycle increments Select delay time in cycles Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 9 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 10 Effective Date 12 05 Freq Protection Selects underfrequency 81U 1 and overfrequency 810 1 device settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Threshold Select frequency threshold 45 to 65 disable Disable 0 01 Hzincr
141. actory with default settings for the Outputs It will be necessary to change the System Configuration setting I O Config from Default to Custom to change the pro grammed function of the outputs See Default settings in Table 9 1 Effective Date 12 05 ETN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 9 3 Table 9 1 Output Configuration Default Relay Settings Output Gate Function Inputs Dropout Trip 1 Relay OG1 OR Any Protection Trip 5 cycle Off Delay Open Breaker Trip 2 Relay OG2 Disabled unused Relay 3 OG3 OR Breaker Failure Trip Latched Relay 4 OG4 Disabled unused Relay 5 OG5 OR Close Breaker 10 cycle Off Delay Alarm Relay OG6 OR Any Protection Trip Any Alarm Trip Any Latched System Alarm Any Breaker Alarm Healthy Relay N A Not Programmable In addition to the output relays the Auxiliary LED and the Pickup Trip and Alarm Indicators are also programmable The programming for the Auxiliary LED uses the same type of Output Logic Gate OG7 as the output relays The Trip and Alarm Indicators are programmed as the OR of the seven output relays Each of the output relays is enabled or disabled from inclusion in the OR function See Figure 9 2 Trip and Alarm Indicator Pickup Indicator Trip 1 _ IOC 2 _ TOC Volt RLY 4 4 Trip or Alarm Indicator Over Freq I Pickup Indicator R
142. and negative sequence currents are calculated from the 3 phase currents The Threshold setting defines a minimum operating current magnitude of either 11 or I2 for the 46 function to operate which insures that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a current unbalance trip This is a supervisory function and not a trip level The 12 11 setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current 96 Unbalance l2 I1 or 12 11 for ABC rotation and 11 12 for ACB rotation The FP 5000 will automatically select the correct ratio based on the Phase Sequence setting in the System Configuration group described above The time delay is a definite time delay adjustable from 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps This function requires positive or negative sequence current magnitude above the threshold setting and the percentage current unbalance above the 12 11 setting before allowing a current unbalance trip Therefore both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates a trip for current unbalance The current unbalance pickup and trip functions are reset when the positive and negative sequence current 11 and 12 drop below the Threshold setting or 12 11 drops below the 12 11 setting minus 1 5 4 2 5 Voltage Protection Settings 27M 1 Undervoltage This is the 27 device Undervoltage setting for
143. are available for check out which computer licenses have been checked out and the current status of each license 10 4 6 Optional Components There are several additional applications you can add to the core to customize the PowerNet Software system to your needs They include the following PowerNet DDE Server PowerNet Bill PowerNet Trend PowerNet Modbus Tools PowerNet Monitor PowerNet Waveform PowerNet Setpoints amp Trip Curve PowerNet OPC Server PowerNet Event Viewer Power Pager PowerNet DDE Logger PowerNet Integrator www eatonelectrical com Page 10 3 IL17569B Page 10 4 Effective Date 12 05 PowerNet DDE Server DDE Dynamic Data Exchange is a communication protocol supported within the Microsoft Windows operating environment that allows cooperating Windows applications to share information DDE implements a client server relationship between concurrently running applications PowerNet DDE Server is the PowerNet Software application that acts as a DDE server to other DDE clients PowerNet DDE Server accepts requests from DDE clients then relays the requests to the PowerNet DeviceServer or DeviceServers using PowerNet Protocol When the PowerNet DDE Server receives device data from a PowerNet DeviceServer it uses the DDE link to send device data back to the DDE clients PowerNet Bill PowerNet Bill is a billing software package that generates bills for energy consumers
144. ate is then not needed since the assembly panel is replacing it From the back of the panel pass the chassis box studs through the IQ panel cutout mounting holes see Figure 6 3 From the front of the panel apply the latching frame onto the studs and replace the mounting nuts Snug the nuts to get a hand free fit and inspect the opening The IQ panel cutout should not project beyond the inside lip of the latching frame or it will hang up on the FP 5000 inner chassis slide guides Note that there is some slop in the outer chassis mounting studs being size 8 and the panel holes being a size 10 By adjusting the fit on the panel the clearance may be removed or if necessary file the opening so that the inner chassis passes without interference The inner chassis should slide in out without binding and the face plate should lay evenly against the latching frame with little gap 030 inches max When finished follow the startup check out procedures outlined in Section 7 to ensure that the drawout termination is engaged adequately Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Pdl IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 6 3 OUTER CASE MOUNTING PANEL FLANGE ASSEMBLY Figure 6 3 FP 5000 IQ Cutout Retrofit Mounting 6 3 Wiring General The main electrical interconnections are made from the rear of the outer case of the FP 5000 The mounting and wiring can be
145. ated Displacement Power Factor 1 to 1 0 02 for Load Currents Above 20 Rated Total Harmonic Distortion 0 to 9999 1 Other Metering Accuracy 51 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 3 3 IL17569C Page 3 4 FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 Protective Function Pickup Accuracy E T N Cutler Hammer Trip Accuracy Pickup and Trip Time Relative to Programmed Trip Trip Description Pickup Trip Time Accuracy Accuracy 50X 1 Ground Trip IX IOC 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 196 whichever is greater 50X 2 Ground Trip IX IOC 0 5 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 50R 1 Ground Trip Residual 3 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 196 whichever is greater IR IOC 50R 2 Ground Trip Residual 3 9 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater IR IOC 50P 1 Phase Trip Ph IOC 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 50P 2 Phase Trip Ph lOC 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 55A Apparent PF Trip 0 02 0 to 0 1 2 Sec 55D Apparent PF Reset 0 02 0 to 0 1 2 Sec 59M 1 Voltage Main Over 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 59N 1 Neutral Overvoltgage 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 27M 1 Voltage Main Under 0 5 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 32 1 Power 1 0 to 2 Cycles or 0 1 whichever is greater 3
146. ation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Block 50P 3 IOC Logic gate setting to block 5 5 7 50P 3 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 For more information visit www eatoneiectricai com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 33 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Block 51P1 TOC Logic gate setting to block 51P1 5 Function Select logic function
147. atonelectrical com Page 14 7 Eaton Corporation Cutler Hammer business unit 1000 Cherrington Parkway Moon Township PA 15108 4312 USA www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Style 66A2053H04 For additional information please call Power Technical Quality Center 1 800 809 2772 option 4 option 4 E T N Cutler Hammer ANSI RAB QMS 2003 Eaton Corporation Rights Reserved Publication No IL17569 June 2003
148. atts by volt amperes The apparent power factor computation includes harmonics watt PF apparent VA The Displacement Power Factor is computed by dividing the fundamental watts by the fundamental volt amperes as shown below This definition is only valid at the system fundamental operating frequency The Displacement Power Factor isolates the fundamental portion of the Power Factor from the effects of harmonics watt PF displacement watt var New values of apparent and displacement power factor are computed every 32 cycles The power factor function operates when the power factor is more lagging than the Trigger PF setting for the Power Factor Delay setting time The function resets when the power factor is more leading than the Reset PF setting for the Power Factor Delay setting time 5 4 2 10 Zone Interlocking Zone Interlocking The zone interlocking setting consists of settings to configure a Zone Interlock Trip and a Zone Interlock Out setting Both Zone Interlock Trip and Zone Interlock Out settings can be set to Disable Phase Ground or Both Both Zone Interlock Trip and Zone Interlock Out can be set to Forward Reverse or Both Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 47 5 4 2 8 Breaker Failure RETRIE BF PICKUP BF CFG INTERNAL OR BOTH IOC OR TOC OPERATION BF N AND DELAY D gt BKR STATE LOCKOUT TRIP 1 a
149. ber Setting Groups Set Ctrl Local Set Control Disarm Ctrl Disable Disarm Control Energy Unit kWh Energy Unit TOC Reset T 5 Time Overcurrent Adjust Time Bkr Oper PB Disable Breaker Operation Pushbutton Line Z1 Ang 70 Positive Line Impedance Angle Line 20 Ang 70 Zero Line Impedance Angle IR Dir Ontrl OFF IR Direction Control 3V0 Source Calc Zero Sequence Voltage Source 310 Source IX Dir Cntrl OFF IX Ground Direction Control PhDir Mem 3 Phase Direction Memory Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 5000 Effective Date 12 05 4 6 2 1 Protection Display 4 12 View Settings Protection Display Protection I S Setting Group1 gt Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Phase Overcurrent Setting Group 3 IX Measured OC IR Residual OC Setting Group 4 Unbalance Settings Main V Protection Aux V Protection Neutral V Protectio Freq Protection Power Protection Breaker Failure Power Factor Zone Interlocking 25 Sync Check Alarms Note The number of setting groups that are displayed is program mable in the Configuration Settings as Set Grps The default of setting groups is 1 so this display will normally only show Setting Group 1 If Set Grps is set to 4 then all four setting groups will be displayed as shown above All four setting group s sub menus display the same settings therefore only one example setting group is shown here
150. ble Delay 1200 274 1 Undervoltage 59A 1 Overvoltgage L 59A 1 Overvoltgage Threshold V Disable Delay 1200 X iiid A Note A1 is for Auxiliary 1 referring to voltage protection metered by the Auxiliary Voltage transformer in the System Configuration Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 IL17569C Page 4 13 Page 4 13 IL17569C FP 5000 Page 4 14 Effective Date 12 05 Neutral V Protection Display Neutral V Protection 59N 1 OV Definition 59N 1 OV Definition Source Calc 59N 1 OV Tri L 4 V P J Criterion Phasor 59 1 Threshold Disable Delay 1200 Freq Protection Display 4 Freq Protection 810 1 Underfreq 81U 1 Underfreq JE s 810 1 Overfreq L 810 1 Overfreq Threshold Disable Delay c 60 Power Protection Display 32 1 Power Definition Direction Reverse Power Protection Criterion Over 32 1 Power Definition 32 1 Power Trip 32 1 Power Trip 32 2 Power Definition Threshold Disable Delay c 10 32 2 Power Trip Ly 32 2 Power Definition Direction Reverse Criterion Over L gt 32 2 Power Trip Threshold Disable Delay c 1 Breaker Failure Display Breaker
151. bled Threshold 810 2 Over 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Frequency Time Delay Any Phase lt 52a Any IOC pickups Any phase current gt 2 Ipu Residual Current Less than 0 V1 V2 gt 40 Effective Date 12 05 Figure 8 11 Loss of Potential LOPB Enable IL17569C Page 8 11 e very small value For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 8 11 IL17569C Page 8 12 Effective Date 12 05 8 9 Breaker Oriented Functions 8 9 1 Breaker State Circuit breakers typically have both a 52a contact and a 52b contact The FP 5000 reports breaker state based on either one or both of these inputs It is recommended that both be used When both are used the FP 5000 can alarm if a conflict between the two signals exists see section 8 9 6 Breaker State Alarm By default Contact Input 1 is configured as 52a and Contact Input 2 as 52b but any of the eight contact inputs can be configured as inputs to read the 52a or 52b breaker contact outputs Never configure more than one input to be 52a or 52b see figure 8 12 below When the breaker is closed the 52a breaker contact output is closed and the 52b breaker output is open When the breaker is open the 52a breaker contact output is open and the 52b breaker output is closed The Breaker Closed and Breaker Open LEDs on the front face panel are only operational if at least one contact input i
152. bnormalities if detected Normal operation of the unit with source power applied is demonstrated by a flashing operational LED an engaged Healthy relay along with normal communications and user interface functions The installer should verify proper operation and circuit connections by noting normal input levels relative to field circuit status The user interface can be used to perform verification Alternatively Cutler Hammer software products can facilitate verification of the FP 5000 operation Either the RS 232 communications port on the front panel or the INCOM PowerNet communications port can be used for communications as well as other functional testing See Section 11 2 2 for more details Use the following procedures for bench testing or for verification of inputs It is recommended this be done on a periodic basis 11 2 Verifying the Product Hardware The product hardware can be verified using the self test feature described in Section 11 3 in service monitoring of the FP 5000 under normal operating conditions or bench testing by injecting currents and voltages into the various inputs This section will discuss in service monitoring and injection testing methods 11 2 1 In service Monitoring In service monitoring refers to observing the unit under normal operating conditions within the power system The normal load currents system voltages rms auxiliary voltage system power frequency and power factor THD currents as
153. breaker is open Closed A flag to indicate the the breaker is closed BkFailAlm Breaker failure alarm flag StateAlm Breaker status disagreeement alarm Mntr1Alm Trip coil broken alarm Mntr2Alm Close coil broken alarm AllAlm All alarm flag 67G F Ground fault direction Forward 67G R Ground fault direction Reverse 67V F Zero sequence voltage polarized fault direction Forward 67V R Zero sequence voltage polarized fault direction Reverse 67Q F Negative sequence voltage polarized fault direction Forward 67Q R Negative sequence voltage polarized fault direction Reverse 67 Neutral current polarized fault direction Forward 67I R Neutral current polarized fault direction Reverse 67X F Fourth CT fault current direction Forward 67X R Fourth CT fault current direction Reverse 67X F Fourth CT fault current direction Forward 67VIXF Fourth CT Zero sequence voltage polarized fault current direction Forward 67VIXR Fourth CT Zero sequence voltage polarized fault current direction Reverse 67A F Phase A current direction Forward 67B F Phase B current direction Forward 67C F Phase C current direction Forward SynchFail Synch fail alarm SlipAlm Frequency difference between tow voltage sources is out of range 25BL Bus voltage normal 25LL Line voltage normal ColdLoad In cold load condition load is energized after a sp
154. by the FP 5000 on the Default Monitor Page are within about 5 of the ammeter values Verify the voltage and current phase rotation and the polarity of the wiring for correctness If the CTs are far from the optimum ratio errors may be larger This test is intended to show incorrectly set CT ratios or faulty wiring rather than precision of measurements If the IX CT is connected check the magnitude of IX Consider the cause of any anomalies For instance if ground current is being measured investigate the cause of any abnormal ground leakage current flow lf a PowerNet data communications host is connected upload an oscillographic sample of the operating currents and voltages Review for inconsistencies or problems Page 7 3 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 7 4 Effective Date 12 05 e t is wise to verify the ability of the FP 5000 to open the breaker and trip the load The easiest way is by remote trip via remote trip contact or data communications Many other internal functions can be manipulated to force a relay trip Verify if the 52a and or 52b contacts are used and the Breaker Closed LED lights Verify that the trip coil monitor function is reading trickle current around trip 1 relay Verify the phasor angles have correct polarity between voltage and current inputs Page 7 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 500
155. ce If the Multiple Setpoint Group Control is set to Remote the active setpoint group is selected using a PowerNet slave action command 3 D 0 f the Multiple Setpoint Group Control is set to Local Remote the active setpoint group is selected using either a sub menu option of the Status Control PB or the PowerNet slave action command 3 D 0 The active setpoint group is the group that was selected last Logic gate outputs can be enabled for one setting group or for all setting groups Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 9 8 Default Settings If no programming steps are taken the inputs and outputs will have default settings that are likely to satisfy the majority of user applications with no setting changes required Attempts to program the inputs outputs or any logic will be prevented until the user changes the System Configuration settings for I O Config or Prog Logic from Default to Custom Attempting to access Contact input CFG or Output Config within the Set or Programming mode when Config is Default will result a few seconds of the display Functions Programmed To Default They can be viewed only See System Config Attempting to access Programmable Logic settings when Prog Logic is set to Default will result in the same message Effective Date 12 05 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569B Page 9 9 Page 9 9 IL17569B FP
156. ckups 32 Power Power Protections have picked up or Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups 27A UV Auxiliary Undervoltage has picked Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that up or dropped out describe all under and overvoltage pickups 46 lunbal Phase Current Unbalance has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups 47 Vunbal Phase Voltage Unbalance has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups 81 UF Underfrequency has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups 81 OF Overfrequency has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups BF Breaker Failure has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking picku
157. command is given and the breaker takes more than 15 line cycles to change to the open state the slow breaker time alarm is raised By default the alarm contact output relay will close 8 10 Setting Up Oscillographic Data Capture The FP 5000 can capture oscillographic waveforms based on a number of triggers This function is useful to capture waveform data during faults and abnormal events for later analysis The oscillo graphic data can be viewed using the Cutler Hammer PowerNet software package equipped with the NPWAVEFORM component All four voltage and four current inputs are captured when a trigger occurs and are available for display The waveform data consists of 32 samples a cycle Table 8 7 list the setpoints used for setting up the oscillographic data waveform capture function Table 8 7 Waveform Capture Setpoints Parameter Range Units Records 4X64 8X32 of 16 X16 Waveforms X of Cycles Recorded Pre Trigger 1 15 Line Cycles OSC Trigger Trip 2 dV dl Disable Logic LG6 Overwrite Lock Cntrl PB Comm The Records setpoint defines how many sets of all inputs can be captured per the number of cycles recorded By default 16 waveform sets will be available with a recorded length of 16 line cycles long A smaller number of waveform sets can be selected allowing for a longer recording time of 32 or 64 cycles In all cases each cycle of data contains 32 data points The Pre Trigger setpoint defines the numbe
158. ct any trip event Using the example above the 1 event is an instantaneous overcurrent trip on phase that happened 1 19 01 By selecting this event with the Up Down arrows and pushing the Enter pushbutton the user can view additional information about the event Display 4 14 is an example of the trip log information Display 4 14 Trip Log 1 Example Display 150P IOC 1 19 01 Display Meanings Trip 2 Trips Time 13 36 06 109Time of trip Event 27 Events Cause 50P IOC Cause of trip Fit Type AG Fault Type Set Seq Num 0 Setting Sequence Number WaveCap Index 34 Waveform Capture Index ActiveSetGrp 1 Active Setting Group TripStatus Trip Status TOC Time ms Time Overcurrent Trip Time Input Status Input Status Output Status Output Status Pickup Status V Ph Pickup Status Voltgage Pickup Flag Inverse Time Overcurrent Status Voltage Phase Pickup Status Voltgage Pickup Flag TOC Pickup Status Misc Pickup Status OC Trip Status Time Overcurrent Pickup Status Miscellaneous Pickup Status Overcurrent Trip Status Misc Trip Status Volt Trip Status Output Gate Status Miscellaneous Trip Status Voltage Trip Status Output Gate Status Logic Block Status Logic Gate Status SYSALM Pickup Logic Block Status Logic Gate Status System Alarm Pickup SYSALM TimeOut Breaker Status Directional Units System Alarm Timeout Breaker Status Direct
159. cting Yes will enable specified voltage related pickup and dropout events to be logged Selecting Yes will enable specified frequency related pickup and dropout events to be logged Selecting Yes will enable specified power factor related pickup and dropout events to be logged For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Unbal Pickup SYSALM Pickup Power Pickup Logic Pickup Cin 1 8 Datalogger E T N Cutler Hammer Selecting Yes will enable specified current and voltage unbalance related pickup and dropout events to be logged Selecting Yes will enable specified system alarm related pickup and dropout events to be logged Selecting Yes will enable specified power related pickup and dropout events to be logged Selecting Yes will enable specified logic related pickup and dropout events to be logged Each contact input can be individually set to either Yes or The contact inputs can be programmed to any input from the Contact Input CFG in the setting menu See setting description of Contact Input CFG for details Selecting Yes will enable specified Cin related pickup output and dropout events to be logged Datalogger recorded information is only available through the communication interfaces but the settings can be done from the front panel Mode Trigger Note Interval s Value 1 8 Waveform Capture Records Sets the mode for datalogging
160. ctor on the front panel of the FP 5000 using a standard DTE to DSE cable The FP 5000 front panel RS 232 connector is wired as a 9 socket Female Data Set DSE D Subminiature under the RS 232 standard Typical PCs are wired as a 9 pin Male Data Terminal DTE under the RS 232 standard Sometimes PCs might have a 25 position D Subminiature connector In the case of the 9 position configuration an off the shelf Male DB9 to Female DB9 straight through connection Page 10 2 For more information visit cable will work properly even though only the Transmit Receive and common wires are required The front panel RS 232 connector uses a 3 wire connection not relying on the hardware handshaking lines An example of an easily available and acceptable cable is the RadioShack 26 117B Male DB9 to Female DB9 Shielded RS 232C Cable Note the baud rate setting for the FP 5000 see in View Settings mode and the baud rate of the running PowerPort program must be set to the same baud rate in order to communicate Before attempting to go on line with the FP 5000 set the baud rate and other communi cations parameters for the running PowerPort software to match the settings of the FP 5000 Consider using the highest baud rate of 38 4K baud to minimize data transfer times Since the default baud of the FP 5000 is 19 2K baud this entails changing program setting manually from the front panel of the FP 5000 prior to serial data operation
161. d Direction 5 41 IR Control 5 41 IX Control 5 42 Ground Fault Protection 8 6 Ground I t Curve 13 18 Ground l t Curve 13 17 Ground IT Curve 13 19 Ground Trip LED 4 23 H Hardware 12 Help 12 15 History Log 4 22 12 14 Breaker 4 22 Display 4 22 l IEEE Standards 1 2 3 5 13 4 INCOM 2 6 10 3 Inductive Load 4 7 Input Cause Table 12 8 Installation 6 1 Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 2 Blocking Logic Gates 5 53 IR IOC 5 44 IX IOC 5 44 Phase 5 44 Instantaneous Protection 8 6 Instantaneous Reset 8 2 Inverse Time O vercurrent Curve Shapes 8 3 Curves Table 8 3 Pickup Figure 8 4 Protection 8 2 8 5 IPONI Specifications 32 IR Ground Direction Control5 41 IR Residual OC 4 12 5 44 Table 5 IX CT Ratio 5 39 IX Ground Direction Control5 42 IX Measured OC 4 12 5 44 Table 5 6 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer L Lagging Power Factor Lagging Var Hours Leading Var Hours LED 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 23 11 3 Line Positive Sequence Impedance Angle 5 41 Line Zero Sequence Impedance Angle 5 41 Load 4 6 Capacitive 4 7 Display 4 6 Inductive 4 7 4 8 Logging Display 4 18 Settings 5 49 Settings Table 5 18 5 19 Default 5 58 Logic Diagram 9 1 Elements Input Options Table 9 5 Example 9 6 9 9 Flowchart 5 54 Functions 9 4 Gates 5 53 InputGroup Definitions 9 6 Latches 5 53 Operation 9 5 Programmable 9 1 9 7 Logic Input P rogramming O ption Table 5 35 Logs 4 21 Events 4 21 History 4 22 1
162. d Wye connected feeder protection respectively Note Careful attention should be made to the phase wiring to avoid erroneous power and voltage indications as well as damage to the FP 5000 Standard Communication Board TB3 There are three circuits on the Standard communication Terminal Block assembly TB3 e J1 INCOM PN is the connection of a PowerNet INCOM twisted pair communications interface The connection is part of a daisy chained multi point twisted pair interface J1 1 and J1 2 are for the twisted pair connections and J1 3 for shield termination The removable terminal plug can facilitate debug of the INCOM hardware interface Switch selectable termination is located on the communication board of the inner chassis and can be accessed through an opening in the metal chassis with the drawout removed It is shipped open Refer to Section 10 for INCOM wiring rules and details J2 INCOM AB this is an INCOM type interface reserved for future design features The hardware is identical to J1 accept that there is a non switch selectable 100 ohm termination resistor built in J3 Zone Interlock This is the termination for both the zone interlock Zone Out J3 1 and Zone In J3 4 circuits with duplicate J3 2 and J3 5 Zone com connections for Zone signal returns The shield connection J3 3 is grounded to the chassis and is not needed for noise immunity Twisted pair control wiring of 14 18 AWG is recommended J4 and J5 ar
163. d display unchanged Each character in the Password may be modified to any of the charac ters 0 9 and A Z within program mode Password Window dekdek Single Arrow For Bit Dual Arrow for Value If the password has not been changed previously press enter the password default is zero 0 If a password has been previously programmed use the D and pushbuttons to select which of the 4 password characters to change the a and 27 the appropriate character in each location and the pushbuttons to change to pushbutton to enter the specified password Page 2 6 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer CAUTION KEEP YOUR PASSWORD SECRET AND RECORD IT INASAFE PLACE IF THE PASSWORD IS LOST A NEW PASSWORD MAY BE ENTERED DURING THE FIRST 2 MINUTES AFTER CON TROL POWER IS APPLIED TO THE FP 5000 2 5 3 Navigation Within Settings Mode LJ a The FP 5000 parameters that are set are either numeric or elements of a list Use the Enter pushbutton to select the settings category or value to update The Enter pushbutton also verifies the updating of settings upon exiting Set mode Use the Up and Down pushbuttons to increment or decrement setting values one step at a time or to step forward and backward through a presented list of settings Lv Use the Page Up and Page Down pushbuttons to increment or decrement setting values 10 times as fast as with the Up and Do
164. d press the Enter pushbutton two time Press the Reset pushbutton on the FP 5000 Scroll to the History Log and press Enter Scroll to Bkr History and press the Enter pushbutton two times Accum Current LOP ALARM Condition must be cleared externally away from the FP 5000 unit Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 Condition Bkr Lockout Slow Bkr Time Bkr State Alm Trip1 Mntr Alm Trip2 Mntr Alm For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 IL17569B Page 12 11 Table 12 13 Clear Active Alarm Event BreakerCause Clear By Press the Reset button scroll to Bkr Lockout and press the Enter button two times Press the Reset button scroll to Slow BkrAlm and press the Enter button two times The Breaker State Alarm is based on 52A and 52B events Conditions must be cleared externally away from the FP 5000 unit The Trip1 Monitor Alarm can not be cleared only disabled To disable the alarm press the Setting button scroll to Output Config press Enter Scroll to Output Trip1 press Enter Scroll to OFF and Trip Monitor Alarm can not be cleared only disabled To disable the alarm press the Setting button scroll to Output Config press Enter Scroll to Output Trip2 press Enter Scroll to OFF and Page 12 11 IL17569B FP
165. date the event operation occurred The majority of the time the Trip 1 or Trip 2 output contacts are programmed to activate on protective function BkrFailalm A Breaker Failure Alarm operation operation In this case the cause of the trip is logged into the title of the trip log entry On occasion one of the trip relays will be BrkOpAlm A number of Breaker Operations programmed to operate on other events like contact input change Alarm operation for example A summary of all causes used in the trip log is in Table 12 14 Close Bkr A Close Breaker signal has caused an operation Table 12 14 Trip Log Cause of Trip Table E COMM A Communication command has Cause of Trip Cause Description caused an operation 27A UV An Auxiliary Undervoltage operation Contactln A programmed Contact Input has 27M UV A Main Undervoltage operation caused an operation 46 lunbal A phase current Unbalance operation A Demand operaio i lock 47 Vunbal A main voltage Unbalance operation Gna Zint 2 Current zone Interlog SOP IOC lt 2 Logic A programmed logic gate has P caused an operation 50R IOC A Residual current Instantaneous Over Current operation Open Bkr An Open Breaker signal 50X IOC An IX ground current Instantaneous Ph Zint A Phase current Zone Interlock operation Over Current operation A Pickup of a protective function has 51P TOC A Phase current Time Over caused an operation Current operation 51P2 TOC A Phase
166. de IB Demand Magnitude IC Demand Magnitude Current Peak Demand IA Demand Magnitude IB Demand Magnitude IC Demand Magnitude Demand Last Reset Date mm dd yy Time hh mm ss Power Demand MWatt Magnitude MVAR Magnitude MVA Magnitude Power Peak Demand MWatt Magnitude MVAR Magnitude MVA Magnitude P Demand Last Reset Date mm dd yy Time hh mm ss Current Demand Window Fixed Window Current Demand is the average of system current over time which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes For example if the range is set for 30 minutes the FP 5000 calculates the average current over the past 30 minutes and updates the value every 30 minutes The range can be selected from the Logging menu by pressing the Set pushbutton Refer to Section 5 Settings of this manual for setting changes The default setting for Current Demand window selection is 15 minutes Power Demand Window Fixed or Slide In addition to the interval setting as in the Current Demand Window the Power Demand window has an additional setting of Fixed or Slide window The default setting for Power window is Fixed If Fixed window is selected the Demand will be calculated every fixed interval and updated every fixed interval If the Slide window is selected the Demand will be calculated every minute for the interval selected For example if the Slide window is selected and the interval is set to 30 minu
167. dity non condensing Altitude 0 to 2500 meters above Mean Sea Level Dimensions Behind Panel Height 6 7 in 17 0 cm Width 5 3 in 13 5 cm Depth 6 9 in 17 75 cm In Front of Panel Height 11 34 in 28 9 cm Width 7 72 in 19 7 cm Depth 0 80 in 2 1 cm Weight Drawout 5 8 lbs 2 6 Kg Enclosure 5 0 Ibs 2 3 Kg Adapter Panel 1 3 Ibs 6 Kg Shipping 16 5 lbs 7 5 Kg Minimum absolute tolerance of residual current is Minimum absolute tolerance of measured voltage 66006000 3 2 Standards Compliance The FP 5000 complies with the following standards except where noted ANSI IEEE C37 90 1989 Standard for Relay Systems associated with electric power apparatus UL CUL 1053 Recognized Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment File E154862 FP5000 00 5A CT model only FP5100 00 1 ACT pending EMC Requirements ANSI C37 90 1 1989 Surge withstand all ports ANSI C37 90 2 1995 RF withstand FS Full Scale 2 3 CT Rating Nominal L N Voltage Minimum absolute tolerance of measured current is 0 596 of CT Rating 396 of CT Rating is 0 5 of Nominal Voltage Tolerance for currents greater than 1 03 times pickup 1 5 times pickup at minimum pickup setpoints Note shield amp VG exception details in Section 7 Startup Emissions EN 50081 2 EN 50011 CISPR 11 Class CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart b Class A Immunity EN 6
168. done with the inner chassis withdrawn from the outer case Terminal lugs should be used to wire to the FP 5000 The terminal lugs are inserted by loosening the screws of the terminal blocks mounted on the rear of the outer case When routing wires between the FP 5000 and the associated machine or process equipment follow these guidelines Do not route the control wiring through the high voltage compart ment of the gear in which the FP 5000 is mounted Separate the lower voltage connections from the higher voltage 440 Vac or higher conductors as much as possible In general maintain a minimum distance of 1 5 feet 45 cm between the two types Any low voltage control wiring routed out of the cabinet should be at least 18 AWG stranded copper wire AWG maximum Any CT wiring routed out of the cabinet should be at least 14 AWG stranded copper wire 10 AWG maximum Communications circuits may use thinner conductors as recom mended in installation literature for those circuits Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com WARNING BEFORE WORKING WITH THE WIRING MAKE SURE POWER IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE FP 5000 AND ALL REMOTE CONNECTIONS INCLUDING CONTACT OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUITS AND REMOTE INPUT CONTACTS OTHERWISE HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES COULD CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH ALSO UNEXPECTED CONTROL ACTION COULD INJURE PERSONNEL OR DESTROY EQUIPMENT Figure 6 5 shows FP 5000 rear terminal co
169. e 12 05 current residual to establish the fault direction in the current polarized direction unit To achieve maximum sensitivity to a fault a phase shift is applied to each polarizing quantity see diagrams below The zero sequence voltage polarizing option uses a zero sequence voltage polarized direction measurement unit The negative sequence voltage polarizing option uses a negative sequence voltage polarized direction measurement unit The dual polarizing uses two directional measurement units one is the zero sequence voltage polarized direction measurement unit and the other is the current polarized directional measurement unit see figures 5 3 and 5 4 IX Gnd Dir Cntrl This setting allows the user to select the IX Ground Polarizing Method Ground direction units are used to supervise the relay elements that are responsible for tripping ground faults Ground direction supervision includes zero sequence voltage polarizing negative sequence voltage polarizing and dual polariz ing This includes single phase to ground and double phase to ground faults see figures 5 3 and 5 4 Ph Dir Min Voltage The Phase Direction Minimum Voltage setting is the threshold used to determine when memory voltage will be used The maximum torque angle determines the maximum sensitive operating line A fixed minimum voltage value will be used to determine when to use memory voltage and a fixed minimum current will be used to enable the fault d
170. e all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips 55D PF Displacement Power Factor has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips Zin Trip Zone Interlock Trip has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips PwrAlm The system alarm for Watt VA System Alarm Time out Status contains or VAR has operated the status flags for all system alarm time outs PwrDmdAlm The system alarm for Watt demand System Alarm Timeout Status contains the status VA demand or VAR demand has operated flags for all system alarm time outs CurDmdAlm The system alarm for Current System Alarm Timeout Status contains the status Demand has operated flags for all system alarm time outs THD CurAlm The system alarm for Current Total System Alarm Timeout Status contains the status Harmonic Distortion has operated flags for all system alarm time outs THD VolAlm The system alarm for Voltage Total System Alarm Timeout Status contains the status Harmonic Distortion has operated flags for all system alarm time outs BrkOpAlm Breaker Operation Alarm the number System Alarm Timeout Status contains the status of breaker operations has exceeded flags for all system alarm time outs the p
171. e current day for the real time clock update Hour Sets the current hour for the real time clock update Minute Sets the current minute for the real time clock update Second Sets the current second for the real time clock update Update Clock Pressing Enter updates the clock with the date and time specified above with the message stating that the real time clock was properly updated Page 5 54 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Logic Gate 1 Logic Gate 2 Logic Gate 3 Programmable Logic OR AND NOR Logic Gate 1 Function Set Group NAND Disable Logic Gate 1 Function Set Group i Logic Gate 1 Function Set Group IN1 Input Category Unused PH OC Pickup GOC Trip loc Trip Option Direct Logic Gate 1 Negated Function NAND SetGroup 2 IN1 Figure 5 10 Logic Setting Flowchart 5 4 10 Communications Settings To set the communications settings select the Communications setting in the Setting Main display window Configure the settings below to set the communications desired INCOM PN Provides connection to the IMPACC network for communication over PowerNet The standard IMPACC messages are supported Enable Address Baud Rate INCOM AB Enables INCOM Communication Sets the d
172. e one or all of the LEDs flashing The LEDs will be restored to their proper state when the power is turned ON and in turn will discontinue the use of the battery Page 2 9 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 2 10 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page 2 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Table of Specifications FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 3 1 Note that accuracy specifications for the FP 5000 are for operation within the nominal frequency range of 50 Hz or 60 Hz at 5 Hz Unless stated otherwise Operating Power Factors 0 50 Laggingf to Unityf to 0 50 Leading f Control Power TB101 102 101 positive for dc Standard Power Supply Board 250V Power Supply Board ac Nominal Voltage 1007 120 Vac 100 240 Vac ac Excursion Range 55 132 Vac 55 264 Vac ac Frequency Range 50 60 Hz nom 5 50 60 Hz nom 5 dc Nominal Voltage 487 125 Vdc 100 250 dc Excursion Range 38 150 80 300 Vdc Interruption ride through time 83ms for 120V 60 Hz ac 250ms for 110 Vdc 300ms for 110 Vac maximum transient Power Consumption 20 VA max 20VA 22VA Current Transformer Inputs B C X FP 5000 00 FP 5100 00 Nominal lhom 5A 1A CT Rating Steady state 2 X Inom 1
173. e un populated future design options It is recommended that the wires terminated at TB3 be fitted on the end with ferrules to eliminate fray shorting and the cable stress released by strapping them to the back of the drawout panel near the FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 6 5 TB2 J1 G J2 J3 J4 J5 G CT Receptical Protective Earth Figure 6 4 FP 5000 Outer Chassis Rear Connections Page 6 5 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 6 6 Effective Date 12 05 TB 2 TB 3 Chi Powerllet Cin2 Powerllet BLY Healthy Com RLY Healthy H NO CIn3 Powerllet Shield CIn4 Accessory Bus Al C In Source 1 Accessory Bus Cis Accessory Bus Alarm Com Shield H Alarm N 0 C In 6 Zone Qut Alarm N C Cin7 RIY 5 Com Cing Zone Shield H RUY 51 0 C In Source 2 Zone In RIY 4 Com Reserved Zone Com RLY 4 N 0 Reserved RIY 3 Com VA Main Figure 6 6 Case with Inner Chassis Withdrawn Drawout H Ry 38 0 VB Main When removing the chassis from the case care must be taken as 2 Com VC Main many electronic components and circuits are exposed Service Tip 20 personnel should use electrostatic wrist straps to avoid damage due ss to electrostatic discharge ESD Touching t
174. e way as the Trip Indicator See Trip Indicator settings above The default configura tion sets the Dropout to Latched and enables the Alarm Indication when the Alarm Output relay is energized or the Relay Healthy output relay is de energized Pickup Indicator The Pickup Indication function reports a pickup of the programmed protective functions The pickup indicator is active for the protective functions that are enabled in the settings Dropout Set to Latched or Unlatched This setting determines if the pickup indicator stays active after a pickup event This Dropout setting works exactly the same as the Dropout setting in the Trip Indicator settings shown above Set to enable or disable TOC Set to enable or disable Volt Set to enable or disable OverFreq Set to enable or disable UnderFreq Set to enable or disable Unbalance Set to enable or disable Prot Alarm Set to enable or disable Power Set to enable or disable The default configuration sets the Dropout to Unlatched and enables all protective functions except the Prot Alarm setting See Section 9 2 for more information on configuring the outputs Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 5 4 7 Programmable Logic Settings In The programmable logic settings consist of settings for six logic gates six timer gates two latches twelve blocking gates and seven output gates The seven output gates Output Trip1 Output Trip2 Rly3 Rl
175. ecified time of outage with inrush current Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 9 7 IL17569B Page 9 8 Effective Date 12 05 Table 9 7 Other Option Definitions FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Abbreviated Full Option Name Option Name LOP Loss of potential flag due to absence of voltage signals from VT and absence of fault current LOPB Blocking flag caused by LOP condtion BF Breaker failure flag 59N 1 2 Neutral or zero sequence voltage elements 32 1 2 3 Real power protection elements PhZone Phase zone interlock trip LOPA LOP Alarm Input Data Store CinState Cin1 8 Zin CinBkr 52a 52 RemOpen RemClose 8 1 gt 50P 3 PickUp Logic IN Gate IN3 AND IN4 LG1 K6 F HEALTHY PROT Data Store Pickup Flags Trip Flags Figure 9 5 Logic Example 9 7 Use of Multiple Setting Groups The FP 5000 contains multiple setting groups for adapting to different operating situations Selection of the active setting group can be either automatic or manual Automatic setting group selection can be initiated by a contact input or via communications Manual setting group selection at the front panel is provided for applications where different settings are required based on maintenance needs or seasonal power requirements A system configuration setting provides selection of the control mecha
176. ect the serial cable and the FP 5000 will continue to operate in whichever mode it was last set 10 31NCOM PowerNet Software Cutler Hammer PowerNet is the most recent and most comprehensive software tool for integrating and managing Cutler Hammer Power Management relays and meters It is the successor to IMPACC Please refer to the manual accompanying the PowerNet software for installation configuration and use of this software It is not the intent of this manual to describe the complete operation of PowerNet but rather to familiarize the user with its use to enhance FP 5000 operation A wide variety of descriptive material is available on PowerNet from the Cutler Hammer web site Browse to the Cutler Hammer web site at http www eatonelectrical com and follow the Power Management Products link A number of documents in Adobe Acrobat format pdf which fully describes the PowerNet software features and use may be downloaded The free Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing and printing the document files is available for download from http www adobe com 10 4 PowerNet Functions 10 4 1 What is PowerNet Software PowerNet is Cutler Hammer s system of integrated metering protection and control devices PowerNet Software is the suite of software applications that allows you to monitor device data physically control devices collect information compile information and generate reports 10 4 2 Distributed Client Server Architect
177. ection Only TR m m m OT m 10 falcata Tals ses 9 1 Figure 6 1 Panel Cutout and Mounting Holes Effective Date 12 05 6 89 175 0 6 36 161 5 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com 68 42 7 n J 1 44 36 6 2 34 59 4 Customer Panel Page 6 1 IL17569C Page 6 2 Effective Date 12 05 Before actually cutting the panel check the required three dimen sional clearances for the FP 5000 case particularly behind the panel See dimensions in Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 If mounting on a swinging door check the swinging clearance of rear projections and wired connections Figure 6 2 shows dimensions for the panel cutout and mounting holes Cutout tolerances and mounting screw hole placement are critical In particular the tolerance of the horizontal dimension between the center of the mounting holes and the vertical edge of the cutout must be between 0 and 0 050 in 0 13 cm The Outer Chassis assembly is installed in the panel from the front user side with the four mounting studs passing through the four
178. ed The time overcurrent time is dynamic If the current changes it will change its trip times to the new value Total trip time will be the time at which the accumulator reaches 100 For example if the current is at level 1 for 40 of the total trip time based on level 1 current then the accumulator will be at 40 If the current now changes to level 2 with a new trip time then the remaining trip time will be 6096 of the new trip time So the total trip time will be 4096 of trip time t plus 60 of trip time If the current was to drop below pickup for a time less than the TOC Reset T in between level 1 and level 2 currents then the total trip time will include the time below pickup to the total trip time calculated This feature could be beneficial to tripping for an arcing fault condition Calc Calculated reset which is defined by ANSI C37 112 This setting represents the electromechanical induction disk model and best integrates in a system utilizing E M relays Te t x D 1 where t is a curve constant and D is the time multiplier See Section 8 for more information Figure 5 5 provides a graphical representation of the three reset characteristics The rms current value is the bottom square wave and assumes that the current level is either above or below the pickup setting for a period of time The three curves above the current are the time values for the accumulator based on the three reset characteristic set
179. ed until the input remains stable for one cycle The contact inputs are designed to be activated by connecting the C In Source voltage on terminal block TB2 to the desired inputs through a dry contact typically an external switch pushbutton or relay contact See Section 6 3 5 The contact inputs can be configured as circuit breaker logic inputs Remote Reset Setting Group Selection Datalogger Trigger Demand Sync or for user defined logic functions The contact inputs can also be programmed as an input to any logic gate The logic gates provide blocking of the protective functions operation of the output relays and provisions for custom logic The Contact Input setting options are shown below With the exception of the user defined option each function can be programmed to only one contact input 52 Datalogger Trigger 52b Demand Sync Breaker Failure Initiate Setting Group 1 Breaker Trouble Setting Group 2 Remote Open User Defined Remote Close Sync Bypass Remote Reset Sync Block The FP 5000 is shipped from the factory with default settings for the Contact Inputs It is necessary to change the System Configu ration setting activated by the Set pushbutton I O Config from Default to Custom to change the programmed function of the inputs The eight inputs are predefined with the following default functions when the input configuration is set to default Cin
180. eforms of all current and voltage phases are available through the PowerNet application software The trigger of the waveform is automatic when the Trip 1 relay output contact activates Using a logging setting see setpoint Section 5 the waveform capture can also be triggered on the activation of the Trip 2 relay See applica tions Section 8 10 and Section 5 for more information on how to set up the waveform capture Page 12 14 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com 12 2 5 Detection of Breaker Failures The FP 5000 can detect failures in the breaker that can be useful in troubleshooting the system Detectable failures include Breaker failure to interrupt fault current Slow breaker operation time Breaker state alarm due to conflicting 52a and 52b contact inputs Open circuit detection on the trip or open coil circuit and the close coil circuit Please see application Section 8 9 and setting Section 5 for more details 12 2 6 Detection of Failed Current or Voltage Transformer The loss of the ability to read a phase voltage or current can be detected by using the 46 current unbalance and 47 voltage unbalance protection alarm functions see Section 5 If a current or voltage transformer circuit should fail then a large unbalance of 50 will be detected and an alarm can be raised Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 12 3Getting Help from Cutler Hammer For help contact Eaton Cutler Hamm
181. em power preserving the batteries capacity Green Battery Test Indicator LED Battery Test A defective or discharged battery causes the loss of trip state visual LED indication during power loss conditions A Battery Test button and a green Battery Test Indicator indicating LED are provided next to the lithium battery receptacle Standard periodic maintenance should include pressing the Battery Test Button and noting that the Battery Test Indicator LED turns on showing adequate operating capacity in the battery Battery failure will not effect relay memory The battery is for LED indication only See Section 2 6 Startup for initiating the battery into service and Section 11 for battery maintenance Effective Date 12 05 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 5 4 6 Display Modes If System Voltage VT Connect is set to a Wye Configuration The default display screen will display the 3 phase voltages as line neutral L N voltages The line line L L voltages can be viewed by going to the Monitor Mode selection screen and selecting Load page down through the menu screen until the top line shows RMS L L Voltages The RMS L N Voltages are shown on the next screen following the L L voltages All parameters shown in L L and L N values in a Wye voltage CT configuration are The rms System Voltages rms Average Voltages THD Magnitude THD Voltage Phasors Min
182. emand Alm gt VA Demand Alarm I THD Alarm __ Units kVA Current Demand Alm V THD Alarm Threshold Disable Delay m 0 Threshold Disable Breaker Alarm Delay 0 M fs THD Alarm VTHDAlarm x Threshold Disable Delay s 0 Threshold Disable 2 Delay s 0 Breaker Alarm Operations 9999 l INTRAmp 50000 usum mp 0 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 4 17 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 4 18 Effective Date 12 05 4 6 2 3 Logging Logging Display Current Demand X Interval m 15 Power Demand Event Log Enable 2 Window Fixed I Pickup Yes Logging Interval m 15 V Pickup L Freq Pickup No Current Demand Data Logger Power Demand Cont PF Pickup No Event Log Enable Taqe Auto Unbal Pickup No Interval s 900 SYSALM Pickup No ue 7 Value 1 IA Power Pickup No Value 2 IB Logic Pickup No Value 3 IC Cini n Value 4 IX Cin2 No Value 5 VA Cin3 Value 6 VB Cin4 No Value 7 VC Cin5 No Value 8 VX Cin6 No Cin7 No Cin8 No Comm No Waveform Capture 4 Records 16 16 PreTrigger 2 ee J OSC Trig Enable TRIP 2 Overwrite dV dl Disable Logic LG6 Overwrite Cntrl PB Overwrite m Overwrite 4 6 2 4 Contact Input CFG Contact Input CFG
183. ements Delay Select delay time which is based 0 to 9999 60 00 on power system frequency 1 cycle increments Threshold Select frequency threshold 45 to 65 disable Disable 0 01 Hzincrements Delay c Select delay time which is based 0 to 9999 on power system frequency 1 cycle increments Power Protection Select power protection and trip settings 32 1 amp 32 2 Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec 32 1 Pwr Power Protection Settings 1 5 5 2 6 Definition Select the direction of power Forward Reverse Both iteri Select if the threshold is based Over Under Over over or under power Threshold Select the magnitude of the power 0 02 to 4 00 or Disable Disable required 5 5 2 6 Threshold Select the magnitude of the power 0 02 to 4 00 or Disable Disable required c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 65535 cycles 1 1 cycle increments 1pu 3 xCT secondary rating x VT secondary rating for the square root of 3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary c rating for delta Power Protection Settings 2 i Select if the threshold is based on Over Under Over 2 7 Select delay time in cycles 0 to 65535 cycles 10 1 cycle increments Page 5 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 11 Breaker Failure Selects breaker fail
184. enu 5 4 810 2 Over Frequency Protection Alarm menu 5 15 81U 1 Under Frequency Protection Frequency menu 5 10 81U 2 Under Frequency Protection Alarm menu 5 15 Breaker Alarms Systems Alarm menu 5 17 Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup menu 5 36 Loss of Potential used to block voltage restrain Protection Main menu 5 8 amp power protection functions on voltage loss Total Harmonic Distortion Alarms System Alarms menu 5 17 Watt VAR VA Power Alarms System Alarms menu 5 16 Zone Interlocking Protection Zone Interlocking menu 5 11 Page 1 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 2 QUICK START 2 1 Introduction The purpose of a Quick Start section is to provide a minimal overview of what it takes to operate the FP 5000 This perspective is useful as either providing the framework for learning the FP 5000 more thoroughly or for actually handling a simple application The FP 5000 is approachable at a variety of levels Significant results may be obtained with basic knowledge yet the FP 5000 is powerful enough to handle the most difficult and involved of applications Use this Guide to begin performing basic metering functions quickly without reviewing complete instructions provided in the User s Manual To more fully understand the wide array of features offered by your FP 5000 it is strongly recommended that operators read the entire User s Manual Following
185. er Power Management Application Support 150 Industry Drive Pittsburgh PA 15275 Or phone Cutler Hammer Power Management Applications Support at 1 800 809 2772 option 1 option 1 Or browse the Cutler Hammer web site at www cutler hammer eaton com and follow the power management products link 12 4 Firmware Upgrading Cutler Hammer will occasionally upgrade the firmware of the FP 5000 for the purpose of enhancing functionality or for other quality improvements For this purpose firmware is upgraded through the Cutler Hammer FP 5000 FlashLoader program along with a downloadable code file with a name such as fp5kapp s19 example which contains a representation of the firmware This S Record file contains all the information necessary to upgrade your FP 5000 firmware The FlashLoader program must be installed on your PC and your PC must have RS 232 serial communication capability The S Record file must be in one of the disk data paths accessible to your PC Requirements for your PC are Windows 95 version 2 or newer 30 meg space on your hard drive and at least a 486 Intel processor 12 4 1 FlashLoader Installation There are a variety of formats in which you might obtain the FlashLoader installation files such as by CD floppy disks or Internet download Contact your Cutler Hammer sales office or your Cutler Hammer technical support team for assistance Identify the location of the provided Setup exe program in the
186. er 2 as the short delay However the setting ranges are identical for the two sets of curves and they may be set as the user desires Page 8 5 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 8 6 Effective Date 12 05 Instantaneous Protection Instantaneous short circuit protection reacts to high level fault currents The 50P pickup settings establish the current level at which the FP 5000 picks up on an instantaneous fault An optional time delay may be programmed for coordination purposes If an Instantaneous Setting other than Disable is selected the instantaneous portion of the overall curve can be moved indepen dently in a horizontal direction Figure 8 9 graphically illustrates this horizontal movement Ground Fault Protection The ground fault protection function can be a composite of the ground Pickup is represented by the dotted portion of the curve CURRENT 1 Inverse time overcurrent curve shape pickup and time 2 50X 2 and 50R 2 Short delay pickup and time 3 50X 1 and 50R 1 Instantaneous pickup Its curve shape is independent of the phase curve The inverse time overcurrent time multiplier values for the ground function of the thermal curves are for 1 x I while the phase function is x I Movement of the pickup portion of the curve in a horizontal direction and the time portion of the curve in a vertical direction is similar to phase inverse time overcurrent short delay and
187. er frequency 81U 2 810 2 E Current unbalance 46 2 F Voltage unbalance 47 2 G Neutral voltage 59N 2 Page 1 4 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Metering Features Amps amp amps demand Volts Volt amps Watts amp kw demand kwh net kwh Vars amp kvar demand Kvarh amp net kvarh Power factor Frequency Min max recording Trending load profile over time Current amp voltage THD Monitoring Features Trip coil Breaker wear accumulated interrupted current Oscillography 256 cycles total up to 16 events Trip data logs up to 16 events Sequence of events report up to 100 events Clock 1 ms time stamping Control Functions Remote open close Local open close Programmable Programmable logic gates and timers Multiple setting groups up to 4 Sync Check 25 Cold load pickup Mechanical Features Full drawout unit automatic CT shorts Standard IQ Panel Cutout retrofit possible Outline Size is approximately 6 5 wide 10 high 7 deep Weight for outer case is 5 0 Ibs inner drawout 5 8 Ibs Approximate shipping weight is 16 5 Ibs Design Features Password protected Data acquisition with necessary resolution and sampling frequency 3 phase currents Ground current 9 phase voltages Auxiliary voltage rms values current and voltages Power real W reac
188. er reverts back to the default settings at any time when the unit is installed in the field the FP 5000 will revert back to the settings in this table Table 5 11 System Config System Config System Config Settings Default Setting Frequency 60 Phase Seq ABC CT Connect 3 wire PH CT Ratio 500 5 IX CT Ratio 500 5 VT Connect Wye Main VTR 100 Aux VTR 100 VT Secondary Rating 69 28 Prim Units No Config Default Prog Logic Default Remote Set Enable Prg w Bkr Either Remote Bkr Disable Set Grps 1 Set Ctrl Local Disarm Ctrl Disable Energy Unit kWh TOC Reset T 5 Bkr Oper PB Disable Line Pos Seg Impedance Ang 70 Line Zero Seq Impedance Ang 70 IR Dir Off Gnd Dir V 3V0 Source Calculated Gnd Dir V 310 Source Calculated IX Dir Cntrl Off Ph Dir Switch to Mem 3 Page 5 56 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Table 5 12 Protection FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 IL17569C Page 5 57 Phase Overcurrent PH Settings Default Setting 51P 1 PH TOC Shape MOD Reset Calc Direction Both Pickup 1 00 Time Mult 1 00 51P 2 PH TOC Shape MOD Reset Calc Direction Both Pickup 1 00 Time Mult 2 00 Vrestraint Disable 50P 1 PH IOC 1 Pickup 2 00 Delay 0 Direction Both 50P 1 P
189. erPort installed on a PC the user may program the settings of the FP 5000 and retrieve any of the data generated and stored by the FP 5000 PowerPort provides no cost PC aided access to the features of the FP 5000 10 2 1 Obtaining PowerPort PowerPort may be obtained over the Internet from the Cutler Hammer web site at no charge Browse to the Cutler Hammer web site at http www ch cutler hammer com and follow the Power Management Products link You will find several web pages dedicated to free software and downloadable data Prior to downloading PowerPort you must register as a User effectively joining PMUG Power Management Users Group Anyone may do this at no cost 10 2 2 Installing PowerPort Download the PowerPort software noting the location path to which your browser downloads the module Double click on the downloaded file using Windows Explorer Follow the instructions provided by the installation software and PowerPort installs within a few minutes You must install on a PC running the Windows 98 NT or 2000 operating system PowerPort is not available for non PC compatible computers PowerPort will not install on a PC with PowerNet already installed PowerPort requires an IP address though it doesn t use it If you don t have an established IP address i e you are not on a network you must create one in order for PowerPort to work 10 2 3 Running PowerPort Connect your PC to the front panel RS 232 conne
190. eriod just after LOP is identified The settings for the neutral overvoltage functions are shown in Section 5 Programming and are repeated in Table 8 6 Page 8 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Table 8 6 Loss Potential Settings Parameter Range Step LOP Block Disable Enable Alarm Delay 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Disable 8 7 Wye versus Delta Voltage Transformers The FP 5000 requires setting of system configuration parameters for proper operation of all system functions see programming Section 5 1 All voltage settings are based on the VT input configuration Both 6 G and Delta 6 voltage connections are supported For wye connected systems the voltage settings are based on phase to ground voltages Voltage settings are based on phase to phase voltages for delta connected systems The V input can be used for Sync Check 25 or measured 3V but V can not be used for both The V input must be used for 3V ground source to be measured for delta connected PT systems 8 8 Frequency Protection 81 The FP 5000 includes protective functions for detecting underfrequency and overfrequency conditions Two elements are provided for each function so alarm and trip levels can be set independently Each of the frequency protection functions has a Threshold and a Delay setting The time delay is provided for coordination with other devices If the voltage on pha
191. etrieve waveform data from the FP5000 relay and save it to a file in either a CSV or COMTRADE format The waveform cannot be viewed from PowerNet The CSV file can be viewed with MS Excel and the COMTRADE file can be viewed using a third party software such as Omicron s Transview PowerNet Setpoints amp Trip Curve PowerNet Setpoints amp Trip Curve is a tool that allows you to view setpoint data for each device connected to a PowerNet DeviceServer change setpoint data for a device and view the trip curve for a device Page 10 4 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer PowerNet OPC Server OPC OLE Process Control is an industry standard protocol for communicating with multiple data sources such as devices on a factory floor or a database in a control room is supported by Microsoft Windows NetPower OPC Server acts as an interface between the OPC protocol and the PowerNet protocol enabling Windows applications to receive data dynamically from IMPACC devices and issue device commands Windows applications act as clients sending and receiving data to and from the PowerNet OPC Server using the OPC protocol PowerNet Event Viewer PowerNet Event Viewer is a PowerNet software application used to view historical information collected by PowerNet DeviceServers and merged into databases with PowerNet Tools PowerNet DDE Energy Logger PowerNet DDE Energy Logger is the PowerNet
192. etting group threshold Select the amount of time for the cold load inrush Desensitize Gound Time Overcurrent Settings a cold load condition Select residual time overcurrent pickup in a ocld load condition Desensitize Phase Time Overcurrent Settings Select phase time overcurrent 1 pickup in a cold load condition Select phase time overcurrent 2 pickup in a cold load condition Block Fourth CT Overcurrent Settings 50X 1 Select to block the CT overcurrent 1 Yes No UNE 05 c 50X 2 Select to block the CT overcurrent 2 Yes No n 50 3 5 36 Selectto block the CT overcurrent 3 Y Y Increments of 0 01 Increments of 0 01 m ol ol _ ol while in cold load condition For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 37 Cold Load Pickup cont Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection mE Value Sec Display Setting Block Ir IOC Block Residual Instantaneous 5 5 8 Select to block the residual overcurrent 1 while in cold load condition Select to block the residual overcurrent 2 while in cold load condition Select to block the residual overcurrent 3 while in cold load condition Block Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Settings Select to block the phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 while in Cold load condition Select to block the phase i
193. evice settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default puc Value Selection Setting Value Sec 51P 1 PH TOC Phase Time Overcurrent Curve jane Select curve characteristic shape IT 2 14T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB IECC Select curve reset characteristics Inst Calc T Delay Calc Select direction Forward Reverse Both Both 51P 1 PH TOC Phase Time Overcurrent Pickup and Setting Time Multiplier Element 1 Settings Pickup Select current pickup value in per 0 1 to 4 0 or Disable 1 00 Time Mult Select Time Multiplier 0 05 to 10 0 1 00 e PPM Vrestraint Reserved for later use 60 to 150 Volts or Disable Disable Increments of 1 151 disable 51P 2 PH TOC Phase Time Overcurrent Curve uve eomenseseinmgs Select curve characteristic shape IT 127 14T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB aM IECC dc eL MR RN E E 51P 2 PH TOC Phase Time Overcurrent Pickup and SetingPickup Select current pickup value in 0 1 to 4 0 or Disable 1 00 Time Mult Select Time Multiplier 0 05 to 10 0 2 00 oe Vrestraint Select the maximum secondary 60 to 150 Volts or Disable Disable voltgage restraint level Increments of 1 1512disable 50P 1 PHIOC1 Phase Overcurrent Element 1 pret aa ee Pickup Select current pickup value in per 0 1 to 20 0 or Disable 2 00 Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 0 enr
194. evice address for INCOM communication Sets the baud rate for INCOM communication The baud rate is fixed at 9600 baud Provides an additional INCOM channel for future expansion to interconnect function modules for analog and digital I O accessories Address For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Sets the device address for Communication through Accessory bus Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 55 Cold Load Pickup Control Function Enable 52a AutoReclosing in Process N Cold Load Pickup Control c I Phase Currents ON 27 Switch OC Pickups Less than Imin e j RE Tri TE ae i Load Off Time V i Cold Load Pickup Control Timeout T2 Irc RS 0 p m i Load gt PI HS Q JN NES 4 0 J _ o Z Load lt 0 9P1 R T34e P 5 v 7 NG gt Be 52a i E Load Inrush Diminish Timer Figure 5 11 Cold Load Pickup Logic Baud Rate Sets the baud rate for Accessory bus communication The baud rate is fixed at 9600 baud RS 232 Provides connection to a personal computer for downloading code and or downloading settings for FP 5000 Baud Rate Sets the baud rate for RS 232 communication 5 4 11 Change
195. ey select Max Time s Enter the maximum test time in seconds up to 600 seconds 10 minutes that the simulation will be allowed to run without a trip condition Scroll down to the Start Simulation menu selection Press Enter to begin the simulation Once the simulation is started and before a trip occurs the Monitor Screens can be used to view the measured values of the simulated voltages and currents When trip occurs the front panel Log screens can be used to view the cause of the trip and the voltages currents and internal flags at the time of trip The time to trip can be viewed by reentering the front panel Test function Fault Simulation Stop Simulation which includes a screen showing the Simulation status including the elapsed time in cycles The power and energy calculations continue to be based on the measured current and voltage inputs not the simulation values The fault simulation is aborted and normal protection is resumed if measured currents go above 0 1 per unit Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 11 3 11 2 5 2 Operate Relays Note that the Healthy Relay cannot be overwritten To test the Healthy Relay cycle power and the contacts should follow To test relays 1 6 lift the protective cover labeled Set and Test Press the Test button Enter the unit s password then scroll down to
196. f the memory has not been erased a message will appear instructing the user to erase before programming Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Now the user can push the Program button to start downloading the application code process A new screen will appear with instructions to Click Program to download the application code see Figure 12 12 81 5 Record File C 1Relays FP5000 flashloaderp2 app fpSkapp s19 Message Log Click Program to download the application code Figure 12 12 Flash Program Operation The FP 5000 will display Flash Loader Mode BlankCheck Pass A complete bar will appear at the bottom of the screen Pressing the Program button will begin downloading the new application code and begin to fill the complete bar from left to right indicating the status of the programming process see Figure 12 12 w Flash Program Operation E D x S Record File C 1Relays FP5000 flashloader p2 app fp5kapp s19 Message Log Click Program to download the application code Bl 1 30 Program Abort Figure 12 13 Flash Program Operation The FP 5000 will display Flash Loader Mode Program in progress If the user chooses to abort the programming he can do so at any time He must then push the close button which will activate the previous screen The user can then choose to erase which will then allow him to reprogram or exit the program Using
197. f values will be covered in Section 2 5 5 changed per the requirements of the user s application The current and voltage unbalanced alarms 46 2 and 47 2 are 2 5 4 Minimum Program Requirements enabled to assist the user in diagnosing any wiring problems Default settings are provided to minimize the number of manual For now we assume that the default settings will be adequate programming steps for typical applications For more complex except for the following list of functions which the user must applications cases the use of computer generated setting files program in order to handle the specific characteristics of your simplifies the setting process The user programs through the RS System Since only one protection setting Group is enabled we 232 front panel port by use of the PowerPort Windows based or need only program the one group of protection settings and the PowerNet Software program This subject is discussed in more values necessary to define the proper operating environment of the detail later in the manual FP 5000 Please refer to Table 2 1 Minimum List of Functions Which MUST be Programmed for those items 2 5 5 Functions Which Must be Programmed As stated earlier the FP 5000 comes pre configured with default or factory settings The phase and ground overcurrent functions are the only protection functions enabled and the current and voltage Table 2 1 Minimum List of Functions Which MUST be Programmed Default Display Set
198. forced in test mode to operate and can be opened under the reset mode and the associated circuitry evaluated WARNING OPERATING THE CONTROL RELAYS MANUALLY SHOULD ONLY BE DONE IF THE RESULT OF ENGAGING EACH CIRCUIT LOAD CAN BE DONE SAFELY Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 7 4 Voltage Checks The voltage inputs should be checked prior to closing the breaker The voltage inputs should be confirmed by looking at either the phasor voltage angles or looking at the voltage sequential compo nents to make sure that the phase rotation and polarity is being measured properly 7 5 Draw Out Checks The drawout design consists of an outer chassis which is mounted into the distribution gear or control panel and then wired into the system The operational electronic hardware is assembled into a separable inner chassis which may be inserted or withdrawn for quick replacement The inner chassis makes electrical contact with the wired outer chassis by means of engaging contacts in the back of the case The contacts providing the current transformer signals short upon withdrawal of the chassis make before break The remaining contacts remain or become open The outer chassis frame has provisions for a wire seal loop that must be cleared for extraction of the inner chassis Once this impediment is removed the top and bottom handles must be depressed simultaneously to release internal latches and pull out the inner chassis I
199. from a ground CT neutral CT or residual connection of the phase CTs for ground current measurement The user selects the shape the reset of the TOC curve and the direction setting The available settings and setting ranges are the same as the 51P PH TOC settings described above 51X IX TOC Setting This is the 51 device Time Overcurrent pickup and time multiplier settings based on the measured fourth CT input The user selects the pickup and the time multiplier of the TOC curve The available settings and setting ranges are the same as the 51P PH TOC Settings shown above The pickup settings are in per unit and are based on the connected CT ratio If a ground CT is used then the ratio may be different than the phase CT ratio If a residual ground current connection is used then the CT ratio is the same as the phase CT ratio 50X 1 IX IOC 1 and 50X 2 IX IOC 2 These are the two 50 device IX instantaneous overcurrent settings which are two independent elements The settings operate the same as the 50P 1 PH OC 1 and 50P 2 PH OC 2 Settings Page 5 44 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer 5 4 2 3 IR Residual OC Settings 51R IR TOC Curve This is the 51 device Residual Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Setting which is a residual ground overcurrent protection function This is a calculated ground current from the sum of the measured phase currents For a 3 phase 3 wire system this current i
200. g 1 for Ground 3 for Phase 101 5 D K t D K Notice that the reset time is independent of the magnitude of the current as long as the current magnitude is below pickup The reset function for the ANSI and IEC curves are given in the following equations defined in ANSI C37 112 The constant t is defined in Table 8 1 See Table 8 1 Time Multiplier Setting Measured Current Pickup Current Setting tre D Gr D Gs 1 lou pu The constants for the indicated curve equations are contained in Table 8 1 Treset Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 8 3 Table 8 1 Constants for Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves CALCULATED CURVES Curve Type P A B t ANSI IEEE Moderately Inverse 0 02 0 0515 0 114 4 85 Very Inverse 2 19 61 0 491 21 6 Extremely Inverse 2 28 2 0 1217 29 1 IEC IEC A 0 02 0 14 0 0 14 IEC B 1 18 5 0 13 5 IEC C 2 80 0 80 FP 5000 does not directly provide IEC D IEC E and IEC F curves In the latest IEC standard IEC D IEC E and IEC F are the same as ANSI Moderately Inverse Very Inverse and Extremely Inverse respectively 8 3 3 Curve Shapes The FP 5000 Protective Relay provides circuit breakers with an extensive degree of selective coordination potential and permits curve shaping over a wide range The available pickup settings which are inverse time overcurrent time multiplier setting
201. g Trigger Allows the datalogger to be triggered from external contact Demand Sync Synchronize the Power and Current demand window Sync Bypass Bypass sync check functions Sync Block Block sync check functions 5 4 6 Output Configuration Settings These settings are directly linked to the Configuration setting The I O Config setting in the System Config settings menu must be set to custom for the Output Config settings to be configured by the user otherwise the Output Config settings are set to the default settings as shown in Section 5 6 The output configuration settings consist of settings for five Form A output relays Output Trip1 Output Trip2 Output Rly3 Output Rly4 Output 5 one Form C Output Alarm relay the Auxiliary LED and three indicators Trip Alarm and Pickup Output relays Trip1 Trip2 Rly3 Rly4 and Rly5 are rated for tripping per ANSI C37 90 The Seven output logic gates control the seven outputs listed above Refer to Section 9 2 for more information about the output logic gates There is also another Form C Healthy output relay which is non configurable When the FP 5000 is energized the Rly Healthy energizes after its self test This is to provide a fail safe output contact meaning that the FP 5000 relay is functioning properly and is able to protect Each programmable output should be configured by the user for the desired application of the FP 5000 All of the settings
202. g is used to select a predetermined amount of time a sustained overload condition will be carried before the breaker trips For the Thermal Curves a setting is entered by determining the trip time needed at a X lom overcurrent for phase faults and l for ground faults This value is then divided by 5 For the ANSI and IEC curves this represents a pure multiplication of the curve as viewed in Section 8 3 2 A wide range of time settings are available for curve shape selection As Time Multiplier settings are varied the Time Multiplier portion of the overall curve is moved vertically up or down on the time current grid This movement is also independent of the other portions of the curve Figure 8 8 graphi cally illustrates the vertical time line movement with an Pt curve shape selection Similar movement occurs for the remaining curve shapes Time Multiplier is represented by the dotted portion of the curve CURRENT Figure 8 8 Typical Time Multiplier Adjustment Pt Response Timed Overcurrent Protection Two timed overcurrent functions are provided each for phase I l ly and I The pairs are 50 1 50P2 50X1 50X2 and 50R1 50R2 If desired they may be used for the traditional Instantaneous Overcurrent function and the Short Time Delay Overcurrent function Instantaneous is achieved by setting the time delay to zero In most cases the number 1 overcurrent function is set as the instantaneous and the numb
203. ge Number Ref 25 Sync Check Protection Sync Check menu 5 12 27A 1 Auxiliary Vx Undervoltage Protection Aux V menu 5 9 27A 2 Auxiliary Vx Undervoltage Protection Alarm menu 5 15 27 1 Main Undervoltage Protection Main V menu 5 8 32 1 Power Protection Protection Power Protection menu 5 10 32 2 32 3 Power Protection Protection Alarms menu 5 15 46 1 Current Unbalance Protection Unbalance menu 5 8 46 2 Current Unbalance Protection Alarm menu 5 13 47 1 Voltage Unbalance Protection Unbalance menu 5 8 47 2 Voltage Unbalance Protection Alarm menu 5 13 50BF Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure menu 5 11 50P 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 50P 1 50P 2 in Protection Phase Overcurrent menu 5 5 50P 2 with directional supervion 67 50P 3 in Protection Alarm menu 5 6 50P 3 5 13 50R 1 Residual Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 50R 1 50R 2 in Protection Phase Overcurrent menu 5 7 50R 2 with directional supervision 67 50R 3 50R 3 in Protection Alarm menu 5 13 50X 1 Measured Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 50X 1 50X 2 in Protection IX Measured Overcurrent menu 5 7 50R 2 with directional supervision 67 50R 3 50X 3 in Protection Alarm menu 5 13 51P Phase Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phase Overcurrent menu 5 5 with directional supervision 67 51R Residual Ground Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection IR Residual OC menu 5 7 with directional supervision 67 51V 51P2 Phase Inverse Ti
204. ger Select how to trigger waveform Disable Overwrite or Lock Disable dV dl capture on a V or disturbance OSC Trigger Select how to trigger waveform Disable Overwrite or Lock Overwrite Logic LG6 capture on a LG6 logic operation OSC Trigger Select how to trigger waveform Disable Overwrite or Lock Overwrite Cntrl PB capture on pushbutton operation OSC Trigger Select how to trigger waveform Disable Overwrite or Lock Overwrite Comm capture on communication command Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 19 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 20 Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 5 Contact Input Configuration Settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Contact input Contact Input 5 5 5 CFG Configuration Settings 9 1 1 Select Cin1 configuration user defined 52a 52b 52a Bkr Trouble Cin2 Select Cin2 configuration Remote Open 52b Remote Close Cin3 Select Cin3 configuration Remote Reset BFI Datalog Trigger Cin4 Select Cin4 configuration Demand Sync Bkr Trouble Sync Bypass Cin5 Select Cin5 configuration Sync Block Remote Select Set 1 Open Select Set 2 Cin6 Select Cin6 configuration Remote Close Cin7 Select Cin7 configuration Remote Reset Cin8 Select Cin8 configuration user defined
205. gize the trip coil source power Measure the voltage and ensure that it is within the FP 5000 trip relay nominal specifications De energize the control power and troubleshoot as necessary Verify the FP 5000 Relay Health Alarm Breaker Alarm and any other auxiliary FP 5000 relay control circuit in the same manner as the trip relay circuits Page 7 1 IL17569C Page 7 2 Effective Date 12 05 7 3 Check with FP 5000 Powered relay loads should remain disconnected Reconnect the FP 5000 power supply connection TB101 and energize the source The FP 5000 should initialize and display the default Metering Screen the operational LED should be blinking at 1 Hz Examine the Self Test flags by navigating to the status control mode and select Self Test Refer to Section 12 1 3 Self Test Failure Indication for detailed description and possible action e If previously programmed then the setpoints should be verified against a system drawing for this application Section 5 can aid in understanding the setpoint configuration Note that PowerNet or PowerPort PC software can be used to record setpoint files Confirm that correct active setting group is selected e f the setpoint status is not as desired then it can be initialized to the default by navigating to the status control mode gt Control Default Settings and then select load Default values CAUTION DO NOT ATTEMPT TO E
206. gs 5 4 2 8 Breaker Failure 5 4 2 9 Power Factor 5 4 2 10 Zone Interlocking 5 4 2 11 Sync Check 5 4 2 12 Alarms 5 4 3 System Alarm Settings 5 4 4 Logging Settings 5 4 5 Contact Input Configuration Settings 5 4 6 Output Configuration Settings 5 4 7 Programmable Logic Settings 5 4 8 Cold Load Pickup Settings 5 4 9 Clock Settings 5 4 10 Communications Settings 5 4 11 Change Password 5 5 Default Settings 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 Mounting 6 2 IQ Panel Cutout Retrofit Page TOC 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 Effective Date 12 05 Wiring General 6 3 1 CT Wiring TB4 6 3 2 VT Wiring TB2 6 3 3 Output Contact Wiring TB1 6 3 4 Supply Wiring TB1 6 3 5 Contact Input Wiring TB2 6 3 6 Terminal Identification Separated Draw out Case Views with Internal Callouts DrawoutAlarm Zone Interlocking Connections 7 STARTUP 8 Power Off Checks Initial Control Power On Checks Check with FP 5000 P owered Voltage Checks Draw Out Checks Trip Test with Built in Function Checks After Closing the Breaker APPLICATION AND SETTINGS 8 1 82 8 6 8 7 8 9 Overall Measuring Principles of the FP 5000 8 1 1 Analog Input Sample Processing 8 1 2 Frequency Measurement 8 1 3 Discrete Input Sampling CT Connection Options Overcurrent Functions Instantaneous and Time 8 3 1 Instantaneous 8 3 2 Inve
207. he Custom Programmable Logic settings back to the factory default settings Changing this setting will immediately ask you to confirm and save the settings and will exit you out of the setting mode Please note that all settings made prior to this point will be saved upon the confirmation to save the settings This update is necessary for the relay to know if Programmable Logic configuration is permitted and to give access to these settings This setting Enables or Disables the remote capability of downloading setpoints via the rear communication port using Cutler Hammer s Page 5 39 IL17569C Page 5 40 Prg w Bkr Remote Bkr Set Grps Page 5 40 FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 PowerNet software When enabled the user Set Ctrl can program and download settings to the relay through either the front RS 232 port or the rear communications port If disabled the settings can only be programmed into the unit via the front panel pushbuttons or the front RS 232 port This setting tells the relay if it can be programmed when the breaker is open only or if it can be programmed if the breaker is either opened or closed When set to Either the user is permitted to program the relay when its associated breaker is in the open or closed position If set to Open then the user may only program the relay when the breaker is in the open position This is for security to prevent the user from changing settings and perhaps t
208. he FlashLoader The FlashLoader starts up displaying the Com Port Configuration Frame Select the Comm Port the baud rate and the INCOM Commands which the FP 5000 is set see Figure 12 1 Figure 12 1 Flash Programmer Com Port Configuration The drop down box under the Command List in the INCOM Command box on the right of the screen provides the user with three choices Fast Status 300 Zero RAM 39C and Boot amp App Ver amp Rev 397 These are available from the PowerNet software and can only be exercised when the relay is in the normal operation mode Each option is defined below The Fast Status 300 command allows the user to test if the PC being used and the relay communicate If the baud rate the comport and the cable are communicating properly a message will appear in the text box stating correct and the breaker status open or closed If any baud rate comport or cable are wrong an error message will appear in the text box The Zero RAM 39C command is provided for user convenience This command will erase ALL data in the RAM This command should ONLY be used when upgrading the firmware Cutler Hammer recommends executing this command before and after the firmware has been updated Before you execute this command make sure to back up any necessary data in the relay This command will erase waveforms the datalogger the event log the trip log the history log metering etc The old settings stored in EEPROM will not be affected by
209. he metal chassis prior to Tip 1 Com VX2 Aux handling may reduce the risk of damage due to ESD 111 0 Vg Main Card Edge Connectors J Connector TB3 Current Connectors Figure 6 5 FP 5000 Rear Terminal Designations 6 4 Separated Draw out Case Views with Internal Callouts The FP 5000 assembly is shown in Figure 6 6 prior to installation The chassis is shown as it is when withdrawn from the case When withdrawn the make before break connectors within the case will provide a short across the current transformers CT inputs This provides protection for the CTs in the event that the chassis is Figure 6 7 Internal View of Case Connectors withdrawn while the current transformers are under power Figure 6 7 provides a view of the case with the chassis fully withdrawn from the FP 5000 assembly Several connectors can be seen in the rear of the enclosure These connectors interface with their mating connectors of the Chassis There are two card edge connectors TB1 and TB2 See Figure 6 4 FP 5000 Rear Connec tions TB1 connector is primarily used for the ac dc power input and also relay contacts for relay RLY1 through RLY7 TB2 is used for the contact inputs and the phase voltage inputs See Figure 6 5 Rear Terminal Designations Page 6 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer
210. he trip coil When the FP 5000 is powered up without these connections an alarm indication is present Proceed to the Active Alarm Status display to view the active alarms EzI 8 Status Control 2 6 Startup Startup consists of programming the necessary operational parameters verifying the operation of the FP 5000 checking the wiring and verifying the reasonable operation of the system components before attempting to place the equipment into continuous service The programming should already be done by the time the FP 5000 is wired into a system and about to be Started Up and placed into service Follow Section 7 for start procedures and refer to Section 6 3 for guidance in making connections during startup 2 6 1 Battery Installation Beneath the front panel communications cover is a receptacle for the lithium disc battery 3 V Duracell DL 2032 Insert the battery with the positive side up as shown on the communication cover The battery MUST be inserted with the power ON to eliminate any unnecessary wear on the battery It is possible for the battery to remain in operation until it expires if the battery is inserted while the power is off This will cause the battery to become useless when it is needed For this reason it is recommended to insert the battery while the FP 5000 s power is ON For additional information refer to Sections 4 5 and 11 4 Note If the battery is inserted with the FP 5000 s power off you may notic
211. he unit sits idle for 15 minutes without any pushbuttons activated the display goes into a Sleep Mode in which the screen goes blank During this time the unit is still in normal operating mode protecting and monitoring the system Every 5 minutes thereafter the message FP 5000 Feeder Relay Push Any Button To Activate Display appears on the display for 30 seconds This is a reminder of how to reenergize the display to the Default Display screen When in this mode the pushbuttons will only activate the display not the function of the pushbutton The pushbutton must be pushed again once the unit shows the Default Display screen to do its pushbutton function 4 2 3 Self Check Failure Upon initialization the FP 5000 performs a series of hardware and Software checks to ensure proper operation of the protective relay unit These checks cover issues such as programming memory and calibration of the unit If a failure is detected then the FP 5000 operational LED will be out and the FP 5000 will display a warning or failure message Table 12 1 Self Test Displays and Status Flag covers this topic 4 2 4 FP 5000 Other Warning or Transient Messages The FP 5000 has certain modes of operation and actions that may result in warning or error message Table 4 1 and Table 12 2 list messages that may be encountered while programming For example if you try to close the breaker that is already closed the FP 5000 will display Error Breaker C
212. hreshold Disable Delay 0 e Page 4 16 27M 2 Under V Alarm 59A 2 Over V Alarm 27A 2 Under V Alarm 59N 2 OV Definition 59N 2 OV Alarm 810 2 Over Freq Alm 81U 2 Under Freq Al 32 3 Pwr Definition 32 3 Power Alarm di E N I 59A 2 Over V Alarm Threshold Delay c 0 Disable ____ 59N 2 OV Definition Source Calc Criterion Phasor M 810 2 Over Freq Alm Threshold Disable Delay 0 u y c f mm X 32 3 Pwr Definition Direction Reverse Criterion Over For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 17 4 6 2 2 System Alarm System Alarm Display Watt Power Alarm 4 Units kW Threshold Disable fi N Delay m 0 gt VAR Power Alarm Units kvar VA Power Alarm X 2 System Alarms Threshold Disable Delay m 0 Units kVA 1 E aa com V J Threshold Disabl ower Alarm L VA Power Alarm Watt Demand Alarm Delay m 0 Watt D d Al Units kW att Demand Alarm Threshold Disable VAR Demand Alarm VAR Demand Alarm Delay m 0 Units kvar VA Demand Alarm Threshold Disable Wy cet ase ce Delay m 0 Current D
213. ickup occurs when the measured voltage exceeds the OV Threshold setting The overvoltage trip flag is set when the voltage exceeds the threshold setting for the delay time specified The overvoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage drops below 98 of the OV Threshold setting An undervoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage drops below the UV Threshold setting The undervoltage trip is set when the voltage stays below the threshold setting for the delay time specified The undervoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage raises above 10296 of the UV Threshold setting The Main OV and UV Pickup and Delay settings apply to all three phase voltages V V and V 27M and 59M pickups and trips are controlled by their phase setting Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit Parameter Range Step 59 M1 Main Any One Any Two Overvoltage Phase All Three 59 M1 Main 10 to 150 V 1V Overvoltage Threshold Disabled 59 M1 Main 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Overvoltage Delay 59 M2 Main Any One Any Two Overvoltage Phase All Three 59 M2 Main 10 to 150 V 1V Overvoltage Threshold Disabled 59 2 Main 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Overvoltage Delay 27 M1 Main Any One Any Two Undervoltage Phase All Three 27 M1 Main Under 10 to 150 V 1V voltage Threshold Disabled 27 M1 Main 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Undervoltage Delay 27 M2 Main Under Any One Any Two voltage Phase All Three 27 M2 Main Unde
214. imum and Maximum System Voltages If System Voltage VT Connect is set to a Delta Configuration The default display screen will display the 3 phase voltages as line line L L voltages only All other parameters will only be displayed L L values In addition to the default display screen and the display sleep mode there are eight display modes for the FP 5000 each associated with a pushbutton on the front panel The modes are Monitor View Settings Log Status Control Set Test Reset and Close Open Breaker The Set and Test mode entry are restricted via a latched cover and password The other modes are freely accessed and cannot change or cause operation of the relay 4 6 4 Monitor The Monitor Mode is entered by pushing the Monitor pushbutton which allows the user to view metered quantities See Display 4 3 Note Monitor the possible selections are only viewable three lines at a time The red LED in the upper left hand portion of the pushbutton area will illuminate while the user is in the Monitor Mode Display 4 3 Monitor Mode Select one of the menu selections Metering Main using the Up Down or PgUp PgDown pushbuttons and press the Enter Load pushbutton This will enter you into the Fundamental Phasors metering sub menus to view any of the Energy monitor displays of interest using the Up Down PgUp or PgDown Demand pushbuttons Each box in the table Minimum shows one of the screens
215. in at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs V THD Alarm Threshold Sets the voltage THD magnitude threshold level at or above which the voltage THD pickup event occurs After pickup if the voltage THD magnitude falls below the specified threshold a voltage THD dropout event occurs Delay s Sets the number of seconds that the voltage THD magnitude must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs Breaker Alarm of Operations FP 5000 counts the number of breaker operations A breaker operation is counted when the breaker is opened after being closed for 3 cycles based on the state of the 52a and or 52b contact inputs This setting is used to For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 49 IL17569C Page 5 50 Isum INTR Amp FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 provide a breaker alarm indication if the breaker is operated more than the specified settings This counter is intended to be used for scheduling breaker maintenance after a number of operations In addition to counting the breaker operations the FP 5000 records the interrupted current per phase and accumulates the total current interrupted on a per phase basis If any of the accumulated interrupted phase currents exceeds this setpoint then an alarm and indication will occur This accumulator is intended to be used for scheduling breaker maintenance after the accumulated interrupted current e
216. ing defines a minimum operating voltage magnitude of either V1 or V2 for the 47 function to operate which ensures that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a voltage unbalance trip This is a supervisory function and not a trip level The V2 V1 setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence voltage to positive sequence voltage Unbalance V2 V1 or V2 V1 for ABC rotation and V1 V2 for ACB rotation The FP 5000 will automati cally select the correct ratio based on the Phase Sequence setting in the System Configuration group described above The time delay is a definite time delay adjustable from 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps This function requires positive or negative sequence voltage magnitude above the threshold setting and the percentage voltage unbalance above the V2 V1 setting before allowing a voltage unbalance trip Therefore both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates a trip for voltage unbalance The voltage unbalance pickup and trip functions are reset when the positive and negative sequence voltages V1 and V2 drop below the Threshold setting or V2 V1 drops below the V2 V1 setting minus 1 Effective Date 12 05 E TN Cutler Hammer 46 1 Current Unbal This is the 46 device Current Unbalance setting which works similar to the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting The positive
217. ing frequency Double Click To quickly press and release the mouse button twice on a PC Drag To press and hold down the mouse button while you move the mouse on a PC FSK Frequency Shift Keying is encoding typically used by a MODEM HMI Human Machine Interface is also called MMI or Man Machine Interface la Ib Ic Phase currents for phases a b and c respectively Icon A picture on a computer screen representing an application IMPACC Standard Cutler Hammer Integrated Monitoring Protection And Control Communications protocol definition for communication on the INCOM network Inom Nominal Current for context rating of the FP 5000 1 ampere or 5 ampere INCOM Cutler Hammer INdustrial COMmunications network Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 1 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 13 2 Effective Date 12 05 IP Address A 32 bit number containing both a subnet address and a host address that identify a device in a network IR Residual ground current calculated for the three phases la Ib Ic is a calculated value not measured directly It will be different on a 4 wire system IOC Instantaneous Over Current protective function The IOC functions have an optional time delay for coordination with other relays IX Current measured by a fourth system current transformer This could be a physical ground measurement from a re
218. instantaneous functions as previously described Therefore the ground fault curve movement is not graphically illustrated When programming ground fault protection keep in mind that if Disable is selected the ground fault protection is disabled Direction Control Overcurrent protection elements time inverse or instantaneous or time delay etc can trip ina specified fault current direction Whe the trip direction is set to Both the direction control takes no effect When it is set to Forward a trip is only permitted in the Forward direction where fault current lies within 909 around the maximum torque angle line When it is set to Reverse a trip is only permitted in Reverse direction where fault current lies within 90 around the opposite of the maximum torque angle line See Figures 5 1 5 3 amp 5 4 for detailed information 8 3 4 Negative Sequence Current Protection 46 The FP 5000 provides monitoring and protection based on the percent of current unbalance or negative sequence The presence of negative sequence current identifies either a phase unbalance in the voltage magnitude or reverse phase rotation condition The positive and negative sequence currents are calculated from the three phase currents The 96 unbalance is the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current Unbalance I I A current unbalance pickup occurs when l I exceeds the IUB Unbalance setting and or magnitude exceeds
219. ional Units Sync Control OGx Input Settings OGx Input State Sync Check Control Output Gate Input Settings Output Gate Output Setting Trip Test Status Trip Test Status RMS Values RMS Values of Voltages Currents V amp l Phasors Voltage amp Current Phasors For more information visit www eatonelectrical com 4 6 3 2 Event Log The Event Log provides a time stamped list of the most recent 100 events Select Event Log in the Log menu to view these events The logged events include pickup and dropout of protective or control functions trip change of state for contact input and outputs and setting changes The data logged for each event includes the event number event I D a time stamp and an optional 2 byte parameter The user may disable logging of any event category except a trip or a self test warning By using the Up Down pushbuttons the user can Select any event and retrieve its information Refer to section 12 2 1 for more information on the Event Log Page 4 21 IL17569C Page 4 22 Example Event Log Display Event Log 1 General mm dd yy 2 Output mm dd yy 3 Breaker mm dd yy 4 Breaker mm dd yy Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 gt Event mm dd yy Time 00 00 00 000 Cause XXXX Value XXXX E T N Cutler Hammer 5 General mm dd yy 6 M 4 6 3 3 History Log Event Status The History Log provides the Total History Log and the Breaker Histor
220. ipping point for a family of relays like the FP 5000 Note Pickup and Tripping will occur within 0 5 of any selected trip point Pickup Accuracy Trip Point Timing Accuracy CURRENT I l1 nom Typical Thermal Curve Figure 8 5 Sample Electronic Trip Curves Adjustability The adjustability of the relay permits movement of its characteristic curve or parts of the curve This movement can be done in both a horizontal and vertical direction on the time current grid The actual shape of the curve can be changed along with the curve movement This adjustability permits distinct curves to be established to match the electrical protection to the application Figure 8 6 through Figure 8 11 Horizontal movement of the ANSI and IEC curve shapes is controlled by changing the pickup setting Changing the pickup setting of the thermal curves moves the point at which the relay starts to time out along the curve shape Page 8 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Trip Point CURRENT 1 1 Typical ANSI and IEC Curves Minimum Pickup Setting Inom MULTIPLES OF Inom Figure 8 6 Typical Inverse Time Overcurrent Pickup Horizontal Movement Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Nominal Current The nominal primary current lem as measured by the FP 5000 is established by the ratio of the selected current transformers This ratio must by set via the prog
221. irection determination When a phase current is lower than the minimum current limit a reverse direction may be assumed The memory voltage will be used no longer than 200 milliseconds see figure 5 2 MTA Maximum Torque Angle 1 1 lt Figure 5 3 Negative Zero Sequence Voltage Polarized Ground Directional Characteristic Page 5 42 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer MTA Maximum Torque Angle Reverse For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Figure 5 4 Current Polarized Ground Direc tional Characteristic 5 4 2 Protection Settings The Protection Settings include all of the FP 5000 protective device settings 27 46 47 50 50BF 51 55A 55D 59 81 zone interlock ing power and protection alarm settings The setting descriptions below will follow the order of the setting table The FP 5000 may store four complete sets of Protection settings Table 5 1 lists only settings for 1 setting group Multiple copies of the Protection section from the table may be needed for a complete record To navigate to the individual protection settings you must select Protection from the Setting Main menu If multiple setting groups have been selected then you must select which protection setting group you wish to set You must now select the protection elements that you want to set and enter down to the set point page To change an individual set point you must select
222. is process takes approximately 20 seconds to several minutes to complete depending on the size of the program When completed a message will appear on the screen Erased properly Click Program to download the application code see Figure 12 11 Page 12 18 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer w FP5000 Flash Programmer File Communication Flash Loader Warning Save all log data files Firmware changes may compromise data Clear Command Log Message Log The relay is in the flash load mode the following actions may be taken Click Erase to erase the application code Or click Program to download the application code if the code has already been erased Dr click Exit Flash Loader Mode to return the normal mode Sector Erase Erasing is in progress I Operations Enter Flash Load Made Erase Program Exit Flash Loader Mode Figure 12 10 Flash Programmer Figure 12 11 Flash Programmer The FP 5000 will display Flash Loader Mode App code erased If a user chooses not to erase the FP 5000 and proceed with the program downloading the FP 5000 will not allow the new program to be entered unless the memory has been erased Screen messages will appear instructing the user how to proceed If the user selects Exit Flash Loader the program is aborted If the user selects Program the unit will begin to program if its memory has been erased I
223. it values X lhom 0 1 to 20 04 or Disable 1 00 0 01 increments Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Direction 50X 2 IX IOC2 Pickup Select direction Forward Reverse Both m TL 0 1 to 20 0 or Disable EMEN 0 01 increments Fourth CT Overcurrent Element 2 Setting Select current pickup value in per unit values X lhom Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Direction Select direction Forward Reverse Both 5 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 7 IR Residual OC Calculated residual time overcurrent 51R and instantaneous 50R 1 amp 50R 2 device settings Ho Value Selection Setting BN Sec 51RIR TOC Curve Residual CT Time Overcurrent cc RR RR Shape Select curve characteristic shape IT 2 I4T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB IECC bas pausa for 51RIR TOC Residual CT Time Overcurrent 5 2 Seiting Pickup and Time Multiplier Settings waww unit values 0 01 increments Time Mult Select Time Multiplier 0 05 to 10 0 1 00 eme ff 50R 1 IR IOC 1 Residual CT Overcurrent Element 5 2 Wd WEN Pickup ide pu he value in per 1 to 20 Opu or m Delay Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles ee E E __ 50R 2 IR IOC 2 Residual
224. itself off once all the events are cleared However if the FP 5000 Active Alarm setting is Latched the Alarm LED will remain on even after all the events has been cleared externally or through the unit To clear the Latched Alarm after an event has been cleared press the Reset button Scroll to Alarm and press the Enter pushbutton two times Once these steps are followed the Alarm LED will turn off To prevent the Alarm LED from appearing after the event has been cleared the FP 5000 Active Alarm setting must be set to Unlatched To do this simply press Set enter the password scroll to Output Page 12 10 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Config and press Enter Scroll to Alarm Indicator press Enter scroll to Dropout and select Unlatched press Enter The following tables 12 12 and 12 13 show the types of events that can appear on the Active Alarm screen and the steps needed to clear that specific event for the default trips and alarms set within the Alarm Relay Output If you require additional information contact the Quality Technical Support team at 1 800 809 2772 option 4 option 4 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Table 12 12 Clear Active Alarm Event Operate Cause Conditions must be cleared O DI externally away from the _ y FP 5000 unit Bkr Operations Press the Reset pushbutton on the FP 5000 Scroll to the History Log and press Enter Scroll to Bkr History an
225. l Input m Power Supply RLY Healthy Com RLY Healthy NO RLY Healthy N C Alarm Com Alarm N O Alarm N C C In Source 1 205 C Reserved 5 o N 8 Reserved VA Main VB Main VC Main VX1 Aux FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT Effective Date 12 05 WYE GROUND PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF DELTA OR OPEN DELTA CONNECTION Figure 2 5 FP 5000 Simple Open Delta Application with Sync Check Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Page 2 5 Page 2 5 IL17569C Page 2 6 Effective Date 12 05 2 5 Introduction to Programming The FP 5000 can be programmed using an HMI with PowerPort software through the RS 232 serial port or remotely via the rear INCOM PN using PowerNet In addition the FP 5000 may be programmed directly from the front panel We will focus on direct programming from the front panel in this Quick Start Section Programming is restricted to authorized users through
226. lat Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 1 3 IL17569C Page 1 4 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 Features List Protection Features Phase overcurrent A 2 stage instantaneous with timers 50P 1 amp 50P 2 B Inverse time overcurrent 51P C Voltage restraint inverse time overcurrent 51P2 D 10 standard curves E Reset 1 Instantaneous 2 Time Delay 3 Calculated Independent measured ground or neutral overcurrent element A 2 stage instantaneous with timers 50 1 amp 50X 2 B Inverse time overcurrent 51X C 10 standard amp 3 user defined custom curves D Reset 1 Instantaneous 2 Time Delay 3 Calculated Independent calculated ground or neutral overcurrent element A 2 stage instantaneous with timers 50R 1 amp 50R 2 B Inverse time overcurrent 51R C 10 standard curves D Reset 1 Instantaneous 2 Time Delay 3 Calculated Breaker failure 50BF Phase current unbalance and sequence protection 46 Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection 47 Main 3 phase under overvoltage 27M1 59M1 Power Protection 32 Under over frequency 810 810 Auxiliary single phase under overvoltage 27A1 59A1 Neutral voltage 59 1 Power factor 55 Zone interlocking for bus protection 87B Additional elements for alarming on A Instantaneous overcurrent 50P 3 50X 3 50R 3 B Under overvoltage 27M 2 59M 2 27A 2 59A 2 C Power 32 D Under ov
227. lay healthy will remain in their current state The relay healthy output will be de energized as described in Section 12 1 1 Protec tion is disabled so that a false trip operation will not occur If it is desired to trip the breaker upon FP 5000 failure then the relay healthy alarm should be connected to the breaker trip coil in parallel with the trip output contact Table 12 1 under the Protection column shows what diagnostic test failures will cause protection to be disabled Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 1 12 1 3 Technical Assistance For additional information technical assistance or referral to a local authorized distributor contact Power Quality Technical Support at 1 800 809 2772 option 4 option 4 outside the United States please call 1 414 449 7100 option 1 option 1 You can also e mail us at pmpapps eaton com or visit us on the web www eatonelectrical com and follow the power management products link This instruction booklet is published solely for informational purposes and should not be considered all inclusive If further information is required you should consult Eaton Cutler Hammer Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton Cutler Hammer selling policies or other contractual agreements between the parties This literature is not intended to and
228. lay menus The single arrow pushbuttons Up and Down are used to scroll up and down the menu structure display selections one line at a time They are also used to increment or decrement setting values one step at a time The double arrow pushbutton Page Up and Page Down scroll up and down the menu structure in page increments rather than in single line increments They also increment or decrement setting values 10 times as fast as the Up and Down pushbuttons 7 Enter Pushbutton The Enter pushbutton allows the user to view the display menus which are chosen by the up down arrows It also is used in the programming mode to change setting values and save the settings Once a setting is chosen by the up down arrows the Enter pushbutton is used to enter that setting If the Enter pushbutton is not pushed when changing a setting that setting will not be changed 4 4 RS 232 Communications Port Front Panel Communication The FP 5000 communications port located on the bottom right of the front panel is a straight through DB9 RS 232 communications port It s used to view the status of the FP 5000 and to download setpoints via Cutler Hammer s Power Port Communications software and a personal computer It is also used for upgrading firmware using the Flashloader program PowerPort software can be obtained from the Cutler Hammer Internet site www ch cutler hammer com The F
229. le difference allowed 1 to 60 degrees 20 Max Slip Diff Maximum slip difference allowed 1 to 2 00 Hz 0 20 PER SEEN IEEE C C LUE p eee Line Phase Line voltage phase for Synch A B C AB BC CA A MN NN RR ee e Synch Block Select to block Synch check function Disable enable Disable 5 12 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E TN Cutler Hammer Alarms Selects Alarms settings for all protection functions 50P 3 50 3 50R 3 46 2 59 M2 27M 2 59A 2 274 2 81O 2 and 81U 2 50P 3 Alarm Pickup FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 Phase Overcurrent Alarm Setting Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Select current pickup value in per unit values X l 0 1 to 20 0 disable 0 01 increments LI Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Direction Select direction Forward Reverse Both WEE 50X 3 IX IOC Alarm Pickup Fourth CT Overcurrent Alarm Setting Alarm Setting 5 2 Select current pickup value in per 0 1 to 20 0 disable MEE unit values X l 0 01 increments Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Direction 50R 3 IRIOC Alarm Pickup Select direction Forward Reverse
230. lectrical open circuit FRONT PANEL OPEN BREAKER gt BKR STATE CLOSED gt Ul RESET ALARM gt In the case of Trip Coil Supervision a trickle current is sensed across the Trip 1 relay output contacts whenever the breaker state is closed and the Trip 1 relay is open Since the state of the breaker must be known this function is operational only if at least one contact input is configured as 52a or 52b In addition the Trip 1 relay Monitor setting must be set to On By default if this alarm should occur the alarm contact output relay will close WARNING IF THE TRIP 1 MONITOR ALARM IS ACTIVE THIS IS AN INDICATION THAT THE TRIP CIRCUIT MIGHT NOT BE ABLE TO OPEN THE BREAKER IF A FAULT SHOULD OCCUR IMMEDIATE INVESTIGATION OF THE CIRCUIT SHOULD BE PERFORMED In the case of Close Coil Supervision a trickle current is sensed across the Trip 2 relay output contacts whenever the breaker state is open and the Trip 2 relay is open Since the state of the breaker must be known this function is operational only if at least one contact input is configured as 52a or 52b In addition the Trip 2 relay Monitor setting must be set to On By default if this alarm should occur the alarm contact output relay will close If the Trip 2 Monitor Alarm is active this is an indication that the close breaker circuit might not be able to close the breaker if so desired 8 9 5 Breaker Failure 50BF gt BKR STATE TIME ALM
231. logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable 9 6 to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 27 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 28 Effective Date 12 05 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All 1 In Logic input See Logic Input Options Unused motes Delay Unit Select if the delay is based on Cycle Second Cycle On Delay Select timer gate on delay 0 to 9999 cycles second Off Delay c Select timer gate off delay 0 to 9999 cycles second CO U TT Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All 1 Timer Gate to apply In Logic input See Logic Input Options Unused it Selectifthe delayis based on Cycle Second Cycle On Delay c Selecttimer gate on delay 0
232. losed Page 4 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 3 Table 4 1 Transient Display Messages Display Message Display Mode Cause Functions Programmed to default They can be viewed only See System Config Flashing a few seconds in the setting edit mode When entering PLC Cin and Cout in the setting edit mode if they are disabled Fault Test is Off 5 seconds in Test mode When stopping fault simulation if the test was complete Zone Interlock Output is On 5 seconds in Test mode When turning the Zone Interlock output on if it is on Zone Interlock Output Is Off 5 seconds in Test mode When turning the Zone Interlock output off if it is off 4 3 Pushbuttons The front operations panel supports 15 membrane switch pushbuttons Pressing any of the pushbuttons will initiate many of the FP 5000 functions and actions This section gives a complete description of each pushbutton and its functions The pushbuttons can be grouped logically into the 6 display modes reset and breaker control 1 Reset 5 Status Control 2 Monitor 6 Set Settings 3 View Setting 7 Test 4 Log 8 Close Open Breaker The center section consists of display navigation buttons 1 Previous 2 Up Down single arrow 3 Up Down double arrow 4 Enter Reset Pushbutton
233. ltage Source and series load across the trip relay contacts TB117 and 118 or TB115 and 116 see Figure 11 1 The fuse and load should limit current to stay within the relay rating in case the relay contacts are engaged A 120 Vac indicator lamp can serve this purpose With the trip relay open apply the 120 V source to trip relay 1 The Trip 1 monitor display should indicate the on status Remove the source or close the relay and the status should indicate off Repeat this procedure for the Trip 2 relay Breaker Monitor Circuit Input Impedance 44k ohms or 108k ohms for 250V Power Relay Suppl Contacts Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 11 2 4 Self Test Status The FP 5000 Feeder Protection Relay performs a self test of the microprocessor and supporting hardware such as memory and analog circuitry To view the results select the Status Control menu then Status Self Test Status See the troubleshooting Section 12 1 3 Self Test Status Indication for a detailed description of each function 11 2 5 Test Menu Tests performed under the test menu allow the user to perform fault simulations and control the state of relays 1 6 To access the test menu functions lift the protective cover labeled Set and Test press the Test button and enter the unit s password 11 2 5 1 Fault Simulation The FP 5000 has a self test function which allows voltages and currents both rms and pha
234. ltage 5 45 8 9 8 10 Testing Protection 11 2 Trip 5 45 P Panel Communication 4 4 Display 4 2 Front 4 1 Parameters 3 3 Parts 1 5 Password 2 6 change 5 55 PH CT Ration 5 39 Phase IT Curve 13 16 Phase Direction 5 41 Minimum Voltage 5 41 Phase l t Curve 13 15 Phase l t Curve 13 14 Phase Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve 5 42 Phase Inverse Time OvercurrentPickup 5 43 Phase It Curve 13 16 Phase Overcurrent 4 11 Settings 5 42 Table 5 5 5 6 Phase Seq 5 39 Phase Trip LED 4 23 Pickup Event Table 12 5 12 6 Phase Inverse Time Overcurrent 5 43 Pickup Indicator 5 52 Pickup LED 4 23 Ports 10 1 PowerAlarm Var 5 48 Watt 5 48 Power Demand 4 8 5 50 Power Distribution 4 8 Power Factor 5 46 Page 14 3 IL17569C Page 14 4 Effective Date 12 05 Display 4 15 Lagging 4 7 Min Max 4 1 Table 5 11 Power Pager 10 4 Power Protection 4 14 Settings 5 45 Table 5 10 Power Quadrants 4 7 Power Supply 6 4 PowerNet 10 3 PowerP ort 10 2 Prim Units 5 39 Program with Breaker 5 40 Programmable Logic 5 39 9 1 9 7 Display 4 20 Elements 9 4 Settings 5 52 Table 5 26 5 34 Programming 2 6 2 9 Functions 2 1 2 8 Protected Circuit 12 4 Protection 8 9 Alarms 4 16 Settings 5 48 and Voltage Functions 8 9 Aux V 4 13 Breaker Failure 4 14 Default Table 5 5 Display 4 1 Displays 4 11 4 16 Frequency 4 14 8 10 Ground Fault 8 6 Instantaneous 8 6 Inverse Time Overcurrent 8 IR Residual OC 4 12 IX Measured OC 4 12
235. ly If a connection is made through the RS 232 connector on the front panel Cutler Hammer s PowerPort software can be used for configuration as well as RS 232 communications verification Make certain that the baud rate of the computer running PowerPort has the baud rate set to the baud rate setting of the FP 5000 RS 232 port You may select a baud rate of 9600 19200 or 38400 See Section 10 for more details The INCOM Accessory Bus port TB3 J2 is a future interface that is not currently operational 11 2 3 Bench Testing Bench testing may be done prior to installation to test for coordina tion and many other features provided by the FP 5000 Current injection can be performed using commercially available power test sets such as Omicron AVO or Doble These sources provide accurate current and voltage signals and can be used to simulate actual load conditions Note that these are typically three phase sources and so the Auxiliary 4th Current Transformer 4 X1 and X2 will have to be accommodated by running in series with another phase or looked at separately from the main three phases The same holds for the auxiliary voltage taps VX1 Aux and VX2 Aux The examples that follow will focus on phase testing but can be applied to the auxiliary circuits as well Page 11 1 IL17569B Page 11 2 Effective Date 12 05 11 2 3 1 Verifying Current and Voltage Inputs Using a current source provides a three phase input current to
236. me Overcurrent Inverse SD Pickup CURRENT Figure 8 7 Typical Curve with I t Shape Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Inverse time overcurrent protection consists of a curve shape pickup setting and an inverse time multiplier setting The inverse time overcurrent function offers 10 possible curve shape types as previously described Figure 8 4 and Table 8 1 When programming the FP 5000 this will be the first choice to make The curve shape and its effect on the characteristic curve will be covered with the time multiplier explanations The pickup setting establishes the current level pickup at which the relay s inverse time overcurrent tripping function begins timing If after a predetermined amount of time the current condition that started the timing process still exists the inverse time overcurrent function operates and the relay s trip relay is energized Pickup settings can be adjusted from 0 10 to 4 00 times Inm Figure 8 6 graphically illustrates how the beginning of the Thermal Inverse Time Overcurrent Pickup portion of the overall curve can be moved horizontally on the time current grid by means of the pickup settings The Inverse Time Overcurrent Pickup is represented by the dotted lines while the rest of the curve is represented by a solid line Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit FP 5000 www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 8 5 The Time Multiplier settin
237. me Overcurrent Voltage Restraint in ProtectionPhase Overcurrent menu 5 5 with directional supervision 67 amp voltage for 51P2 Restrained Overcurrent 51X Phase INverse Time Overcurent Protection IX Measured OC menu 5 6 with directional supervision 67 55A Apparent Power Factor Protection Power Factor menu 5 11 55D Displacement Power Factor Protection Power Factor menu 5 11 59A 1 Auxiliary Vx Overvoltage Protection Aux V menu 5 9 59A 2 Auxiliary Vx Overvoltage Protection Alarm menu 5 14 59M 1 Main Overvoltage Protection Main V menu 5 8 59M 2 Main Overvoltage Protection Alarm menu 5 14 59N 1 Neutral Overvoltage Protection Neutral V menu 5 9 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 1 7 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 1 8 Effective Date 12 05 1 9 Function Matrix Con t Device Protective Function Configure in Page Number Ref 59N 2 Neutral Overvoltage Protection Alarm menu 5 14 67 Phase Directional Supervision of Directional setpoints in System Configuration menu 5 4 50P 1 50P 2 50P 3 51P 51P2 Configure 50P amp 51P functions in Protection OC menu 5 6 67G Ground Direction Supervision of Directional setpoints in System Configuration menu 5 4 67pol 50R 1 2 3 amp 50X 1 2 3 51X 51R 50 amp 51X amp R functions in Protection OC menu 5 6 67Q 67V 5 7 810 1 Over Frequency Protection Frequency m
238. me in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles a 32 3 Power Power Protection Settings 3 LT Direction Select the direction of the power Forward reverse both Criterion Select if the threshold is based Over Under Over over or under power 32 3 Power Power Alarm Settings Alarm Threshold Select the magnitude of the power 2 to 4 Op or disable required of 1 Delay c Select the delay time in cycles 0 to 65535 cycles 1 cycle increments 810 2 UF Alarm Underfrequency Alarm Settings 52 Select threshold based on power 45 to 65 Hz disable System frequency 0 01 increments Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments Select threshold based on power 45 to 65 Hz disable System frequency 0 01 increments Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1 cycle increments 1pu xCT secondary rating x VT secondary rating for the square root of 3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating for delta Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 15 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 16 Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 3 System Alarms Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Watt Power System Watt Power Alarm Setting 5 5 3 Alarm Units Select units for watt power kW or MW kW Threshold Selec
239. munication interface When a relay is energized using the Relay Test function it will remain energized until it is de energized through the Reset menu Test menu or Remote Reset 9 2 2 Disarm Trip The FP 5000 relay can be disarmed to prevent operation of the Trip 1 and Trip 2 output relays during testing When the Disarm Control System Configuration setting is Enabled activated by the Set pushbutton the user can Disarm tripping using the Test menu Arm Disarm Trip function activated by the Test pushbutton The Relay Healthy Alarm is de energized when tripping is disarmed 9 3 Programmable Logic Elements The FP 5000 provides programmable logic for programming custom functions The Programmable Logic functions include 12 blocking gates for the overcurrent protective functions six logic gates six timer gates two latches and seven output gates The basic logic element for the blocking gates logic gates and output gates is a 4 input logic gate that can be configured as Disabled or as an AND OR NAND or NOR function Each logic gate accepts up to four inputs which can be entered directly or negated The following table shows the output of each function for any combination of inputs Table 9 3 Logic Functions Outputs OR AND 0 Page 9 4 FP 5000
240. n 6 1 for mounting details For IQ cutout retrofit see Section 6 2 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 2 1 Em R 25 R6 4 MAX TYP OPTIONAL 3 43 87 0 5 22 5 44 132 7 138 1 A Q Pe 6 0 DIA gt 4 PLACES Figure 2 1 FP 5000 Standard Panel Cutout 2 4 Wiring 2 4 1 Powering the 5000 Power Supply control power is brought in on TB 101 102 Nominal input range is either 100 120 Vac 100 240 Vac 48 125 100 250 Terminal 101 is positive dc or Hot on ac with 102 being the common dc return or the ac neutral With control power applied the FP 5000 may be programmed and minimal functionality may be verified 2 4 2 Typical Application Wiring A CAUTION WIRING PROCEDURES MUST BE PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE FP 5000 AND ITS ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENSURE THAT INCOMING POWER SOURCES ARE TURNED OFF AND LOCKED OUT PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY ELECTRICAL WORK FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Wiring installation for the FP 5000 must follow a suitable Wiring Plan Drawing and conform to applicable Federal State and Local codes Refer to Figure 6 5 for the rear terminal designations Direct wires to the terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 must not be larger than AWG No 14 without spade lugs and no
241. n the pickup condition exists for the delay time specified The voltage unbalance pickup and trip is reset when the positive sequence voltage drops below the VUB Threshold setting or V V drops below the VUB Unbalance setting minus 1 The settings associated with voltage unbalance or negative sequence voltage protection are listed in Table 8 3 below Table 8 3 Negative Sequence Voltage Protection FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 8 9 The settings for the voltage protection functions are shown in Table 8 4 Table 8 4 Voltage Protection Settings Parameter Range Step 47 1 VUB 1 to 100 V 1V Threshold Disabled 47 1 296 to 4096 196 Unbalance 47 1 VUB 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Delay 47 2 VUB 1 to 100 V 1V Threshold Disabled 47 2 296 to 40 196 Unbalance 47 2 VUB 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Delay 8 6 2 Undervoltage 27 and Overvoltage 59 Protection Separate undervoltage and overvoltage protective elements are provided for the main voltage inputs V Va V and the auxiliary voltage input V Two elements are provided for each function so alarm and trip levels can be set independently Each of the voltage protection functions has a Threshold a Delay setting and the main voltage elements have an additional setting phase The optional time delay is provided for coordination with other devices An overvoltage p
242. n the trip occurred 9 Trip Statu Trip Status shows if the FP 5000 has fully processed the trip data 10 TOCTime ms The Time Over Current trip time that is the time from the TOC pickup to the trip in milliseconds 11 Input Status A group of status flags detailing the state of the discrete inputs at the time of the trip 12 Output Status A group of status flags detailing the state of the discrete outputs at the time of the trip 13 IOC Pickup Status A group of status flags detailing the state of all the Instantaneous Over Current protective function pickups at the time of the trip 14 V PH Pickup Status A group of status flags detailing the state of all the phase voltage protective function pickups at the time of the trip 15 Volt Pickup Status A group of status flags detailing the state of all the voltage protective function pickups at the time of the trip 16 TOC Pickup Status A group of status flags detailing the state of all the Time Over Current protective function pickups at the time of the trip 17 Misc Pickup Status A group of status flags detailing miscellaneous protective function pickups at the time of the trip 18 OC Trip Status A group of status flags detailing Over Current protective function operations at the time of the trip 19 Misc Trip Status A group of status flags detailing miscellaneous protective function operations at the time of the trip 20 Volt Trip Status A group of status flags detailing voltage protecti
243. n to rowed mode For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Figure 12 15 Flash Programmer If there is a message displayed on the FP 5000 that App checksum fail Enter FL Load Mode to erase or program the user will have to go back and erase the FP 5000 and reprogram following the above steps Page 12 19 IL17569B FP 5000 Page 12 20 Effective Date 12 05 12 4 5 Upgrading Firmware Upgrading Phase 1 firmware version 1 0 or 1 03 to Phase 2 or later will not be possible directly A two step process must be completed First download the boot swap code To do this you must locate the proper file The default application file name Fp5Kapp s19 will appear in the location window see figure 12 5 this is not the file to download at this time To download the boot swap code to upgrade type Fpbtswap s19 in the file name box and click Open and follow the normal upgrading procedures this should take about one minute When the process completes the relay will be in FlashLoad mode and will prompt you to get the Phase 2 or later firmware this is the second step Follow the normal procedures shown in this section see figures 12 8 through 12 15 to load the relay with the newer application code E T N Cutler Hammer Page 12 20 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 13 APPENDIX 13 1 Glossary FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 1
244. n to the powering programming triggering and resetting of the FP 5000 These events are always logged no programming is necessary The General events are shown in Table 12 4 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 5 Table 12 4 Event General Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given PwrOn The FP 5000 is powered on No value associated with this cause PwrOff The FP 5000 is powered off No value associated with this cause FItPwrOp Transition to Fault Powered Operation No value associated with this cause SetChange The program settings are changed and saved The Setpoint Sequence number PRSetGrpCh The protection active setting group is changed The new active setting group number 1 4 SetRTC The real time clock is set to a new date time No value associated with this cause Trig Wfm Capt The trigger for a waveform capture is activated The event that has caused the trigger dV dl Logic PB Comm Rst Trip Alm A reset of the trip or alarm is performed No value associated with this cause Reset Energy The energy values are reset No value associated with this cause RstCurPKDmd The current peak demand values are reset No value associated with this cause RstPwrPKDmd The power peak demand values are reset No value associated with this cause RstMinMax The min and max values are reset No value associated wi
245. nd Off Delay c Select timer gate off delay 0 to 9999 cycles second Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All 1 In Logic input See Logic Input Options Unused 5 Delay Unit Selectifthe delayis based on Cycle Second Cycle On Delay c Selecttimer gate on delay 0 to 9999 cycles second L o Off Delay c Select timer gate off delay 0 to 9999 cycles second 7 5 S YP T Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 29 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 30 Effective Date 12 05 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Block 50X 1 Logic gate setting to block 554 IOC 50X 1 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 1 4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Block 50X 2 Logic gate
246. ne any two or all three Any one 1 any one 2 any two 3 all Select magnitude of undervoltage 10 to 150 Volts or disable Disable required 1 Volt increments NN Delay Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1200 e 59M 1 Main VT Overvoltage Settings 2 Select the overvoltage phases Any one any two or all three Any one 1 2 any two 3 LN all Select magnitude of overvoltage 10 to 150 Volts or disable Disable required 1 Volt increments NN Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles 1200 1 pom increments Loss Potential Loss Potential Settings LOP Block Selectto set the LOP Block flag bit Disable or Enable Enable when loss of potential is identified LOPB will automatically block the voltage restraint function of 51P2 Alarm Delay Select LOP alarm delay in cycles 0 to 9999 cycles or disable Increments of 1 10000 disable Page 5 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E TN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 9 Aux V Protection Select undervoltage 274 1 and overvoltge 59A 1 device settings 27 A 1 Undervoltage Threshold 59A 1 Overvoltage Threshold Auxiliary VT Undervoltage Settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Select magnitude of undervoltage required 10 to 250 Volts disable Dis
247. new INCOM slave devices please refer to the IMPACC Wiring Specification 17513 available on the Cutler Hammer web site Effective Date 12 05 Page 10 1 The maximum system capacity is 10 000 feet of communications cable and 1000 slave devices main cable link must be terminated at each end by a 12 W 100 ohm carbon resistor Non terminated taps up to 200 feet in length off the main link are permitted but add to the total cable length Terminals 1 2 of the INCOM J1 or J2 terminal plugs are for the twisted pair conductors terminal 3 is for the shield The polarity of the twisted pair is not important Note It is highly recommended that ferrules be used to dress the ends of the cable leads to minimize frayed connections and add stress release Always follow the National Electrical and local codes for cable routing When leaving a building lightening surge protection is required Phoenix Contact Plugtrab is recommended This two piece design absorbs 0 5 db of signal strength reduces cable length maximum by 250ft per protector Base UFBK BE 27 83 09 5 Plug UFBK M 2 PE 24DC ST 28 17 05 5 The twisted pair cable must be one of the following CH IMPCABLE 600 V AWM 300 V OM 90 attenuation 1 6 db 1 Belden 3072F 600 V TC 75C attenuation 2 0 db 1 Belden 9463 family many variations are available or equivalent INCOM NET FP 5000
248. nications Select one of the Setting Main sub menus using the Up Down or PgUp PgDown pushbuttons and press the Enter pushbutton This will provide any of the monitor screens shown in the following Display The data in the second column is an example value please see Section 5 for all available settings of the FP 5000 Use the Previous pushbutton to return to the Setting Main screen to select another category of data screen Note that the user can only view the settings three lines at a time on the display Use the Up Down pushbuttons to scroll through all of these settings Setting Main System Config Protection System Alarm Page 4 10 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Display 4 11 View Settings System Config System Config Display Frequency 60 Frequency Phase Seq ABOC Pase Sequence CT Connect 3 wire CT Connection PH CT Ratio 500 5 Phase CT Ratio IX CT Ratio 500 5 Ix CT Ratio VT Connect Wye Voltage Transformer Connection Main VTR 100 Main Voltage Transformer Ratio Aux VTR 100 Auxiliary Voltgage Transformer Ratio VT Sec Rating 69 28 Voltgage Transformer Secondary Rating Prim Units No Primary Units Config Default Input Output Configuration Prog Logic Default Programmable Logic Remote Set Disable Remote Set Prg w Brk Either Program with Breaker Remote Brk Disable Remote Breaker Set Grps 1 Num
249. nism for selecting the active setting group The setting for Control of Multiple Setpoint Groups has four options Contact Input Comm Local and Local Comm The reason for providing multiple setpoint groups is to permit a quick change of settings and to minimize the risk of changing settings Changing the active setpoint group is a sub menu option of the Status Control mode on the user interface if the Multiple Setpoint Group Control is set to Local Access is not limited by the security door or password protection as switching between the four logic schemes is considered part of normal operation The active setpoint group will also be displayed using the Status Control mode on the user interface Page 9 8 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Output Aux LED OR AUX LED If the Multiple Setpoint Group Control is set to Contact Input the contact inputs are defined in the Contact Input setting section One or two contact inputs can control the setpoint group selection If only one is used the input selects between group 1 Cin Sel 0 and group 2 Cin Sel 1 If two contact inputs are used the combination of the two contact inputs provides selection of group 1 00 group 2 01 group 3 10 or group 4 11 If the Multiple Setpoint Group Control is set to Local the active setpoint group is selected using a sub menu option of the Status Control mode PB on the user interfa
250. nitude kVAh Magnitude kWh Rev Magnitude kWh Net Magnitude Start Date Date mm dd yy m Hours System var Hou Time hh mm ss kVARh Lead Magnitude kVARh Lag Magnitude kVARh Net Magnitude The FP 5000 uses the positive sign convention for power measure ment A positive sign convention corresponds to e Inductive load implies positive Var and power factor values with lagging or positive power factor e Capacitive load implies negative Var and power factor values with leading or negative power factor Hence the Forward watt hours and the Lagging Var hours are positive while the Reverse watt hour and the Leading Var hour displays represent negative values The Forward watthours Reverse watthours Leading Var hours Lagging Var hours and VA hours are all displayed as unsigned numbers However when the FP 5000 calculates the Net watthours and the Net Var hours the calculation is based on the sign conven tion therefore the Net watthours and the Net Var hours can be positive or negative values Refer to the Power Quadrant diagram in Figure 4 4 A lagging power factor is displayed as a positive value and a leading power factor is displayed as a negative value The maximum power factor is the most lagging power factor value measured by the FP 5000 and the minimum power factor is the most leading power factor value measured Two examples for min max power factor values are shown in Figure 4 3 The following examples define the
251. nnections Connect ground terminal shown in lower left hand corner of rear panel see Figure 6 4 to the closest solid electrical safety grounding point with a heavy wire or braid 14 AWG or larger Do not use a current carrying or neutral conductor for this grounding 6 3 1 CT Wiring 4 Carefully read the advice in Section 5 5 1 on choice of CT ratios for a given particular application An inappropriate CT ratio will result in poor measurement accuracy and limited protection More serious errors in ratio choice will make it impossible to set the relay properly Connect the phase and optional ground CTs as shown in Figure 6 8 Pay attention to the phase identification and sequence and check for consistent polarity among the three phases The FP 5000 unbalance protection will pick up and operate if two phases are swapped or if the polarity of any CT is reversed with respect to the other two See Figure 6 10 for other common wiring configurations such as 3 phase 3 wire 3 phase 4 wire 3 phase 3 wire with ground fault protection Page 6 3 IL17569C Page 6 4 Effective Date 12 05 To minimize problems with CT saturation during faults keep the CT wiring as short as possible and use very heavy wire The total resistance of the connecting wire should not be much larger than the secondary resistance of the CT itself The FP 5000 presents very low burden Every phase and ground CT circuit must have one and only one grounding point
252. ns status flags that describe the state of all possible IOC and TOC trip functions has operated 51P TOC Phase Time Over Current has operated Trip Status contains status flags that describe the state of all possible IOC and TOC trip functions 51X TOC IX ground Time Over Current OC Trip Status contains status flags that describe the state of all possible IOC and TOC trip functions 51R TOC IR Residual Time Over Current has operated OC Trip Status contains status flags that describe the state of all possible IOC and TOC trip functions 59M OV Main Phase Overvoltage has operated Voltage Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all under and overvoltage trips 27M UV Main Phase Undervoltage has operated Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that describe all under and overvoltage trips has operated 59A OV Auxiliary Overvoltage has operated Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that describe all under and overvoltage trips 59N OV Neutral Overvoltage has operated Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that describe all under and overvoltage trips 32 Power Power Protection has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips 27A UV Auxiliary Undervoltage has operated Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flag
253. nstantaneous overcurrent 2 while in Cold load condition Select to block the phase instantaneous overcurrent 3 while in Cold load condition Block I Unbal 46 Block Current Unbalance Settings i 46 1 Block Power 32 Select to block current unbalance 1 Yes No while in cold load condition Block Power Settings Select to block current unbalance 2 Yes No while in cold load condition Select to block power 1 while cold Yes No Yes load condition Select to block power 2 while in cold Yes No Yes 32 3 Select to block power while in cold Yes No Yes om Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 37 IL17569C Page 5 38 Table 5 10 Clock Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Clock Time and Date 5 5 9 Date mode Select date format MM DD YY or DD MM YY 0 5 5 9 Time mode Select standard time 12 or 24 12 5 5 9 or military time Year Select year 0 to 99 0 5 5 9 Month Select month 1 to 12 1 5 5 9 Day Select Day 1 to 31 1 5 5 9 Hour Select hour set in 24 hour mode 0 to 23 0 5 5 9 Minute Select minute 0 to 59 0 5 5 9 Second Select Seconds 0 to 59 0 5 5 9 Update Clock Press the Enter pushbutton after setting clock to update the clock
254. o block operation of the overcurrent protective functions A Blocking logic gate is provided for each of the nine instantaneous overcurrent and three inverse time overcurrent protective functions They are 50X 1 50X 2 50X 3 50R 1 50R 2 50R 3 50P 1 50P 2 50P 3 51 51X Each logic gate can be configured as Disabled or as an AND OR NAND or NOR function Each logic gate accepts up to four inputs which can be entered directly or negated Block IOC Blocking Block TOC Logic Gate Figure 9 4 Blocking Logic Gate Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 9 5 Logic Operation by the FP 5000 From the internal operation of the FP 5000 the pickup and operation state of protective functions system alarms and breaker logic are Set as operation dictates and as described in other sections of this manual e g Inverse Time Overcurrent Pickup The FP 5000 maintains a Data Store or image of the state of the outputs from each function The FP 5000 uses the value from the Data Store according to what the user has specified in the Setting Mode to determine the output state of each logic element The user has a selection of logical elements available that are connected together by the use of programming references within the Set Mode rather than with wires The various logic gates and other logical elements are connected together using symbolic references within the Set Mode The logical elements are
255. of time This function is useful to capture trends over longer periods of time Up to 1024 sets of measured data can be recorded The logged data can be viewed using the Cutler Hammer PowerNet software package equipped with the NPMONITOR component Eight different measured data param eters will be recorded at the programmed interval Table 8 8 lists the setpoints used for setting up the data logging function Table 8 8 Data Logging Setpoints Parameter Range Units Mode Cont 1 Pass Trigger Auto Manual Interval s 1 3600 Seconds Value 1 See text Value 8 description below The Mode setpoint will determine if the recording of data wraps around to the oldest recorded values or stops recording after all 1024 data records are taken If the setpoint is Cont the data wraps around and is continuously recorded If the setpoint is 1 Pass then Page 8 15 1117569 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 8 16 Effective Date 12 05 the data is recorded 1024 times at the programmed interval and then Communication A reset is performed through an external stops communication command being given The Trigger setpoint determines what will start the data logging process If set to Auto then upon saving and exiting the program mode the data logging will begin If Manual is selected then any one of the following events will cause the data logging function to start Contact Input One of the contact inp
256. ogic Input Options Unused x O mes IN3 Selectlogic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused x O o IN4 Selectlogic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused q i KS S IESS SSES SS ss Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 33 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 34 Effective Date 12 05 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Block 51X TOC Logic gate setting to block 51X TOC 5 Function Select logic function to apply to logic OR AND NOR Disable gate disable Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused eae pf IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused LE C fe IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused EMEN T INA Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused MEN T NR ener oo 3 Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4or All 1 logic latch to apply Sin Select logic input to set latch See Logic Input Options Unused HN MR Rin Select logic input to reset latch See Logic Input Options Unused e 3 Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4or All 1 logic latch to apply Sin
257. oltage VBC VCA Voltage VCA VA Voltage VA VB Voltage VB VC Voltage System Watts MWatts System Vars gt MVAR System VA MVA Frequency Freq Apparent PF Apt PF Displacement PF DisP PF The Date and Time Stamp is also recorded on the same page with the minimum value display for each parameter occurrence The maximum values for each of the above parameters is compared to the last maximum value for that parameter every 32 cycles If the new value is greater than the last maximum the value is updated Power Factor Maximum is the most lagging power factor value measured Page 4 9 IL17569C Page 4 10 Effective Date 12 05 4 6 2 View Settings Press the View Setting pushbutton to view the existing settings in the FP 5000 program settings The red LED in the upper left hand portion of the pushbutton area will illuminate while you are in the View Setting Mode Display 4 10 shows the options provided by pressing the View Setting pushbutton Note that the possible selections are only viewable three at atime Going in to the View Settings Mode has no effect on the settings The user cannot change the settings in this mode this mode is for viewing the settings only Display 4 10 View Settings Main Setting Main System Config Protection System Alarms Logging Contact Input CFG Output Config Programmable Logic Cold Load Pickup Commu
258. omes active See Section 9 for a detailed description of the logic settings Sets the number of cycles or seconds the Timer Gate output will remain active after the Timer Gate input becomes inactive The Off Delay has no affect unless the Timer Gate output is active when the input becomes inactive See Section 9 for a detailed descrip tion of the logic settings Both logic latches contain the same settings as shown below This setting defines the Setting Group for which the logic latch programming is active This setting is also linked to the System Config settings which is where the total number of settings groups 1 to 4 is programmed This setting defines the Set Input to the Logic Latch The latch output goes active when the Set Input is active The output remains latched in the active state until the Reset is activated See the settings table and Section 9 for a complete description of the logic input settings This setting defines the Reset Input to the Logic Latch The latch output is reset when the Reset Input is active If both the Set Input and Reset Input are active the latch output is inactive See the settings table and Section 9 for a complete description of the logic input settings All 12 blocking logic gates contain the same settings as shown below When the output of the blocking logic gate is active operation of the associated IOC or TOC protection function is blocked The IOC or TOC function will still pick
259. ommunica tion An example of an easily available and acceptable cable is the RadioShack 26 117B Male DB9 to Female DB9 Shield RS 232C Cable This cable connects 1 1 2 2 9 9 That is the cable is connected straight through Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 10 1 IL17569B Page 10 2 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer C 2t OM Female All Other Lines 9 Pin D Sub Unconnected FP 5000 DCE Male 9 Pin D Sub PC DTE 5 Y Male 25 Pin D Sub PC DTE All Other Lines Unconnected Female 9 Pin D Sub FP 5000 DCE Figure 10 2 RS 232 Cable for 9 and 25 pin D Subminiature Connectors 10 2 PowerPort Software Please refer to publication IL 17B 01 T E PowerPort 1 0 User s Guide The objective of this section is to provide a brief overview of obtaining installing invoking and using the PowerPort software Much of the functionality for the FP 5000 will be evident from the menus and the Help Function However the User s Guide will provide additional information PowerPort is a portable scaled down version of the flexible and powerful PowerNet Power Management Software PowerNet communicates with multiple Cutler Hammer devices over an INCOM network whereas PowerPort communicates with one device at a time via a direct connection using the RS 232 ASCII version of the INCOM protocol With Pow
260. on Programmable Logic Zone Interlocking Behavior Aux V Protection Table Aux VTR Auxiliary LED Battery Installation Trip Check Trip Indication Bill NetPower Effective Date 12 05 13 3 3 2 12 10 12 11 12 1 2 0 8 4 5 48 9 4 5 49 8 14 5 49 4 16 6 11 5 49 5 52 9 3 4 23 5 52 8 15 4 17 5 48 5 13 5 15 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 48 5 49 5 48 8 1 8 2 13 12 13 7 13 5 13 6 8 1 9 1 8 7 4 13 5 9 5 39 4 23 5 52 2 9 11 3 10 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com FP 5000 ocking Logic Gates reaker arm ause Table ear Active Alarm ose agram osed LED Configuration Failure Detection Logic Diagram Setting Table Table Functions History Log Monitoring Diagram Open Open LED Operation PB State State Alarm Trip Trouble OQ XO O O O gt C Calculated Capacitive Load Catalog Numbers Caution Checks After Closing the Breaker Drawout Initial Powered Power Off Power On Self Check Failure Voltage Cleaning Clock Settings Table Default Close Breaker Cold Load Pickup Display Figure Settings Table Communications Cause Table 5 53 5 49 12 9 12 11 8 12 8 13 4 23 5 46 4 14 8 14 5 47 12 14 5 47 8 14 5 11 8 12 4 22 8 12 8 12 8 13 4 23 5 40 8 12 8 14 8 13 8 14 8 2 4 7 1 5 1 1 1 3 4 20 5 55 5 54 5 36 5 37 4 4 12 9 Effective Date 12 05 Data Display INCOM
261. on is Wye All phase to phase voltage inputs VAB VBC VCA VLLavg Auxiliary voltage VX All voltage sequential components VO V1 V2 All Wye voltage Total Harmonic Distortion VA THD VB THD VC THD Use only if voltage connection is Wye Delta Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion VAB THD VBC THD VCA THD Use only if voltage connection is Delta All power measurements W var VA All power demand measurements W var VA All power factor measurements Dsp PF App PF The voltage frequency All contact inputs Cin1 Cin8 All logic block outputs LB1 LB6 All timer block outputs TB1 TB6 If the data logger is programmed to 1 Pass then a trigger will not be recognized until the data logger is reset The data logger can have its data reset in one of the following ways Front Panel Reset Press the reset button until the Reset Main menu is displayed select Datalog Trigger and press enter press enter again Page 8 16 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 ETN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 9 1 9 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC APPLICATION The FP 5000 Protective Relay includes programmable logic for programming inputs outputs blocking of protective functions and custom logic functions in the relay The logic provides control of the output relays based on the state of the contact inputs protective functi
262. on pickup protective function operation breaker state system alarms and internal logic LOGIC_LGxState LOGIC_TGxState Logic Data Store LOGIC_LGxState LOGIC BlkState LOGIC_TGxState PROT Data Store Pickup Flags Trip Flags Logic Data Store LOGIC_LGxState LOGIC_TGxState LOGIC_OGxState nmm TG1 TG6 LOGIC OGxState On Delay Off Delay Input Data Store CinState Cin1 8 Zin Reset CinBkr 52a 52b Rel RemOpen RemClose Set Latch 01 02 T COUT SS Reset 2 Disarm Comm Open Close Bkr Breaker Data Store Open Close Bkr PB Bkr State TRIP1 TRIP2 Monitor Bkr Operations U Bkr Accum COUT Data Store Relay States Comm Trip Alarm Indicators Output OG1 OG7 Led States gt System Alarm Flags Gate 7 I Comm Logic Flags Figure 9 1 Overall Logic Diagram Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 9 1 IL17569B Page 9 2 Effective Date 12 05 9 1 Contact Inputs The FP 5000 is equipped with eight optically isolated inputs that may be configured as inputs to predefined FP 5000 functions or for custom logic applications The contact inputs are either ON external contact closed or OFF external contact open They are debounced for one power line cycle to prevent false operation from transient signals Because of the debouncing signals are not process
263. onnector Standard 9 Pin D Subminiature DCE Connection P2 3 5 Protocol INCOM ASCII Slave Cable Shielded amp restricted to 3 meters in length Metering Accuracy Input Signal Frequency necessary for accurate operation 60 Hz nominal 57 63 Hz 595 50 Hz nominal 47 53 Hz 596 Frequency Measurement Accuracy 0 02 Hz Clock Accuracy Free running 1 minute month 9 25 C Automatically updated by PowerNet host when present Principal Parameters Range Accuracy Current Amperes la Ib Ic Ir Ix 0 02 to 20 per Unit at lt 2 CT Rating 0 5 of CT Rating at gt 2 CT Rating 0 5 of Reading Sequence Currents 0 02 to 20 per Unit 1 of Nominal Main Voltage amp 0 to 160 V 10 596 of Nominal 0 2 V Sequence Voltages to 160 V 1 of Nominal Aux Voltage 0 to 250 V 1 of Nominal Phase Angle for amp V 0 to 360 t1 at Nominal Voltage System Frequency 45 to 65 Hz 0 02 Hz Ampere Demand 0 02 to 20 per Unit 0 5 Watt Demand 0 to 4000 MW 1 0 5 for PF Unity 1 5 5 for PF 0 5 to 0 5 Watts 0 to 4000 MW Watthours 0 to 999 999 MWh Var Demand 0 to 4000 Mvar 1 5 FS for PF 0 5 to 0 5 Vars 0 to 4000 Mvar Var hours 0 to 999 999 Mvarh VA Demand 0 to 4000 MVA 1 FSO VA 0 to 4000 MVA VA hours 0 to 999 999 MVAh Apparent Power Factor 1 to 1 0 02 for Load Currents Above 20 R
264. ooting The screen saver is disabled when a warning or failure message is displayed If more than one warning or failure condition exists the FP 5000 scrolls through the multiple error messages Table 12 1 under the Display column shows all possible displays A group of status flags are given in the Status Control mode that describes the current results of diagnostic self tests To view these status flags press the Status Control button select Status and press enter select Self Test Status and press enter use the arrow keys to scroll through the list Table 12 1 under the Status Flag column lists all of the self test status flags Table 12 1 Self Test Displays and Status Flag Display Status Flag Protection Description Recommended Action Boot Code Boot Code Disabled The boot code The circuit is not protected replace CheckSum Error firmware has FP 5000 immediately been corrupted Possible Flash reload Application Code Firmware Disabled The application code The circuit is not protected replace Checksum Error firmware has been FP 5000 immediately corrupted Possible Flash FW reload RAM Failure at External Disabled A portion of external The circuit is not protected replace 0 RAM RAM cannot be FP 5000 immediately read or written RAM Failure at Internal Disabled A portion of the The circuit is not protected replace 0X RAM RAM internal to FP 5000 immediately the microprocessor cannot be read or wri
265. or Protective Relaying PR Equipment Performance FP 5000 00 5 Amp version only FP 5100 00 1 Amp version pending UL 508 Spacing of conductors Safety Fire FCC CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart b Class A EMF radiation limitation EUROPEAN STANDARDS Emissions EN 50081 2 EN 50011 CISPR 11 Class A Immunity EN 61000 6 2 1999 IEC 61000 4 2 ESD Immunity Electrostatic discharge 8 6 kV Air Contact IEC 61000 4 3 RF Radiated Immunity RF Radiation 10 V M 80 1000 MHz 1kHz 8096 Amplitude Modulation IEC 61000 4 4 EFT Burst Immunity Electrical Fast Transient 4 2 kV CM DM IEC 61000 4 5 Surge Immunity Surge 2 1kV CM DM IEC 61000 4 6 RF Conducted Immunity RF Conductive 10 Vo 0 150 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field 50 60 Hz 30 A m Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000 4 11 Voltage Variation Immunity test Voltage dips 3096 reduction 0 5 periods 6096 reduction 5 50 periods Voltage Interruption 9596 reduction 250 periods Page 13 20 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 14 INDEX A Abbreviations Accessory Bus Specifications Active Alarm Clear Event Display Drawout THD Indicator LED Output Slow Breaker System Table V THD VA Demand VAR Demand Var Power Alarm Watt Demand Watt Power Analog Input Sample Processing ANSI Curve Extremely Inverse Moderately Inverse Curve Very Inverse Curve Applicati
266. or TB4 Refer to Figure 6 4 and 6 5 FP 5000 Rear Terminal Designations Power Supply and Relay Contacts TB1 The power supply terminals are 101 and 102 There are 5 FormA normally open relays each with their own independent common and 2 Form C normally open normally closed relays each with their own independent common These relays can be tested as well as reset when in the test mode as mentioned in Section 11 2 5 2 Refer to Figure 6 4 FP 5000 Rear Connections and Table 3 1 Table of Specifications for relay terminal numbers and relay electrical characteristics Cin1 Cin8 TB2 Terminals 201 210 of terminal block TB2 are used in programmable logic applications Default settings are set at the factory to provide standard operational functions Cin1 Cin8 are used as contact inputs when the Contact Input option category is selected For more detailed information refer to Section 9 Programmable Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Logic Application Reserved TB2 Terminals 211 and 212 are reserved for future design efforts Do not connect circuits to these terminals VT Terminals TB2 Pins 213 218 are phase C Auxiliary and ground voltage inputs from the VT voltage transformer module The VT module is used to measure the line voltage and steps down the voltage to a smaller potential It also provides isolation to the FP 5000 and from the voltage bus Figure 6 8 through Figure 6 11 show Delta an
267. ork Information and Wiring 10 1 3 Front RS 232 Port Connection 10 2 PowerPortS oftware 10 2 1 Obtaining Power ort 10 2 2 Installing PowerP ort 10 2 3 Running PowerP ort 10 2 4 WhatPowerPort Can Do 10 2 5 Quitting PowerP ort 10 3 INCOM PowerNet Software 10 4 PowerNetFunctions 10 4 1 Whatis PowerNet Software 10 4 2 Distributed Client S erver Architecture 10 4 3 Licensing 10 4 4 PowerNet S oftware Applications 10 4 5 Core Components 10 4 6 Optional Components 11 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 11 1 Overview of Testing and Maintenance 11 2 Verifying the Product Hardware 11 2 1 In service Monitoring 11 2 2 Verification of Communications P orts 11 2 3 Bench Testing 11 2 3 1 Verifying Current and Voltage Inputs 11 2 3 2 Verify Zone Interlock 11 2 3 3 Testing Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 11 2 34 Testing Trip Monitors 11 2 4 Self Test Status 11 2 5 Test Menu 11 2 5 1 Fault Simulation 11 2 5 2 Operate Relays 11 3 Cleaning Instructions 11 4 Trip Battery Check 11 5 Power up LED Indicator Status 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 1 Troubleshooting the Relay Page TOC 4 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 12 1 12 1 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 12 1 1
268. ot fill the event log Table 12 3 Possible Titles FP 5000 Event Title Name Event Title Description General Contains general events Pickup Pickup of any active protection function that is programmed to be logged Dropout Dropout of any active protection function that is programmed to be logged Operate The operation of any protective function that is programmed to be logged Input Changing state of any contact input that is programmed to be logged Output Changing state of any contact output Breaker Breaker state changes and related breaker alarms Comm Changing state of a communication driven logic variable Self Test Self test diagnostic alarms and going in and out of test mode Page 12 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Each line of the event log containing the log index title and date can be selected using the single or double arrow pushbuttons and entered by pressing the Enter pushbutton The information displayed for every event includes the title and time the event occurred along with the cause of the event and a value see Table 12 4 through Table 12 11 for a list of all event causes with displayed values This value in many cases can be selected with the single arrow pushbutton and pushing the Enter pushbutton to reveal a group of status indicators that were true at the time of the event logged The General events pertai
269. ower protective cover labeled Set and Test This function is found under Test Test Zone Interlock menu You will have 120V AC FP 5000 Source ios Current Limiting Load Figure 11 1 Testing Trip Monitors Page 11 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer a choice of Turn 21 Output or Reset 21 Output Move cursor and press Enter to select either mode Using a voltmeter measure the voltage on TB3 connector J3 1 and J3 2 A voltage of 4 5 to 5 0 volts should be measured when on and then near zero when off 11 2 3 3 Testing Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection Under the View Settings menu find the setting of both the undervoltage and overvoltage protection If the settings are not as desired then modify it in the setting s menu under Protection Main V Protection Set the undervoltage to 60 volts and then the overvoltage to 120 volts both with no delay Starting with 100 volts apply the test voltage to the voltage input terminals TB2 213 215 Decrease the voltage input to just below 60 V and the unit should trip on undervoltage raise the voltage to just over 120 V and the FP 5000 should trip on overvoltage as expected 11 2 3 4 Testing Trip Monitors The trip monitor feature status can be viewed under the Status Control menu Input status Trip Monitor The trip monitor circuits can be tested on the bench by simply applying a fused ac vo
270. p input categories provide selection of predefined groups of protective functions The definition of the individual elements included in each group are shown in Table 9 5 Logic Input Group Definitions Page 9 5 IL17569B Page 9 6 Effective Date 12 05 Table 9 5 Logic Input Group Definitions FP 5000 Group Individual Elements Ph OC 50P 1 50P 2 51P 1 51P 2 Gnd OC 50X 1 50X 2 50R 1 50R 2 51X 51R IOC 50X 1 50X 2 50R 1 50R 2 50P 1 50P 2 TOC 51X 51R 51P 1 51P 2 OC 50X 1 50X 2 50R 1 50R 2 50P 1 50P 2 51X 51R 51P 1 51P 2 All Alarm 50X 3 50R 3 50P 3 59 A2 27 A2 59 M2 27 M2 46 2 47 2 81U 2 810 2 LOPA Voltage 59 A1 27 A1 59 M1 27 M1 Frequency 81U 1 810 1 All Protection 50X 1 50X 2 50R 1 50R 2 50P 1 50P 2 51X 51R 51P 1 59P 2 59 A1 27 A1 59N 1 59 M1 27 M1 46 1 47 1 81U 1 BF Pickup Zone Gnd Zone Phase Note All inputs can be ngegated from the front panel An exclama tion mark indicates the input is negated Page 9 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer 9 6 1 Example of Use A simple example of the logic will illustrate the principles of programming a logic diagram This example shows how to add a High Load Alarm function to the FP 5000 Set the 50P 3 Phase IOC Alarm Pickup to 85 of the 51P TOC Pickup setting Go to Set Mode Protection gt Protection Setting
271. pared against three phase total real power The breaker must be closed for these functions to be effective When the loss of potential block is set under power protections will be disabled The delay setting 0 to 65535 cycles in 1 cycle steps is the time period a power protection must occur before the FP 5000 initiates a trip 5 4 2 7 Frequency Protection Settings 81U 1 Underfreq This is the 81U device Underfrequency setting This function consists of a Threshold and Delay setting The Threshold setting is the frequency 45 65 Hz in 0 01 Hz steps below which the Page 5 45 IL17569C Page 5 46 Effective Date 12 05 underfrequency function operates The Delay setting 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps is the time period an underfrequency must occur before the FP 5000 initiates a trip The underfrequency pickup and trip functions are reset when the frequency raises above the underfrequency set threshold Note Phase A voltage must be greater than 10 V for this function to operate 810 1 Overfreq This is the 81O device Overfrequency setting This function consists of a Threshold and Delay setting The Threshold setting is the frequency 45 65 Hz in 0 01 Hz steps above which the overfrequency function operates The Delay setting 0 to 9999 cycles is the time period an overfrequency must occur before the FP 5000 initiates a trip The overfrequency pickup and trip functions are reset when the frequency drops below the overfreq
272. programmed I Ph pu or Gnd pu setting levels within the breaker failure Delay time setting The I Ph pu is an independent overcurrent element monitoring the phase currents It is recommended to Page 5 46 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer set the level above maximum load currents even though the Breaker failure logic is only initiated upon a breaker trip The I Gnd pu is an independent ground overcurrent element that uses both the measured residual ground current Ir and the measured ground current Ix It is recom mended to be set above any normal or expected rms ground currents 5 4 2 9 Power Factor 55A Apparent PF and 55D Displacement PF These are the two Power Factor protection settings 55A device is the Apparent Power Factor setting and 55D device is the Displace ment Power Factor setting There are three settings which are the same for the apparent and displacement power factor function This setting is the apparent power factor that the FP 5000 will trip on Trigger PF Reset PF This setting is the apparent power factor at which the FP 5000 will reset the apparent power factor function It is like setting a hysteresis for the Trigger setting This setting defines the delay in seconds that the Trigger PF must be active before the FP 5000 will initiate a trip signal Delay The Apparent Power Factor is computed by dividing real power w
273. ps 55A PF Apparent Power Factor has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups 55D PF Displacement Power Factor has Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags picked up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups Zin Trip Zone Interlock Trip has picked Miscellaneous Pickup Status contains the status flags up or dropped out that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking pickups PwrAlm The system alarm for Watt VA or System Alarm Pickup Status contains the status flags for VAR has picked up or dropped out all system alarms PwrDmdAlm The system alarm for Watt demand System Alarm Pickup Status contains the status flags for VA demand or VAR demand has picked all system alarm pickups up or dropped out CurDmdAlm The system alarm for Current Demand System Alarm Pickup Status contains the status flags for has picked up or dropped out all system alarm pickups THD CurAlm The system alarm for Current Total System Alarm Pickup Status contains the status flags for Harmonic Distortion has picked up all system alarm pickups or dropped out THD VolAlm The system alarm for Voltage Total System Alarm Pickup Status contains the status flags for Harmonic Distortion
274. put Options Unused m MP IN2 Select logic input IN2 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused eso IN3 Selectlogic input IN3 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused INA Select logic input 4 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused EE EN This setting is only used if the Dropout setting is set to Off Delay Note The I O Configuration Setting in the System Configuration settings menu must be set to custom for these set points to be configured Otherwise the default settings displayed are used See sections 5 4 5 and 5 4 6 for details Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 21 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 22 Effective Date 12 05 Output Configuration Settings cont pem S Value Selection Setting Value Sec p Le Function Select logic output function for OR AND NOR NAND p Off Delay c Select delay for Relay to dropout 5 after trip event clears 1 cycle increments IN1 Select logic input IN1 for Output See Logic Input Options Trip BF IEEE VN RN IN2 Select logic input IN2 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused IEEE REN ARN IN3 Select logic input INS for Output See Logic Input Options Unused IEEE RN RR INA Select logic input IN4 for Output See Logic Input Options Unused IEEE EN NR eed eue Function Select logic output function for OR AND NOR NAND Dis
275. r 10 to 150 V 1V voltage Threshold Disabled 27 M2 Main 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Undervoltage Delay 59 A1 Auxiliary 10 to 250 V 1V Overvoltage Disabled Threshold 59 A1 Auxiliary 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Overvoltage Delay 59 A2 Auxiliary 10 to 250 V 1V Overvoltage Disabled Threshold 59 A2 Auxiliary 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Overvoltage Delay 27 A1 Auxiliary 10 to 250 V 1V Undervoltage Disabled Threshold 27 A1 Auxiliary 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Undervoltage Delay 27 A2 Auxiliary 10 to 250 V 1V Undervoltage Disabled Threshold 27 A2 Auxiliary 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Undervoltage Delay WWW aatanalantrinal nanam Dann Qa W CQALIIGIGULIIUG UVIIL IL17569C Page 8 10 Effective Date 12 05 8 6 3 Neutral Overvoltage 59N The FP 5000 includes a protective function for detecting neutral overvoltage conditions Two elements are provided for each function allowing alarm and trip levels to be set independently Each of the neutral overvoltage functions have four settings associated with it The 59N threshold can be based on either the measured voltage through V or based on internally calculated residual voltage If the measured voltage is selected the 59N is similar to 59A the only difference is in this case the 59N threshold will be based on either phasor or rms at the user s discretion while 59A uses rms Note the phasor reflects only the fundamental frequency component while rms include
276. r Vb Dead Vmax 5 Voc i Synch Fail ELI Vc i E IVcl Voltage Dead Timer Vca E i L gt DBLL m u y 5 i S o 5 g A IVL I t r gt 2 mtd E BC 0 DBDL e In Synch CA Synch Block Voltage Compensation C IVBZ BCT A VL _ 29 Breaker Close Time B ZVB BCT Ao Slip Out of Range Alarm Afmax Figure 5 9 Sync Check Characteristic in sync flag is one of the control options for use with the Program mable Logic Note that breaker status and a closed breaker command have no effect on the sync checking process When Sync Timeout is set to non zero the sync check is active only if the breaker is open In this case the sync check function will not only check two sources but also the breaker status The in sync flag will be set when two sources meet the in sync and override conditions with the breaker is open The Sync failure flag is set only if the frequency difference of two sources has been within the range and a closing command has been presented but their magnitude or angle difference has been out of their range for the specified Timeout The Sync failure flag is one of the control options for use with the Programmable Logic and it inherently has no effect on the in sync flag The Sync failure flag is pulsated for 300 cycles and then resets Also if the breaker is closed the Sync failure flag will be reset
277. r may set true or false through the communication channel Table 9 4 shows the elements available for each input category Table 9 4 Logic Elements Input Options Input Category Elements Unused PH OC OC IOC TOC OC All Alm Volt Freq AllProt 50X 1 50X 2 50 3 50R 1 50R 2 50R 3 50P 2 50P 3 51P 1 51P 2 51P 51X 59A 1 59A 2 27A 1 27 2 59M 1 59M 2 27M 1 27M 2 46 2 47 1 47 2 81U 1 31U 2 810 1 810 2 BF 55A 55D 59N 1 59N 2 32 1 32 2 32 3 LOP LOPB Trip PH OC OC IOC OC All Alm Volt Freq AllProt 50X 1 50X 2 50X 3 50R 1 50R 2 50R 3 50P 2 50P 3 51P 1 51P 2 51P 51X 59A 1 59A 2 27 1 27 2 59M 1 59M 2 27M 1 27M 2 46 2 47 1 47 2 81U 1 31U 2 810 1 810 2 BF 55A 55D PhZone GndZone 59N 1 59N 2 32 1 32 2 32 3 LOPA LG1 LG2 LG3 L54 LG5 LG6 TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 TG5 TG6 OG1 OG2 OG3 OG4 OG5 OG6 OG7 Cin1 Cin2 Cin3 Cin4 Cin5 Cin Cin7 Cin8 or ZI In Pickup Logic Inputs Power Power Demand Current Demand 96 THD Bkr Ops 51 System Alarm Breaker Control OpenBkr CloseBkr Open Closed BkrFail Alm StateAlm Mntr1 Alm Mntr2Alm All Alm 67G F 67G R 67V F 67V R 67Q F 67Q R 67I F 67 67X F 67X R 67VIXF 67VIXR 67A F 67B F 67C F InSync SyncFail SlipAlm 25BL 25LL Coldload Communications Comm1 Comm2 Comm3 or Comm4 The pickup and tri
278. r of cycles captured and recorded before the defined trigger event The pre trigger applies to all waveform sets captured By default 2 cycles will be recorded before the trigger event and 14 cycles after the trigger event The OSC Trigger describes the events that can cause a trigger of the waveform capture Each event is described as Trip 1 relay closing this is by default and cannot be turned off Trip 2 relay closing dV dl Disturbance Detection All eight voltage and current inputs are converted to real and imaginary phasor quantity each cycle If the latest cycle real or imaginary phasor quantity has changed 12 596 from the previous cycle value and if a voltage value is greater than 5 volts or if a current value is greater than 5 per unit than a waveform trigger occurs Logic LG6 Logic Gate 6 See Section 9 Programmable Logic and Section 5 Table 5 7 for LG6 programming is used to cause a waveform trigger This logic gate can be used to trigger on any Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit FP 5000 www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 8 15 combination of trip pickup and alarm events It is a powerful selection tool to make sure that only the waveforms needed are captured e Cntrl PB This enables a waveform trigger from the front face plate of the FP 5000 The menu selection can be found by pressing the Status Control button selecting control and pressing
279. ramming of the relay under System Config in the Setting Main menu These settings must agree with the current transformers to which the relay is connected Therefore lom is established by the current transformer ratio used and becomes the primary scale factor for the trip functions and readouts Before proceeding with the curve explanation it should be noted that combining functional capabilities such as inverse time overcurrent short delay and instantaneous is a coordination activity The effects of one group of settings on another should be understood in order to determine if the results are acceptable under all foreseeable circum stances This helps to avoid unexpected operations or non operations in the future Keep in mind that the FP 5000 operates its trip alarm algorithms simultaneously and independently If any one of the algorithms detects a trip condition the FP 5000 will trip even though the user may expect one of the other trip curves algorithms to prevail For instance if the Inverse Time Overcurrent calculation results in a time which is less than the 50P 2 trip time the FP 5000 will trip it will not cease TOC evaluation within the operative domain of the 50P 2 evaluation See Figure 8 7 The shaded portion of the curve illustrates the ITOC value less than the 50P 2 Delay time For the FP 5000 the ITOC time will prevail The programmable logic may be configured to prevent tripping in this region if desired Inverse Ti
280. rd Reverse Boh STWTOCPikup 050 0 01 Oit 4OzorDisabe STTOCTme Mut 100 0950100 lt RJ Pickup 100 00 0 11020 0 0rDisable SSS BDXTXIOOTDely g 80 1 009999 0 Direction Bot List Forward Reverse Boh 50x41 KIOG 2 Pickup 200 00 Oil z00 orDisaBe 50X41 KIOG 2 Delay 600 100 0199999 0 L 50X1 KOC 2 Direction Boh List Forward Reverse IR Residual Overcurrent 51R IR TOC Shape XTRM List IT l2T 14T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB IECC BIRR TOC Reset Usi inst Calc T Delay f IR TOC Direction TR IR TOC Pickup TR IR TOC Time Mult IR 1 Pickup SOR IIRIOC TDelay 60 1 OieSe99oxles IR OC 2 Pickup SOR IRIOC2Delay g 600 1 0t9e99odes 0 2 Direction Both ist Forward Reverse Boh Unbat Aarm Unbal Alarm 001 0 115209 disable 4621UnbalNam 2 40 1 2t040perent 46 2 1Unbal Aarm Delay 60 1 0169999oles L 47 2 VUnbal Aarm Threshold 50 1 116100Volis disabe 7472 VUnba VAiy 40 1 2to40percent 47 2 VUnbal Nam Delay 60 1 0169999ccles 50R 1 IR IO
281. rdination study should be completed to determine the overcurrent pickup and time delay settings prior to commissioning the FP 5000 relay The pickup setting range 0 1 to 4 0 per unit in 0 01 steps is the overcurrent value in per unit at which the FP 5000 starts to time out to trip To reference this setting to the Primary System Current simply multiply this setting by the CT primary connected rating For example if the CT is an 800 5 multi ratio CT connected at 600 5 then a setting of 0 7 will represent a primary current pickup of 420 A 0 7 times 600 In terms of the relay current used for bench testing use the nominal current rating of the FP 5000 model which is either 5 Aor 1 Sofora5A version a setting of 0 7 will require 3 5 A 0 7 times 5 relay current to operate To determine the pickup setting from the coordination study simply divide the primary current value that you want the relay to trip at by the primary CT rating For example if you want the relay to operate at 570 A set it to 0 95 per unit 570 A divided by 600 A The time multiplier setting range 0 05 to 10 0 sets the time portion of the TOC curve Refer to Section 13 to view the Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves The ANSI and IEC curves and multipliers are per their respective standards and definitions The current scale along the x axis is in terms of multiples of pickup 1 1 For the thermal curves the current scale along the x axis is in terms of laom or CT
282. reaker Open and Close pushbuttons on the front panel The FP 5000 is shipped from the factory with the Bkr Oper PB set to disabled Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 41 slip The Line Positive Sequence Impedance Angle allows the user to select the tie sequence Unit 67P 67P 67 n ground direction control within the FP Operating b k Phase direction is used to supervise the phase overcurrent elements The phase direction unit Line Zero Seq shall be polarized using a quadrature voltage Imped Ang The Line Zero Sequence Impedance Angle The quadrature voltage is compared to the allows the user to select the zero se corresponding phase current to establish a quence line impedance angle for the zero fault direction sequence voltage polarized ground direction control within the FP 5000 In the case of a three phase nearly zero voltage fault the memorized voltage or Ground direction is used to supervise the prefault voltages shall be used to establish the ground overcurrent elements This setting correct fault direction see figures 5 1 and 5 2 effects the characteristics of 67V and 67VIX For the negative sequence voltage polarized IR Gnd Dir Cntrl This setting allows the user to select the IR direction unit a negative sequence current is Ground Polarizing Method Ground direction compared to a negative sequence voltage to
283. rements of 1 Isum INTR Amp Current sum of interrupting 0 to 50 000 kA seconds 50 000 amps measured in kA increments of 1 25 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 17 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 18 Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 4 Logging Settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Value Selection Setting Value Sec Current Demand Current Demand Logging Setting 171 5 5 4 Interval m Select interval for taking current 1 to 60 minutes 15 demand measurementin minutes Increments of 1 Window Select type of power demand Fixed or Slide Fixed window Interval m Select interval for taking power 1 to 60 minutes 15 demand measurementin minutes Increments of 1 Event Log Enable Even Log Settings for Pickups Ds Contact Inputs and Pickup Select Pickup to be logged V Pickup Select V Pickup to be logged PF Pickup Select PF Pickup to be logged Unbal Pickup Select Unbal Pickup to be logged SysAlm Pickup Select system alarm pickup to be No Yes logged Power Pickup Select power pickup to be logged Logic Pickup Select logic pickup to be logged Page 5 18 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 19 Logging Settings con
284. rent unbalance and power protection elements may be blocked at the user s choice and the time inverse overcurrent elements may also be desensitized at the user s choice When the load current drops below a certain level for a specified time all the OC elements will use the normal pickup settings The cold load pickup timeout setting is used for terminat ing the use of cold load pickup control if the load inrush diminishing signal has not been received within the timeout The cold load pickup threshold setting P1 in figure 5 9 is an inrush current indicator When the load current exceeds this level occurrence of load in rush will be identified and the load inrush diminish timer will be initiated 5 4 9 Clock Settings Once the FP 5000 is properly installed the real time clock needs to be set to get the right date and time for clock display and all Metering and Logging date and time stamp values To set the clock select the clock setting in the Setting Main display window Configure the settings below to set the clock Date Mode Sets the mode for the date used in all time stamp displays Time Mode Sets the mode for the time used in all time stamp displays Choose 12 hour mode for AM and PM display of the time Choose 24 hour mode for military display Example 1 P M would be displayed as 13 00 Year Sets the current year for the real time clock update Month Sets the current month for the real time clock update Day Sets th
285. rip indicator dropout Latched unlatched Latched E Trip1 Enable or disable Trip1 indicator Disable enable ERR Trip2 Enable or disable Trip2 indicator Disable enable RIy3 Enable or disable RIy3 indicator Disable enable Rly4 Enable or disable Rly4 indicator Disable enable Ce Rly5 Enable or disable Rly5 indicator Disable enable p Alarm RIy6 Enable or disable Alarm indicator Disable enable Healthy Enable or disable relay Healthy Disable enable Disable indicator Alarm Indicator Output Alarm Indicator Settings DEJES Dropout Select trip indicator dropout Latched unlatched Latched Trip1 Enable or disable Trip1 indicator Disable enable pae 2 Enable or disable Trip2 indicator Disable enable RIy3 Enable or disable RIy3 indicator Disable enable pee Rly4 Enable or disable Rly4 indicator Disable enable co Rly5 Enable or disable Rly5 indicator Disable enable Alarm RIy6 Enable or disable Alarm indicator Disable enable Healthy Enable or disable relay Healthy Disable enable Enable indicator Page 5 24 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 25 Output Configuration Settings cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Pickup Indicator
286. ripping the breaker while it is closed and carrying load The FP 5000 uses the breaker a and breaker b contacts to determine if the breaker is opened or closed The FP 5000 may be configured to use only one auxiliary contact to determine breaker position If no auxiliary contacts are used then the FP 5000 will not be able to determine breaker position and will allow programming at any time regardless of this setting See Section 8 for more information on breaker logic If enabled the user can remotely open and close the breaker via communications through the FP 5000 The FP 5000 is shipped with the Remote Bkr set to disabled This setting has no affect on the open and close operations through the contact inputs or the relay front panel open close buttons Disarm Ctrl This setting refers to the number of different Protection Setting Groups 1 to 4 that may be programmed into the FP 5000 Only one setting group can be used at a time but up to four may be programmed Changing this setting will immediately ask you to confirm and save the settings and will exit you out of the setting mode Please note that all settings made prior to this point will be saved upon confirmation to save settings This update is necessary for the relay to provide access to the additional protection setting groups Energy Unit TOC Reset T To view the active setting group the user must press the Status Control pushbutton to enter the S
287. rogrammed limit AccuCurAlm Accumulated Current Alarm the System Alarm Timeout Status contains the status accumulated interrupted current the flags for all system alarm time outs breaker has opened has exceeded the programmed limit LOP Alarm Loss of Potential has operated a loss of Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that voltage was detected describe all under and overvoltage trips Any contact input state change can be logged in the Event log if so programmed Each input can be logged or not logged according to the program settings see Section 5 The value given for each event is Active for an input transition of low to high or inactive for an input transition of high to low Table 12 7 summarizes the contact input causes for an event log Table 12 7 Event Input Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given Cin1 State Alt Contact Input 1 State changed Active or Inactive Cin2State Alt Contact Input 2 State changed Active or Inactive Cin3State Alt Contact Input 3 State changed Active or Inactive Cin4State Alt Contact Input 4 State changed Active or Inactive Cin5State Alt Contact Input 5 State changed Active or Inactive Cin6State Alt Contact Input 6 State changed Active or Inactive Cin7State Alt Contact Input 7 State changed Active or Inactive Cin8State Alt Contact Input 8 State changed Active or Inactive
288. rrent measuring inputs four voltage measuring inputs eight contact inputs seven contact output relays communications and a front panel user interface Based upon the firmware loaded into the flash memory of the FP 5000 and the customer settings entered manually through the front panel or through the RS 232 port using the PowerPort program the microprocessor observes inputs sets outputs and stores data for user retrieval The resources the firmware and the customer settings are the FP 5000 Page 1 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Zone Interlock Zone Interlock IN OUT I 9 Front Panel Front Panel 0 Pushbuttons LED Front Panel 4 x 20 Alpha Breaker Trip Coil Contact OUT Detect A Bus INCOM INCOM FP 5000 I O Resources FP 5000 Resources Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 1 3 1 7 FP 5000 Features METERING V LE PF FP5000 Figure 1 2 FP 5000 Setting Diagram The 10 Standard Curves referred to in the FP 5000 Features List are shown in Table 1 1 below See e xamples of typical FP 5000 curves in the Appendix 13 4 and Section 8 4 4 1 Table 1 1 FP 5000 Curve Shapes Thermal ANSI Curves IEC Curves Curves Per ANSI C37 112 Per IEC 255 3 It Moderately Inverse IEC A Pt Very Inverse IEC B 14 Extremely Inverse IEC C F
289. rse Time O vercurrent P rotection 51 8 3 3 Curve Shapes 8 3 4 Negative Sequence Current P rotection 46 Curve Overlapping Issues Zone Interlocking Behavior and Application 8 5 1 Compatible Zone Interlock Devices 8 5 2 Connection Rules 8 5 3 Operation see Figure 8 10 Voltage Functions and Protection 8 6 1 Negative Sequence Voltage P rotection 47 8 6 2 Undervoltage 27 and Overvoltage 59 Protection 8 6 3 Neutral Overvoltage 59N 8 6 4 Loss of Potential W ye versus Delta Voltage Transformers Frequency Protection 81 Breaker Oriented Functions 8 9 1 Breaker State 8 9 2 Close Breaker 8 9 3 Open Breaker 8 9 4 Breaker Trip and Close Coil Supervision 8 9 5 Breaker Failure 50 8 9 6 Breaker State Alarm 8 9 7 Breaker Trouble 8 9 8 Slow BreakerAlarm 8 10 Setting Up Oscillographic Data Capture 8 11 Data Logging Functions Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com 117569 Page TOC 3 8 15 Page TOC 3 IL17569C Page TOC 4 Effective Date 12 05 9 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC APPLICATION 10 9 1 9 2 Contact Inputs Output Relays 9 2 1 Relay Test 9 2 2 Disarm Trip Programmable Logic Elements Trip and Alarm Blocking Logic Operation by the FP 5000 Programming Logic Functions 9 6 1 Example of Use Use of Multiple Setting Groups Default Settings DATACOMMUNICATIONS 10 1 Overview of P orts 10 1 1 Handling of Multiple Communication Hosts 10 1 2 INCOM Netw
290. ry test LED is a separate circuit and does not light on power up only when the pushbutton is pushed Page 11 3 IL17569B FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 11 4 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page 11 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 12 TROUBLESHOOTING There are two aspects to troubleshooting 1 Failures in the system being protected 2 Failures of the FP 5000 relay The FP 5000 can be programmed to record data during system faults which can be analyzed to determine the cause of faults The FP 5000 continuously determines its own ability to function if any internal failures are detected the FP 5000 can raise an alarm For information on troubleshooting the FP 5000 relay failures see Section 12 1 For information on troubleshooting the circuit the FP 5000 is protecting see Section 12 2 The FP 5000 firmware can be revised in the field by using a PC and the front mounted serial port on the FP 5000 Section 12 4 covers the procedures for upgrading the firmware in the field 12 1 Troubleshooting the Relay The FP 5000 performs a great many self checks on a continuous basis to warn the operating personnel of impending or actual failure and allowing steps to be taken to minimize the impact of such failure Some internal failures will not effect the ability of the FP 5000 to protect the circuit while others will Detected failures of
291. s IR 1 IB IC This calculated value is affected by the Connect Setting in the System Config Settings In most applications this function is redundant to the 51X functions described above but does not require a ground current connection The user selects the shape the reset of the TOC curve and direction The available settings and setting ranges are the same as the 51P PH TOC settings IR TOC Setting This is the 51 device setting Residual Inverse Time Overcurrent pickup and time multiplier settings The user selects the pickup and the time multiplier of the TOC curve The available settings and setting ranges are the same as the 51P PH TOC settings The pickup settings are in per unit and are based on the connected phase CT ratio 50R 1 IR IOC 1 and 50R 2 IR IOC 2 These are the two 50 device residual IR instantaneous overcurrent settings which are two independent elements The settings operate the same as described in the 51P PH TOC settings The pickup settings are in per unit and are based on the connected phase CT ratio The direction setting operates in the same manner 5 4 2 4 Unbalance Settings 47 1 Voltage Unbal This is the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting which consists of the Threshold V2 V1 and Delay settings The voltage unbalance function is based on the Main VT system 3 phase voltages The positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated from the 3 phase voltages The Threshold sett
292. s and inverse time overcurrent phase and ground curve selections are addressed with respect to their effect on the resultant characteristic curve described above The operating characteristics of the relay are graphically represented by time current characteristic curves shown in Figure 8 4 below Curve Shape 50P 2 Short Delay 50P 1 Instantaneous Multiples of Inom CURRENT Thermal Curves 4 Curve Shape 50P 2 Short Delay Instantaneous 2 Multiples of Ipu Multiples of Inom CURRENT ANSI Curves 3 Figure 8 4 FP 5000 Time Current Characteristic Curves Effective Date 12 05 www eatonelectrical com Curve Shape IEC A IEC B 50P 2 Short Delay 1 Instantaneous IEC D IEC C 2 Multiples of Inom Multiples of CURRENT IEC Curves 4 For more information visit Page 8 3 IL17569C Page 8 4 Effective Date 12 05 NOTICE AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 8 4 THE ANSI AND IEC CURVE SHAPES ARE IN TERMS OF MULTIPLES OF PICKUP CURRENT OF THE CT PRIMARY WHEREAS SHORT DELAY AND INSTANTANEOUS ARE IN TERMS OF MULTIPLES OF lucy 5 A OR 1 A SECONDARY OF CT CURRENT THE THERMAL CURVE IS REPRESENTED IN TERMS OF MULTIPLES OF FOR ITS CURVE SHAPE SHORT DELAY AND INSTANTANEOUS SETTINGS THIS MUST BE CONSIDERED IN THE COORDINA TION STUDY AND IN THE PROGRAMMING OF THE FP 5000 PROTECTIVE RELAY The ANSI curves
293. s PowerNet Software requires to run They include the following PowerNet DeviceServer PowerNet Configurator PowerNet Tools PowerNet License Manager PowerNet DeviceServer PowerNet DeviceServer is a server on a PowerNet Software client server system It polls for IMPACC device status and data and transmits information device control setpoints etc from applica tions to specific devices In addition PowerNet DeviceServer can also act as a Modbus slave PowerNet Configurator PowerNet Configurator serves as either an on line or off line configuration tool to configure any number of PowerNet DeviceServers making up a PowerNet Software system You can also use PowerNet Configurator to perform security administration PowerNet Configurator allows you to assign a unique user ID and password for each PowerNet Software user designate the functions that each user can access and add and delete PowerNet DeviceServers to and from a PowerNet Domain PowerNet Tools PowerNet Tools is a PowerNet application designed to automatically merge the device energy trend alarm and event data collected by multiple PowerNet DeviceServers into a central database PowerNet Tools is also used to archive central databases PowerNet License Manager PowerNet License Manager is the PowerNet Software application that controls and manages the floating licenses PowerNet License Manager monitors how many purchased licenses for an application
294. s all frequencies If the calculated voltage is selected the setting of criterion will make no difference and the phasor will be used for the threshold Note if the voltage connection is delta there will be no zero sequence voltage therefore 59N function will not act The settings for the neutral overvoltage functions are shown in Section 5 Programming and are repeated in the table below Table 8 5 Neutral OV Protection Settings Parameter Range Step 59N 1 Calculated Overvoltage Measured Source 59N 1 Phasor rms Overvoltage Criterion 59N 1 5 to 250 Volts 1V Overvoltage Disabled Threshold 59N 1 0 to 9999 cycles 1 Cycle Overvoltage Disabled Delay FP 5000 8 6 4 Loss of Potential The FP 5000 includes the Loss of Potential logic for detecting loss of any phase of the voltage measuring circuits see figure 8 11 Once the loss of potential condition is identified the LOP will be set The LOPB bit may also be set if the LOPB is selected to be enabled Once the LOPB is set the voltage restraint function of 51P2 overcurrent and underpower function will be automatically blocked Both LOP and LOPB are the options of the programmable logic input All the current elements can be blocked through their block gate logic and other functions may be blocked through the programmable logic if the user desires The LOP logic allows a window of opportu nity to override LOPB if a fault occurs within a certain time p
295. s contact disagreement if both 52a and 52b remain in the same state for more than 30 cycles By default the alarm contact output relay will close 8 9 7 Breaker Trouble Any of the eight contact inputs Cin1 Cin8 can be configured as Breaker Trouble Contact input 4 is so configured by default If external logic determines that the breaker has failed in some way then it can activate this contact input If this input is true and the FP 5000 gives the command to close the breaker then the closed breaker command will be locked out until the signal goes to the inactive state BKR STATE LOCKOUT gt BF TRIP UI RESET LOCKOUT Figure 8 15 Breaker Failure Times in cycles unless stated otherwise Page 8 14 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 8 9 8 Slow Breaker Alarm If the FP 5000 is used to issue the close and open breaker signal to the breaker and if at least 52a or 52b is configured to a contact input then the Slow Breaker Alarm Monitoring is activated If a breaker close command is issued from one of the FP 5000 output relays the state of the breaker is monitored to see how long it takes for the 52a to activate or the 52b to deactivate If it takes more than 40 cycles for the breaker to change to the closed state the slow breaker time alarm is raised By default the alarm contact output relay will close Likewise if the open
296. s driven either Trip 1 or Trip 2 to the active state at the time of the trip This can identify which trip relay has activated 30 Ogx Input State Shows the state of each logic input on the output logic gate that has driven either Trip 1 or Trip 2 to the active state 31 Trip Test Status A group of status flags that shows if any output relay or zone interlock output has been forced to the active state through the test function 32 rms Values Show the rms values of currents and voltages as well as the frequency current unbalance and voltage unbalance at the time of the trip 33 V amp l Phasors Shows the fundamental voltage and current phasors with magnitude and relative phase angle E T N Cutler Hammer ndicates information available by selecting the line and pressing Enter 12 2 3 History Log The history log records statistics that can be gathered over time It is therefore useful in detecting chronic problems that occur over time In addition it keeps track of the number of operations and accumu lated interrupted amps that can indicate if the breaker needs maintenance Each history log has a date times stamp to indicate when the data was last reset Each history log can be reset by pressing the reset button until the reset menu appears then selecting History Log and then choosing the correct history log to be reset See Section 4 13 for more information on the history log 12 2 4 Using Waveform Data Wav
297. s factory assembled outer chassis allows for panel thickness variations minor panel distortions and has relaxed panel cutout tolerance requirements for easy faster panel mounting The panel footprint outline is equivalent to the Cutler Hammer DT3XXX and MP3XXX draw out designs However it differs from most Cutler Hammer IQ style panel mounts in that 7 72 196 1 FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 6 1 The panel cutout is slightly larger The enclosure is mounted from the front user side of the panel Four mounting studs nuts are used for panel mounting The following paragraphs describe the mounting of the FP 5000 relay Mount the unit vertically on a flat panel The location should be as free as possible of water chemicals dust and excessive heat and vibration The panel should protect the user from accidental contact with live terminals on the back of the FP 5000 A 1 8 inch steel panel or door solidly grounded is recommended cutter Hammer operational Feeder Protection C Breaker Closed a log Status Control ge other Trip o 5 22 132 6 A Factory Conn
298. s programmed to be 52a or 52b The Breaker Closed LED will light when the 52a contact input is on and or the 52b contact is off The Breaker Open LED will light when the 52a contact input is off and or the 52b contact is on 8 9 2 Close Breaker The FP 5000 has been designed to issue a close breaker signal from one of its programmable contact outputs The default configuration maps the Close Breaker function to contact output relay 5 see figure 8 13 This relay can be made to operate for 45 line cycles when commanded giving a pulsed on function The Close Breaker function can be initiated from four different sources FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Front panel Close Breaker pushbutton if enabled by System Configuration Bkr Operation PB setting see Section 5 Test menu Close Breaker function Communication Close Breaker command if enabled by System Configuration Remote Bkr setting see Section 5 4 1 Contact input programmed to Remote Close By using the FP 5000 to close the breaker the following advan tages of built in logic are obtained Close signal is prevented after breaker failure see 8 9 5 Breaker Failure Close signal is prevented while the FP 5000 Trip 1 output relay is active Closed signal is prevented if the configured input Breaker Trouble is active see 8 9 7 Breaker Trouble Closed signal is prevented if the breaker is already in the closed state Closed signal is pre
299. s that describe all under and overvoltage trips 46 lunbal Phase Current Unbalance Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips 47 Vunbal Phase Voltage Unbalance has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips 81 UF Underfrequency has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips 81 OF Overfrequency has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips BF Breaker Failure has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describe all unbalance frequency breaker failure power factor power and zone interlocking trips Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 12 7 IL17569B FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 12 8 Effective Date 12 05 Table 12 6 Event Operate Cause Table continued Cause Cause Description Value Given 55A PF Apparent Power Factor has operated Miscellaneous Trip Status contains the status flags that describ
300. s that the user can set a delay time during which the Output Trip1 relay would remain energized after a trip event has cleared See Off Delay setting below Off Delay Defines the time delay in cycles which can be set from 0 to 600 cycles in 1 cycle increments Default is set to 5 cycles Note The user should consider the breaker clearing time when setting the Off Delay IN1 IN2 IN3 4 These settings define the logic inputs to the Output Logic gate associated with Output Trip1 relay See Section 9 6 for a description of the logic input settings Output Trip2 The settings for this Form A relay output are set the same way as the Output relay settings shown above The only difference is the Monitor If Monitor is set to on the Breaker Close coil circuit will be monitored by the FP 5000 for continuity through Output Trip2 relay Output RIy3 The settings for these output relays are set the Output Rly4 same way as the Output Trip1 relay settings Output Rly5 shown above except that these relays have no Monitor setting Output Alarm The Output Alarm relay settings are set the same way as the Output Trip1 relay settings shown above except that the alarm relay does not have a Monitor setting Output Aux LED This setting determines what logic function controls the lighting of the yellow Auxiliary LED located on the front panel of the FP 5000 This setting contains the settings Function IN1 IN2 INS and I
301. s using up down arrows and press Enter Protection pushbutton If of Set Grps is set to 4 in System Config then 4 setting Setting Group 1 groups would be listed on the Protection display n Setting Group 1 Phase Overcurrent IX Measured OC IR Residual OC Select the 51P PH TOC CURVE setting to access the Time Overcurrent Phase Overcurrent curve settings r 51 PH TOC Curve 51P PH TOC Setting 50 1 PH IOC 1 Select Phase Overcurrent to access the phase element protection settings Press the Enter pushbutton to access the curve shape settings Use 51 PH TOC Curve up down arrows to select curve shape Press Enter to finish programming r curve shape then use up down arrows to select Reset Use Enter and Shape MOD up down arrows to set all settings then press the Previous pushbutton to Reset Calc return to Phase Overcurrent display window to change other settings Direction Both Once all settings are changed the user may back out of the setting menus by continually pressing the Previous pushbutton until the Update Setting display window appears Press Enter pushbutton to save settings or press Previous to cancel The user may abort setting entry at any time by pressing the Reset pushbutton Page 5 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C
302. se A drops below 10 volts the underfrequency and overfrequency functions are disabled An overfrequency pickup occurs when the measured frequency exceeds the overfrequency Threshold setting The overfrequency trip is set when the overfrequency condition exists for the delay time specified The overfrequency pickup and trip are reset when the frequency drops below the overfrequency Threshold setting An underfrequency pickup occurs when the measured frequency drops below the underfrequency Threshold setting The underfrequency trip is set when the underfrequency condition exists for the delay time specified The underfrequency pickup and trip is reset when the frequency raises above the underfrequency Threshold setting The settings for the overfrequency and underfrequency functions are shown in Section 5 Programming and are repeated in Table 8 7 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Table 8 7 Frequency Protection Settings FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 Parameter Range Step 81U 1 Under 45 to 65 Hz 0 1 Hz Frequency Disabled Threshold 81U 1 Under 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Frequency Time Delay 810 1 Over 45 to 65 Hz 0 1 Hz Frequency Disabled Threshold 810 1 Over 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Frequency Time Delay 81U 2 Under 45 to 65 Hz 0 1 Hz Frequency Disabled Threshold 81U 2 Under 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Frequency Time Delay 810 2 Over 45 to 65 Hz 0 1 Hz Frequency Disa
303. select the Sel Active Set Grp sub menu then select the setting group desired to change the active setting group Control Sel Active Set Grp Default Settings Trigger datalogger If this setting is Enabled the user has the ability to arm or disarm the output trip contacts by going into the Test Mode Arm Disarm Trip sub menu and selecting either Arm Trip or Disarm Trip This is a two step process 1 The Disarm Ctrl setting must be enabled and 2 The user must go into the Test Mode and select the Arm Disarm sub menu then select Arm Trip or Disarm Trip If the Disarm Ctrl setting is set to Disabled the user cannot select the Arm Trip or Disarm Trip in the Arm Disarm Trip sub menu The message Functions programmed to disable See System Config will appear in the display window This setting determines how the energy units are displayed The selection is either kWh kilowatt hours or MWh megawatt hours This is the Inverse Time Overcurrent Reset Time delay setting which is used when T Delay is chosen for the reset of a 51 time overcurrent device in protection settings as described in Section 8 3 2 This time will apply to all of the 51P 51P 2 51X and 51R elements that have the selected T Delay for reset characteristics Please refer to Section 8 3 2 for a complete description of the reset charac teristics for the 51 TOC elements This setting allows the user to enable or disable the B
304. setting to block 5 5 7 IOC 50X 2 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 1 4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Block 50X 3 Logic gate setting to block 5 5 7 IOC 50X 3 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 For more information visit www eatoneiectricai com Effective Date 12 05 Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 31 Programmable Logic cont Display Se
305. sidual current connection of the phase CTs LAN Local Area Network Left Mouse Button The primary mouse button unless you have configured your mouse differently When instructed to click on an item point to it and press the left mouse button List Box A box on a pop up screen that displays information allowing you to scroll through or select its contents Modbus protocol A popular industrial communication protocol MODEM Modulator Demodulator encodes and decodes data stream typically for transmission over telephone lines Mouse A hand held pointer that attaches to your computer The mouse displays on the computer screen as an arrow By moving the mouse and clicking the mouse buttons you can perform and select various operations PC Personal Computer based upon the Intel processor family Phase Reversal When any two phases become reversed Phase Unbalance Deviation of the percentage of nominal line voltage between any two phases Point To position the pointer so that it is resting on the desired item on the screen Pointer The hollow white arrow that you can move around the screen using the mouse Pop Up Screens A screen that displays access to a PC program function prompting you to enter additional information Power Flow Power Flow is the direction of power flow for each harmonic and is defined as the sign of WATTS Id Vd Ig Vq for that harmonic Thus
306. sign convention for energy under various power flow conditions Induction Motor Load Figures 4 4 and 4 5 Typically when monitoring induction motor loads the power flow is in Quadrant 1 The watts are positive and the power factor is lagging By definition the power factor and Vars are positive Capacitive Load Figure 4 4 When monitoring a capacitive load or a heavily excited synchro nous motor the power flow is in Quadrant 4 By definition the power factor and Vars are negative Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 4 7 Unity Recorded Recorded Minimum Maximum 4 9 4 5 Typical Possibility 1 Unity Recorded Recorded Minimum Maximum 7 4 6 Typical Possibility 2 Figure 4 3 Power Factor Minimum Maximum Reactive Power 4 N QUADRANT 2 QUADRANT 1 Watts Negative Watts Positive Vars Positive Power Factor Leading Vars Positive Power Factor Lagging Real Power Watts Negative Watts Positive Vars Negative Vars Negative Power Factor Lagging Power Factor Leading QUADRANT 3 QUADRANT 4 Figure 4 4 Power Quadrants Page 4 7 IL17569C Page 4 8 FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Effective Date 12 05 POWER FLOW INDUCTION MOTOR TFT CURRENT TRANSFORMER Figure 4 5 Induction Motor Load BREAKER A BREAKER B BREAKER C
307. smaller than 18 AWG TB4 for the CT connections can support 10 to 14 AWG The lug screws of TB1 2 and 4 are not captive and may be backed out entirely for the purpose of securing a ring terminal The removable terminal plugs of TB3 can support direct connection of 14 to 20 AWG wires however ferrules are recommended on the wire termination to minimize shorting of frayed wires The following two figures Figure 2 2 and Figure 2 3 show typical wiring diagrams Additional wiring diagrams are shown in Section 6 Page 2 1 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 2 2 Effective Date 12 05 AC DC POWER SUPPLY LL TI 48 125VDC 100 250 Vdc TT 100 120VAC 100 240 Vac FP5000 EAT RLY Healthy N O RLY Healthy N C Alarm Com Alarm N O Alarm N C Reserved Reserved VA Main VB Main VC Main VX1 Aux VX2 Aux Vg Main FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT 4 RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT 5 DELTA OR OPEN DELTA PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF WYE GROUND CONNECTION Fig
308. sor values to be applied to the internal firmware in a simulation process The unit can be placed in a trip or no trip mode to verify coordination trip times demonstrate tripping and indicate trip times under user selected overload conditions The various functions that can be checked are Overvoltage Undervoltage Unbalanced voltage Instantaneous overcurrent Inverse time overcurrent Unbalance current protection Once the desired protection settings have been programmed the Test function can be used as follows e If a non trip test is desired the user must disarm tripping The first step is to enable the Disarm Control setting in the Set mode System Config setting menu Then the Arm Disarm Trip selection can be made from the test menu Press the Test button Enter the unit s password then select Fault Simulation under the test menu Enter the phasor values of voltages line to neutral for a Wye con nection or line to line for a Delta connection and phasor currents Refer to the FP 5000 protection settings to determine appropriate values for testing Select the Fault V amp l Phasors menu item and select the VA Phasor Input the desired VA magnitude from 0 to 150 V and the angle Press Enter and then press Previous Repeat these Steps to set the remaining voltages and currents to the desired test values then press Previous to return to the Fault Simulation menu Using the down arrow k
309. sp THD Current IA IB IC Magnitude THD Current IA IB IC THD Voltage L L Voltage VAB VBC VCA Magnitude THD L L Voltage VAB VBC VCA THD Voltage L N Voltage VA VB VC Magnitude THD L N Voltage VA VB VC Clock Time Date Display 4 4 Load Sub menu IC Magnitude VA Percent VB Percent VC Percent THD L L Voltages Mag THD L N Voltages rms Phase Current rms Aux Voltage IA Magnitude VX Magnitude IB Magnitude IC Magnitude rms Average Voltages VLLAvg Magnitude rms Ground Current VLNAvg Magnitude VAB Percent VA Magnitude VBC Percent VB Magnitude VCA Percent VC Magnitude Mag THD L L Voltages Clock VAB Magnitude Time HH MM SS VBC Magnitude Date MM DD YY VCA Magnitude 4 6 1 2 Selecting the Fundamental Phasors Sub menu This section allows the user to view the following fundamental Phasors for current and voltage See Display 4 5 Phasor Currents Magnitude and Angle IA IB IC IX IR Sequence Currents Magnitude and Angle 310 11 12 Phasor L L Magnitude and Angle VAB VBC VCA Phasor L N Magnitude and Angle VA VB VC VX Sequence Voltage Magnitude and Angle 3 0 V1 V2 Display 4 5 Fundamental Phasors Sub menu Current Phasors L N Voltage Phasors IA Magnitude amp Z IB Magnitude amp Z IC Magnitude amp Z VA Magnitude amp Z VB Magnitude amp
310. speret pr Prog Logic Default or custom Programmable Defaultor Custom Default 5 5 1 Remote Set Enables or disables remote Enable or disable Enable 5 5 1 download setpoints capability from rear communication port Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 3 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 4 Effective Date 12 05 Table 5 1 System Config continued Value Selection Setting Value Sec Prg w Bkr Program relay with breaker open or or Either Either 5 5 1 Remote Bkr Enable or disable remote breaker Enable or disable Disable 5 5 1 open close control from rear comm Set Grps Select the max number of different pee LS Select the means of control for Local Local Local 5 5 1 selecting the active setting group Communications IEEE Communications Cin Disarm Ctrl Enable disable of the Arm Disarm Enable or disable 2 Disable 5 control from the front panel Test Mode Output Trip1 amp Trip2 ONLY Energy Unit This is the selection for Energy kWh or MWh kWh 5 5 1 TOC Reset T Time Overcurrent RESET Time 1 to 20 cycles 4 5 5 Delay cycles Used when time MEME RUNE 5 2 option for resetis chosen 3 Bkr Oper PB Front panel Breaker Open Close Enable or disable Disable 5 5 1 usus Line Pos Seq Select the positive sequence line 0 to 90 degrees 70 5 5 1 Impedencommg Line Zero Seq Select the zero seq
311. ss Figure 12 5 Flash Loader Open the selected file Once this has been accomplished this screen will automatically close and the next screen will appear asking the Figure 12 7 Open S Record File user to verify the selected file see Figure 12 6 If verify is selected highly recommended a message will appear at the bottom of the screen stating that Verifying is in progress see Figure 12 7 This should take anywhere between 10 to 60 seconds depending on the file size Once this has been completed the screen will automati cally close and the next screen will appear If close is selected the screen will automatically close and the next screen will appear Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 12 17 IL17569B Page 12 18 Effective Date 12 05 The next screen will prompt the user to Enter Flash Load Mode see Figure 12 8 75000 sh rogrammer 2015 File Communication Flash Loader Warning Save all log data files Firmware changes may compromise data Clear Command Log Message Log The Boot Code Rev Date in the file 02 26 03 The Application Code Ver amp Rev in the file 00 69 The Application Code Rev Date in the file 04 10 03 The Product Name in the relay FP5000 The Boot Code Ver amp Rev in the relay 02 00 The Boot Code Rev Date in the relay 02 26 03 The Application Code Ver amp Rev in the relay 00 68 The Application Code
312. stants are present No value associated with this cause RAM Batt Warn The nonvolatile RAM Battery is low No value associated with this cause Clock Warning The real time clock has failed No value associated with this cause Test Mode The Test Mode has been entered or exited Enter or Exit EEPROM Warning The EEPROM has failed No value associated with this cause CalibrateWarn A recoverable Calibration error has occurred No value associated with this cause A nonrecoverable Calibration error has occurred CalibrateFail No value associated with this cause 12 2 1 1 Active Alarm Unlike the Event Log that contains a chronological list of events that the FP 5000 has observed the Active Alarm screen shows the user what trips or alarms have occurred when they are occurring The Active Alarm screen will only show the events that occur for the items you have programmed within the Alarm Relay Output setting The Alarm Relay Output default settings are set to show any protection trips any alarm trips any system trips and any breaker alarms See section 9 1 and 9 5 for additional information The events will remain on the Active Alarm screen until they have been cleared either externally or through the FP 5000 unit The type of event that occurs dictates the procedures necessary to clear the Active Alarm When the FP 5000 Active Alarm setting is Unlatched the Alarm LED will turn
313. state of all possible IOC pickups 51P TOC Phase Time Over Current is picked up TOC Pickup Status contains the status flags that or dropped out describe the state of all possible TOC pickups 51X TOC IX ground Time Over Current has TOC Pickup Status contains the status flags that describe picked up or dropped out the state of all possible TOC pickups 51R TOC IR Residual Time Over Current has TOC Pickup Status contains the status flags that describe picked up or dropped out the state of all possible TOC pickups 59M OV Main Phase Overvoltage has picked Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that up or dropped out describe all under and overvoltage pickups 27M UV Main Phase Undervoltage has picked Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that up or dropped out describe all under and overvoltage pickups 59A OV Auxiliary Overvoltage has picked up Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that describe or dropped out all under and overvoltage pickups Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 12 5 IL17569B Page 12 6 FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 Table 12 5 Event Pickup or Dropout Cause Table continued Cause Cause Description Value Given 59N OV Neutral Overvoltage has picked up or Voltage Pickup Status contains the status flags that dropped out describe all under and overvoltage pi
314. t remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs Watt Demand Alarm Units Threshold Delay m Sets the units for watts demand measurement KW or MW Sets the watts demand threshold level in units specified at or above which the power demand pickup occurs After pickup if the watt demand falls below the specified threshold a power demand dropout event occurs The demand interval is set in the Demand Setting section described later in this section Sets the number of minutes that the watt demand must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs VAR Demand Alarm Units Threshold Delay m Effective Date 12 05 Sets the units for VAR demand measurement KVAR or MVAR Sets the VARS demand threshold level in units specified at or above which the power demand pickup event occurs After pickup if the VARS demand falls below the specified threshold a power demand dropout event occurs The demand interval is set in the Demand Setting section described later in this section Sets the number of minutes that the var demand must remain at or above threshold before the specified trip output occurs Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 49 VA Demand Alarm Units Sets the units for VA demand measurement or Threshold Sets the VA demand threshold level in units specified at or above which the power demand pickup event occurs After pickup if
315. t Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatoneiectricai com IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 5 32 Effective Date 12 05 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Block 50P 11OC Logic gate setting to block 5 5 7 50P 1 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 INA Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Block 50P 2 IOC Logic gate setting to block 5 5 7 50P 2 IOC oper
316. t LED The red set LED located at the right upper corner of the Set pushbutton indicates that the relay is in the program settings mode Test LED The red test LED at the right upper corner of the Test pushbutton indicates that the relay is in the test mode The test LED flashes while a fault simulation is in progress Trip Indicator Battery Test LED A green Test LED is located under the bottom right front panel cover door It is above the trip indicating battery See Section 4 5 Page 4 23 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 4 24 Effective Date 12 05 This page left blank intentionally Page 4 24 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E TeN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 5 SETTING THE FP 5000 CAUTION FP 5000 PROTECTIVE RELAY SETTINGS MUST BE PRO GRAMMED BEFORE THE RELAY IS PUT INTO OPERATION CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN PROGRAMMING THE FP 5000 WHILE THE BREAKER IS CLOSED AND CURRENT IS FLOWING AN INCORRECT SETTING CONFIGURATION COULD CAUSE THE RELAY TO TRIP THE BREAKER WHEN SETTINGS ARE SAVED Cutler Hammer recommends becoming familiar with the following sections prior to programming the unit Notes 1 Therelay leaves the manufacturing plant with default settings many of which may be left unchanged It is up to the user to program the settings into the FP 5000 for the intended application before the relay is put into service 2 The
317. t Wiring TB1 See Section 3 Specifications for ratings of output contacts and check against controlled loads Figures 6 8 through 6 11 show typical connections of FP 5000 output relay contacts in control circuits However the outputs are completely programmable so there can be numerous choices in selecting and using these outputs for tripping alarming and auxiliary control The installation design engineer should refer to Sections 5 and 9 to understand the available output functions and programming options It is recommended to record and confirm the settings and also design a consistent connection of the contacts of the output relays to the control system Page 6 4 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer 6 3 4 Supply Wiring TB1 Refer to Figure 6 8 or 6 9 Connect terminals 101 and 102 to a Source of control power rated at either 100 120 Vac or 48 125 Vac Nominal values other than these voltages are not acceptable However the FP 5000 is capable of handling depressions dips and limited sustained variations in the normal course of service See Section 3 Specifications 6 3 5 Contact Input Wiring TB2 The optically isolated contact inputs are dry contact inputs The actuating or wetting voltage is provided by the FP 5000 Each input is activated by connecting it through an appropriate contact to the provided voltage The return common connection or dc negative rail associa
318. t is suggested that an individual s thumbs be placed against the outer chassis frame while the fingers grasp the front overlay bezel using the finger hold space provided by the release depression Hot removal and replacement of the inner chassis on activated circuits is possible However depending on the design of the alarm circuit the healthy alarm may be engaged On removal of the inner chassis verify that all the CT connections have shorted Inspect for obvious damage to the connectors both in the Outer Chassis and at the rear of the Inner Chassis Carefully reinsert the chassis being careful to engage the latches at the sides into the slots As the inner chassis is pushed into the outer chassis the outer frame will capture the latches causing the release handles to pop in and out When the inner chassis is fully inserted it should be flush with the outer chassis mounting frame Verify that the FP 5000 energizes and proper metering display is activated 7 6 Trip Test with Built in Function The FP 5000 has a self test function which allows voltages and currents both rms and phasor values to be applied to the internal firmware in a simulation process The unit can be placed in a trip or no trip mode to verify coordination trip times demonstrate tripping and indicate trip times under user selected overload conditions Refer to Section 11 2 5 1 Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17
319. t magnitude threshold 1 to 40 000 Disable Disable in primary units increments of 1 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 VAR Power System VAR Power Alarm Setting 5 5 3 Alarm Units Select units for VAR power kVAR or MVAR kVAR Threshold Select magnitude threshold 1 to 40 000 Disable Disable in primary units increments of 1 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 VA Power Alarm System VA Power Alarm Setting 5 5 3 Units Select units for VA power kVA or MVA kVA Threshold Select magnitude threshold 1 to 40 000 Disable Disable in primary units increments of 1 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 Watt Demand System Watt Demand 5 5 3 Alarm Alarm Setting Units Select units for watt demand kW or MW kW Threshold Select magnitude threshold 1 to 40 000 Disable Disable in primary units increments of 1 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 VAR Demand System VAR Demand 5 5 3 Alarm Alarm Setting Units Select units for VAR demand kVAR or MVAR kVAR Threshold Select magnitude threshold 1 to 40 000 Disable Disable in primary units increments of 1 Delay m Select delay time in minutes 0 to 60 minutes 0 increments of 1 Page 5 16 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N
320. tatus Control mode and select the Status sub menu The Status sub menu is shown below To change the active setting group the user must press the status control pushbutton to enter the status control mode and select the control sub menu The user must select the Sel Active Set Grp sub menu then select the Setting group desired to change the active setting group To set the FP 5000 to its factory default settings see Section 5 3 for details Status Status Test Status Active Set group 1 Input Status For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Bkr Oper PB E T N Cutler Hammer This setting allows the user to select the means of control for selecting the active setting group The default setting is Local which means the only way to change the active setting group is via the front panel in the Status Control Mode If itis set to communications the active setting group can only be chosen via the C H PowerPort or PowerNet software Local 4 Comm setting means the user can change the active setting group either by the front panel or via software If set to Cin then the only way to change the active setting group is through a contact input which the user would also have to program in the Contact input CFG settings To change the active setting group the user must press the Status Control pushbutton to enter the Status Control mode and select the Control sub menu The user must
321. tched Trip Allprot Trip All Alarms Sys Alm All Alarm Breaker All Alm Trip Indicator Trip Indicator Settings Default Setting Dropout Trip1 Trip2 Latched Enable Enable Alarm Indicator Alarm Indicator Settings Default Setting Dropout Alarm RIy6 Healthy Latched Enable Enable Pickup Indicator Pickup Indicator Settings Default Setting Dropout Volt OverFreg UnderFreg Unbalance Power Unlatched Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 59 IL17569C Page 5 60 Table 5 17 Clock FP 5000 FTN Effective Date 12 05 Cutler Hammer Clock Clock Settings Default Setting Date mode Time mode MM DD YY 12 Table 5 18 Communications INCOM INCOM Settings Default Setting Enable Address Baud rate Yes 1 9600 Accessory Bus Accessory Bus Settings Default Setting Address 2 Baud rate 9600 RS 232 RS 232 Settings Default Setting Baud rate 19200 Page 5 60 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 Mounting The FP 5000 is shipped with the Outer Enclosure assembled with a backing plate between the enclosure housing box and the front latching frame Thi
322. tective Relay It is provided as a guide for authorized and qualified personnel only in the selection and application of the FP 5000 Protective Relay Please refer to the specific WARNING and CAUTION below before proceeding If further informa tion is required by the purchaser regarding a particular installation application or maintenance activity a Cutler Hammer representative should be contacted Technical Support is available 24 hours a day by phoning Cutler Hammer Power Technical Quality Support at 1 800 809 2772 option 1 option 1 See also 12 3 Getting help from Cutler Hammer 1 3 1 WARRANTY AND LIABILITY INFORMATION CAUTION ALL SAFETY CODES SAFETY STANDARDS AND OR REGULA TIONS MUST BE STRICTLY OBSERVED IN THE INSTALLATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS DEVICE Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 1 1 A WARNING THE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS INCLUDED AS PART OF THE PROCEDURAL STEPS IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE FOR PERSON NEL SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT FROM DAMAGE AN EXAMPLE OF ATYPICAL WARNING LABEL HEADING IS SHOWN ABOVE TO FAMILIARIZE PERSONNEL WITH THE STYLE OF PRESENTATION THIS WILL HELP TO ENSURE THAT PERSONNEL ARE ALERT TO WARNINGS WHICH MAY APPEAR THROUGHOUT THE DOCUMENT IN ADDITION CAUTIONS ARE ALL UPPERCASE AND BOLDFACE CAUTION COMPLETELY READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MATERIAL PRESENTED IN THIS DOCUMENT BEFORE
323. ted with the wetting voltage is internal only and is not provided to the user See Figures 6 8 through 6 11 The wetting voltage and current requirements of the external contacts should be reviewed for compatibility with the FP 5000 s 40 Vdc source voltage and 2mA current draw The particular contacts to be connected depend on the settings programmed in the FP 5000 There is a complete list of functions which can be assigned to each of these inputs The engineer designing the installation should study Sections 5 and 9 to understand and designate the use if any of the discrete contact sensing inputs assigned to each input The discrete input circuits 1 Cin8 are totally isolated from the other circuits in the FP 5000 Supply or wetting voltages 40 Vdc are located on terminals C in source 1 and C in source 2 TB 205 210 and return is through each input Wetting current is limited to 2mA per input There are no external connections for common or return for these circuits CAUTION BEWARE OF LARGE SHUNT CAPACITANCE ACROSS CONTACTS OR IN SOLID STATE RELAYS CONNECTED TO THE FP 5000 DISCRETE INPUTS CHARGING CURRENT THROUGH THE CAPACITOR COULD CAUSE A FALSE INDICATION OF A CLOSED CONTACT KEEP TOTAL CAPACITANCE BELOW 0 05 MICROFARADS 6 3 6 Terminal Identification This section offers a brief description of the terminals mounted on the rear of the outer case The terminal designators are TB1 TB2 TB3 and CT connect
324. tes the FP 5000 calculates and updates the average power every minute for the past 30 minutes Refer to Section 5 Settings of this manual for setting changes The FP 5000 also saves the peak demand values for current and power The quantities represent the largest demand value since the demand values were last reset Peak demands for current and system power are date and time stamped to the nearest second Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer 4 6 1 5 Selecting the Minimum Sub menu This menu allows the user to view the following system parameters See Display 4 8 Minimum Sub menu Minimum currents IA IB IC IX IR Minimum L L Voltages VAB VBC VCA Minimum L N Voltages VA VB VC Minimum Power Watt Var VA Minimum Frequency Minimum Power Factor Apparent Displacement The Date and Time Stamp is also recorded on the same page with the minimum value display for each parameter occurrence Display 4 8 Minimum Sub menu Min Variable Variable Magnitude Date mm dd yy Time hh mm ss Min Rst Date amp Time Date mm dd yy Time hh mm ss Table 4 2 Minimum Sub menu Where lt Variable gt Variable FP 5000 IA Current IA IB Current IB IC Current IC IX Current IX IR Current IR V
325. th this cause RstHistLog The history log has been reset No value associated with this cause ClrDataLogger The data logger saved data is cleared No value associated with this cause Default Set The setpoints are returned to the default settings The Setpoint Sequence number Every pickup and dropout of an enabled protection function can be logged in the Event log Each class of pickups must be programmed to be logged see Section 5 Observing pickups in the Event log can show if a current or voltage transient is causing a pickup Most values given with each log can be accessed by selecting the line immediately below the Cause and pressing Enter The information given is a series of status flags that show the state of that status at the time of the event Table 12 5 shows all the possible event causes that are a pickup or a dropout of a protective function Table 12 5 Event Pickup or Dropout Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given IOC Phase Instantaneous Over Current IOC Pickup Status contains status flags that describe is picked up or dropped out the state of all possible IOC pickups 50X IOC IX ground Instantaneous Over IOC Pickup Status contains status flags Current is picked up or dropped out that describe the state of all possible IOC pickups 50R IOC IR Residual Instantaneous Over Current IOC Pickup Status contains status flags that describe is picked up or dropped out the
326. that the FP 5000 has observed It is similar to an operation log where all events are recorded as they happen This data is very useful to see the order of events that have occurred during a fault and is also useful for later analysis If a trip or alarm LED indication is present the Event Log is useful to explain the action behind the LED indication Once you view the explanation in the Event Log proceed to appropriate tables within this section for additional information on clearing the alarm The FP 5000 records 100 Event logs in a circular buffer before writing over the oldest log The logs are numbered with the most recent event marked by an index of 1 to the oldest event marked with an index of 100 As new logs are entered the index numbers are automatically changed to keep the newest log at index 1 The oldest event previously number 100 is discarded as a new event is logged After pressing the Log pushbutton and selecting the Event Log the indexed list of events are given Each event has an index number the list always starts with 1 followed by a title all possible titles are described in Table12 3 and the date that the event occurred The ability to log a pickup of protection functions the changing of input states and the changing of a communication driven logic variable must be enabled by programming setpoints see Section 5 The ability to ignore particular types of events is given so that events that occur often will n
327. the FP 5000 will cause the relay healthy contact output to de energize see Section 12 1 1 All FP 5000 failures will cause the Alarm LED on the front panel to light and the condition to be reported over the INCOM communication network usually displayed in the PowerNet application software The front display will also indicate failures and is described in Section 12 1 3 12 1 1 Relay Healthy Output The relay healthy alarm is a crucial part of notification for relay failure This contact output is energized during normal operation when no warnings or failures are present The relay healthy contact output is a Form C relay Typically the normally closed contacts are used and wired to an alarm that is guaranteed to get immediate attention If an FP 5000 relay self diagnostic failure is detected the relay healthy alarm will be de energized and the alarm will be sounded In the case of a catastrophic failure of the FP 5000 or its control power supply the normally closed relay will cause an alarm whenever power is removed from the relay healthy contact output WARNING FAILURE TO UTILIZE THE RELAY HEALTHY CONTACT OUTPUT IN A MANNER THAT WILL BRING IMMEDIATE ATTENTION IF DE ENERGIZED CAN RESULT IN A FAILURE TO PROTECT THE CIRCUIT FOR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME 12 1 2 Failures That Disable Protection In the case that an FP 5000 critical failure is detected the protection functions of the FP 5000 are disabled and all output relays except re
328. the IUB Threshold setting The Current Unbalance trip is set when the pickup condition exists for the delay time specified The current unbalance pickup and trip is reset when the positive sequence current drops below the IUB Threshold setting or I l drops below the IUB Unbalance setting minus 1 The settings associated with voltage unbalance or negative sequence voltage protection are listed in Table 8 2 Page 8 6 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Figure 8 9 50P Instantaneous Setting Adjustment Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer Table 8 2 Negative Sequence Current Protection Settings FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 8 7 8 5 3 Operation see Figure 8 10 In general if configured the zone out signal in a FP 5000 is driven when the protective device is picked up on an Instantaneous Over Current IOC or Inverse Time Over Current TOC in the same direction as specified in zone interlock out direction In particular if the Zone Out setpoint is Phase then any phase Parameter Range Step 46 1 IUB 0 10 to 20 pu 0 01 pu Threshold Disabled 46 1 IUB 296 to 40 196 Unbalance 46 1 IUB 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Delay 46 2 IUB 0 10 to 20 pu 0 01 pu Threshold Disabled 46 2 IUB 296 to 4096 196 Unbalance 46 2 IUB 0 to 9999 Cycles 1 Cycle Delay 8 4 Curve Overlapping Issues Several calculations are performed simultaneously for the
329. the battery holder does not light the batter has either expired or has been installed incorrectly The battery must be installed with the positive side up as shown on the front of the communication cover and the power must be ON The battery can easily be replaced with a 2032 20 x 3 2 mm 200 mAhr 3 0 V lithium button cell The battery must be installed while the FP 5000 is powered to eliminate unnecessary wear on the battery When power is removed the battery maintains the trip status latch and drives the appropriate LED This will occur even with the inner case removed from the outer chassis Afresh battery should last a minimum of 72 hours If the battery is inserted while the power is off it may remain in operation until it expires This will cause the battery to become useless if it is needed Note If the battery is inserted when the FP 5000 s power is off you may notice one or all of the LEDs flashing The LEDs will be restored to their proper state when the power is turned ON and in turn will discontinue the use of the battery 11 5 Power up LED Indicator Status Upon power up of the FP 5000 all 13 LEDs on the user interface overlay and the four communication board LEDs viewed through holes at the top of TB3 will light for 1 second If an LED fails to light this indicates there is an internal failure of the LED or related circuitry and the inner chassis is suspect and should be replaced or returned for service The Trip Batte
330. the close button will close the program and display the screen as shown in Figure 12 11 The user can either exit the FlashLoader Program or continue Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 12 19 Once the program has been loaded the user will be instructed to exit the flash load mode by pushing the Exit Flash Loader Mode pushbutton see Figure 12 14 Flesh Programme Phogeam to the appkcaton code Sector Blank Check Blak Check Parsed Gownioading code process Progam compacts osderMode the relay the Msh icad mode Figure 12 14 Flash Programmer The FP 5000 will display Flash Loader Mode Program Complete Exit FL Load Mode Once this has been completed the screen will prompt the user to force the relay to run in normal mode This is accomplished by clicking on File then Exit to exit the Flash Loader program thus returning the FP 5000 to its normal state see Figure 12 15 amp FP5000 Flarh Communication Foce the alay to sun in nema mode Wak ku the to setpond reruns to the noa mode Verb the miyy the operates nomal you exit the Flarh Prog ama nom the iel cannot check the way condbon before Corn rag the yakay Lacto Opein cP esata E wt Flew Losde Mode Force the relay tu
331. the setting press the enter button and change the set point to the desired setting You must acknowledge the change by pressing the enter button again to return to the previous level If you press the Previous button then the new setting will not be changed 5 4 2 1 Phase Overcurrent Settings 51P and 51P 2 PH TOC Curve These are the 51 device Phase Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Settings The user selects the characteristic shape the reset characteristic of the TOC curve and the direction There are three families of TOC curves to choose from Thermal Flat It 12 and 14 ANSI Extremely Inverse Very Inverse and Moderately Inverse IEC IEC A IEC B and IEC C TOC reset is a time overcurrent memory feature and has three setting choices Inst Instantaneous reset when the current drops below the pickup setting the TOC time resets to zero within 2 cycles Fixed time delay reset setting for the TOC curve The time delay is set to the TOC Reset T setting of the System Configuration Settings It will hold the time percent travel at the last value before the current drops below pickup for the set time TOC Reset T If the current Effective Date 12 05 T Delay Cutler Hammer value goes above pickup before the reset time has expired then the relay will begin to accu mulate time from its last value percent travel Percent Travel refers to the percent of the time delay that the timer has accumulat
332. the trip action begins within a cycle for a setting of 0 Completion of the trip depends upon the usual electromechanical contact output delays in the FP 5000 included in specification of trip time accuracy and in the time for the breaker to open The FP 5000 provides two timed or instantaneous phase trip functions 50P1 and 50P2 One of the trip functions can be used as a truly instantaneous with zero delay while the other can be used as a short delay function phase gt la up 8 3 2 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 51 Three families of curves provide inverse time overcurrent protection The three families are Thermal ANSI and IEC curves The FP 5000 provides 10 standard Time overcurrent curves Flat It and 14 for Thermal Extremely Inverse Very Inverse and Moderately Inverse for ANSI and IEC C IEC B and IEC A for IEC Thermal Thermal curves include It 1 and FLAT and are defined by the following equation 5 p kV T Trip Time in Seconds M D Time Multiplier Setting Slope 0 FLAT 1 It 2 l t 4 14 Inom K 3for Phase 1 for Ground lom Nominal Current either 5 or 1 A Measured Current Note The 5X multiplier in the FP 5000 Thermal Curve equation means the phase trip time at 3 per unit current is 5 D where D is the Time Multiplier setting The ground trip time at 1 per unit current is 5 D ANSI amp IEC The ANSI Moderately Inverse Very Inverse and Extremely Inverse c
333. the user may Maximum select The bullets below show all available monitoring data screens Use For more information visit www eatonelectrical com the Previous pushbutton to return to the Metering Main in order to Select another category of data screen The Metering Main menu provides easy access to the most common metering values such as Current Voltage Power Energy Demand Power Factor Frequency THD All values display the most recent measured and computed values of each system parameter All the metering display information is also accessible through the communication port which is described in detail in Section 10 Data Communications Page 4 5 E T N Cutler Hammer THD L N Voltages IL17569C FP 5000 Page 4 6 Effective Date 12 05 4 6 1 1 Selecting the Load Sub menu Mag THD Currents This sub menu allows the user to view the following rms system 1 Magnitude parameters See Display Load Sub menu 4 4 The FP 5000 IB Magnitude calculates rms through the 15 harmonic If Delta connected VTs are used then L N voltages will not be displayed rms Currents IA IB IC IX IR e Average rms Current 1 avg Current unbalance 12 11 rms L L Voltage VAB VBC VCA rms L N Voltage VA VB VC VX Average L L Voltage VLL Avg Average L N Voltage VLN Avg Voltage Unbalance V2 V1 Power Watt Var VA Frequency Power Factor App Di
334. tifunc tion panel mounted microprocessor based relay designed for both ANSI and IEC applications Figure 1 1 It is a self contained device which operates from either ac or dc control power and provides true rms sensing of each phase and ground current Only one relay is required per 3 phase circuit Current voltage and operator selectable protective functions are integral to each device The FP 5000 is designed to protect the mains ties or feeders at any voltage level It is primarily applied on medium voltage distribution circuits up to 69 kV The FP 5000 monitors several primary and derived electrical parameters of the system 1 2 Audience The audience for this document is the Specifying or System Engineer the operating personnel and the troubleshooting person nel This document will guide the system user to apply and program the FP 5000 The document will provide operating information enabling the operating user to start and trip the breaker associated with the FP 5000 The operator can refer to this publication regarding any operation of the FP 5000 This document will also provide information to program the FP 5000 and use the trouble shooting features to collect and analyze historical trending and oscillographic data 1 3 Safety and Caution Notices Disclaimers This technical document is intended to cover most aspects associ ated with the installation application operation and maintenance of the Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Pro
335. ting Frequency 60 List 50Hzor60Hz Phase Seq or ACB CT Connect 3 wire 4CT In 4CT lg PH CT Ratio 500 Inom 2 1 lom to 6000 CT where CT is 1 or 5A based on CT board jumper 1 NN NU CT Primary 500 1 3 lom to 6000 CT where CT is 1 or5 8 based on CT board jumper i i i i 2 o e 3 3 c o 3 TOC Reset Time TOC Reset 1 20 Cycles Protection Group1 Phase Overcurrent 51P PH TOC Shape MOD List IT l2T 14T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB IECC 51P PH TOC Reset Inst Calc T Delay 51P PH TOC Direction Forward Reverse Both 51P PH TOC Pickup 0 1 to 4 0 or Disable 51P PH TOC Time Mult 0 05 to 10 0 50P 1 PH IOC Pickup 0 1 to 20 0 or Disable 0 to 9999 cycles 50P 1 PH IOC Direction Forward Reverse Both 1110 20 0 or Disable 50P 2 PH IOC Delay c 155 1 0109999 50P 1 PH IOC Direction Forward Reverse Both 50P 2 PH IOC Pickup 1 1 A 1 PH IOC Delay c Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 2 7 IL17569C FP 5000 E T N Cutler Hammer Page 2 8 Effective Date 12 05 Table 2 1 Minimum List of Functions Which MUST be Programmed continued Default Display Setting IX Overcurrent 51 IXTOC Shape XTRM List IT l2T 14T FLAT MOD VERY XTRM IECA IECB IECC STWTOCReset Cac List mstOae TDely 5T XTOCDiredion Boh List Forwa
336. tings The Instantaneous reset appears as a saw tooth and will not reach a trip time for this example The T Delay setting holds the time fixed at last value for the specified reset time delay This model will eventually accumulate enough time and trip provided the current is not below the pickup setting for a time greater than the reset time The calculated reset option emulates the electromechanical disc action and will slowly reset over time to complete reset This model will also trip in time TRIP LEVEL 51 W CALCULATED RESET ZERO TRIP LEVEL 51 W TIME DELAY RESET ZERO TRIP LEVEL 51 W INST RESET RESET ZERO TRIP LEVEL 51 PICKUP ZERO Figure 5 5 Graphical Representation of the TOC Reset T Setting Effective Date 12 05 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 43 Time t as shown is less than the TOC Reset T time delay setting If t was greater than the TOC Reset T time delay setting then the 51 w Time Delay Reset curve above would reset to zero The direction setting enables the user to select the direction s of current flow for which operation is permitted forward reverse or both See Figure 5 1 and Figure 5 2 in Section 5 4 1 for more information 51P and 51P 2 PH TOC Setting These are the 51 device Phase Inverse Time Overcurrent pickup and time multiplier settings A proper coo
337. tinued Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Datalogger Datalogger Settings 5 5 4 8 11 Mode Select mode of datalogger to be Cont or 1 Pass Cont continuous overwrites or 1 pass Trigger Select trigger type Auto or manual Auto Interval s Select interval of datalogging 1 to 3600 seconds 900 in seconds increments of 1 Value 1 Set Value 1 to be logged IA IB IC IX IR lavg IO la 11 12 VA VB VC Value 2 Set Value 2 to be logged VLNavg VAB VBC VCA Ib VLLavg VO V1 V2 Freq Value 3 Set Value 3 to be logged W VAR Dsp PF App PF IA Demand IB Demand Value 4 Set Value 4 to be logged IC Demand W Demand Ix VAR Demand VA Demand Value 5 Set Value 5 to be logged 1 Cin2 Cin3 Cin4 Va Cin5 Cin6 Cin7 Cin8 Value 6 Set Value 6 to be logged LG1 LG2 LG3 LG4 Vb LG5 LG6 TG1 TG2 Value 7 Set Value 7 to be logged TG4 TG5 TG6 IA Vc THD IB THD IC THD Value 8 Set Value 8 to be logged VA THD VB THD VC THD Vx VAB THD VBC THD VCA THD Waveform Waveform Capture Settings 5 5 4 Capture 8 10 Records Select size of the waveform 4x64 8x32 16x16 16x16 capture using buffer x cycles buffer x cycles PreTrigger Select of cycles of 1 to 15 cycles 2 preTrigger data increments of 1 OSC Trigger Select how to trigger waveform Disable Overwrite or Lock Overwrite TRIP2 capture on Trip 2 operation OSC Trig
338. tion XTRM Inst Both 51R IR TOC Curve 51 IR TOC Setting 51R IR TOC Setting 50R 1 IR IOC 1 50R 2 IR IOC 2 Pickup pu Time Mult 0 10 1 00 Page 4 12 Lp 50R 1 IR IOC 1 Pickup pu Delay c Direction 2 00 60 Both 50R 2 IR IOC 2 Pickup pu Delay c Direction 2 00 600 Both Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Unbalance Settings Display Unbalance Setting 47 1 Voltage Unbal 47 1 Voltage Unbal 46 1 Current 7 Threshold V Disable A V2 V1 20 Delay c 600 W y l gt 46 1 Current Unbal E Threshold pu Disable 96 12 11 20 Delay 600 x Main V Protection Display gt Main V Protection 27M 1 Undervoltgage Phases Any One 27M 1 Undervoltgage Threshold V Disable 59M 1 Overvoltgage Delay 1200 LOP Block amp Alarm gt 59M 1 Overvoltgage Phases Any One Threshold V Disable Delay 1200 S P Xf LOP Block amp Alarm LOP Block Enable Alrm Delay 5 Note 1 is for Main 1 referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in the System Configuration Aux V Protection Display Aux V Protection 27A 1 Undervoltgage Threshold V Disa
339. tions Status Control Set and Test Pushbuttons amp The Set and Test pushbuttons are accessed via the security door at the bottom left of the display panel The Set pushbutton is used to enter the Setting Mode to program the settings The Test pushbutton is used to enter the Test Mode which will run self tests and exercise the outputs See Section 5 Settings and Section 11 Testing for detailed information on setting and testing the FP 5000 and Open Pushbuttons Cose Open The Open and Close pushbuttons are used to initiate the breaker to open or close Once either of these pushbuttons is pressed the user only has 10 seconds to confirm the open or close breaker action See Section 8 for detailed information on breaker control These buttons must be activated via settings to be operational If disabled no operation of the breaker will occur Page 4 4 FP 5000 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer Previous Pushbutton The Previous pushbutton allows the user to go to the previous menu Once the user is ina sub menu the user can push the previous pushbutton to revert back to the last display Screen It is also used when the user is updating settings to cancel out of saving the settings Single and Double Up Down Arrow Pushbuttons Both of these pushbuttons allow the user to scroll up and down the disp
340. tions operations and or warnings of the FP 5000 Please refer to Figure 4 1 for each LED location Operational LED The Operational LED is a green flashing LED that flashes for a 1 second period 50 duty cycle It indicates that the FP 5000 is operational Breaker Closed LED The red Breaker Closed LED indicates that the circuit breaker is closed based on the state of the 52a and 52b inputs Breaker Open LED The green Breaker Open LED indicates that the circuit breaker is open based on the state of the 52a and 52b inputs Phase Trip LED The red Phase Trip LED indicates that a phase overcurrent trip condition has occurred if the 50P 1 2 or protective functions operate Ground Trip LED The red Ground Trip LED indicates that a ground overcurrent trip condition has occurred if the 50X 1 50X 2 50R 1 50R 2 51X or 51R protective functions operate Other Trip LED The red Other Trip LED indicates that a trip condition other than phase or ground overcurrent has occurred Alarm LED The red Alarm LED indicates that an alarm condition has occurred as programmed in the alarm indicator Pickup LED The yellow Pickup LED indicates the presence of a pickup condition as programmed in the pickup indicator Auxiliary LED The function of the yellow Auxiliary LED is user defined The logic functions may be used to control the state of this LED which is based on the state of the inputs programmed for the Aux LED output Se
341. tions when Current Relay the current in an ac circuit exceeds a predetermined value 52 ac Device that is used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal conditions Circuit Breaker or to interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency conditions 55 Power Factor Relay Relay that operates when the power factor in an ac circuit rises above or below a predetermined value 59 Overvoltage Relay Relay that operates when the voltage rises above a programmed value 67 Directional Relay that functions on a desired value of ac overcurrent flowing in a predeterminated Overcurrent direction 81 Frequency Relay Relay that operates when the frequency falls outside a programmed range Page 13 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 13 5 13 4 Time Current Curves A variety of inverse time overcurrent curves for the FP 5000 are shown in this section ANSI Moderately Inverse Curves o c o o o 2 o 1 Mutiples of Pickup Current Figure 13 1 ANSI Moderately Inverse Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 13 5 111
342. tive VAR apparent VA Power factor apparent and displacement Frequency IO mm oO Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 Power and current demand J Min max values K Energy Control power ac or dc control power 100 120 Vac 50 60 Hz or 48 125 Vdc B ac or dc control power 100 250 vdc or 100 240 ac 50 60 Hz C Consult factory for availability of other voltage power supplies Nonvolatile memory for Settings Waveforms Sequence of Event Logs Trip Logs and Trending Determine condition of acquired data relative to settings A Current voltage and frequency protection Monitoring and reporting of additional system information A Oscillography B Sequence of events recording C Trip target data D Real time clock E Breaker wear trip coil F Signal harmonic content Zone interlocking User access to processed data through PowerNet and PowerPort Meets ANSI IEC UL CUL standards Communication Features Local HMI Addressable Local Communication Port RS 232 on 9 pin DIN Remote communication ports A INCOM FSK Protocols A INCOM IMPACC Communications Standard IL 17384 Part A version 3 0 B MODBUS RTU Self Test Features Hardware A Processor integrity B RAM C PROM checksum D Analog input circuitry Application A Comparison of current flow with apparent state of breaker B Comparison of apparent and set phase sequence
343. to 9999 cycles second Off Delay c Selecttimer gate off delay 0 to 9999 cycles second Timer Gate 3 Timer gate 3 Settings Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or all f Timer Gate to apply In Logic input See Logic Input Options Unused j Delay Unit Selectifthe delayis based on Cycle Second Cycle On Delay c Selecttimer gate on delay 0 to 9999 cycles second Off Delay c Select timer gate off delay 0 to 9999 cycles second ees o Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All 1 Timer Gate to apply In Logic input See Logic Input Options Unused O ese Delay Unit Selectifthe delayis based on Cycle Second Cycle On Delay c Selecttimer gate on delay 0 to 9999 cycles second een Off Delay c Selecttimer gate off delay 0 to 9999 cycles second Page 5 28 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 29 Programmable Logic cont Display Setting Description Setpoint Range TT Set Group Select protection setting group for 1 2 3 4 or All 1 In Logic input See Logic Input Options Unused x 2 Delay Unit Selectifthe delayis based on Cycle Second Cycle On Delay c Selecttimer gate on delay 0 to 9999 cycles seco
344. to setting record The setpoints should be verified by comparing to the system setting records The FP 5000 settings can be verified in the self test mode by selecting disarmed and performing a test Otherwise the test feature can be used in the armed mode where the user can expect to trip and interrupt power downstream of the breaker 11 2 2 Verification of Communications Ports INCOM wiring rules are covered in Section 10 Ensure that proper connections and terminations are being followed A red transmit LED can be viewed at the back of the outer chassis at the top of TB3 It lights only when responding to a valid INCOM command to its programmed address If the unit under test is connected to Cutler Hammer s PowerNet Systems software normal communica tions can be verified in a number of ways Active monitor screens are an obvious indication of a proper link If the communications is compromised then an alarm will be logged An INCOM communications statistics buffer can be accessed to determine the link quality Use this information to determine the quality of the link Refer to your PowerNet manual for details An occasional error is acceptable excessive errors can indicate a problem either in the product or in the twisted pair interface in general Make certain when configuring PowerNet that the baud rate and INCOM address of the FP 5000 corresponds to the PowerNet configuration The FP 5000 supports 9600 baud FSK mode on
345. tten Protection Analog Disabled The analog input The circuit is not protected replace Disabled Analog Input has failed to respond FP 5000 immediately Input Failure or has read a reference input incorrectly Protection Settings Disabled If Fail the setpoints The circuit is not protected replace Disabled Setting have been corrupted FP 5000 immediately Failure Display Warning Display Enabled The display content Replace FP 5000 at the earliest could not be verified convenience Protection Calibrated Disabled At power up the The circuit is not protected replace Disabled Relay calibration constants FP 5000 immediately Not Calibrated are corrupted Nonvolatile RAM Enabled The NVRAM battery If needed store all log and history Memory Battery Battery is failing data before power down This Warning can be done with the PowerNet application software Contact factory for replacement instructions Real Time Clock Clock Enabled The real time clock Check the clock for proper time Warning has malfunctioned and future time keeping If in error replace at the earliest convenience EEPROM EEPROM Enabled The EEPROM can Replace the FP 5000 at the earliest Warning not be read or convenience It is possible that the written FP 5000 will fail to protect the circuit the next time powered up Page 12 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 0
346. tting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec Block 50R 1 IOC Logic gate setting to block 5 57 50R 1 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 Aor All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 INA Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Block 50R 2 IOC Logic gate setting to block 5 5 7 50R 2 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Set Group Select protection setting group 1 2 3 4 or All 1 for logic gate to apply IN1 Select logic type for logic input 1 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN2 Select logic type for logic input 2 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN3 Select logic type for logic input 3 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 IN4 Select logic type for logic input 4 See Logic Input Options Unused Table 5 10 Block 50R 3 IOC Logic gate setting to block 5 5 7 50R 3 IOC operation 9 4 9 6 Function Select logic function to apply OR AND NOR Disable to logic gate NAND Disable Se
347. ttings Default Setting Mode Trigger Interval s Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Value 6 Value 7 Value 8 Cont Auto 900 la Ib Ix Va Vb Vc Vx Waveform Capture Waveform Capture Settings Default Setting Records PreTrigger OSC Trigger TRIP2 OSC Trigger dV dl OSC Trigger Logic LG6 OSC Trigger Cntrl PB OSC Trigger Comm 16x16 2 Overwrite Disable Overwrite Overwrite Overwrite Table 5 15 Contact Input CFG Contact Input Config Contact Input Config Settings Default Setting Cin1 Cin2 Cin3 Cin4 Cin5 Cin6 Cin7 Cin8 52a 52b BFI Bkr Trouble Remote Open Remote Close Remote Reset user defined Page 5 58 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E TN Cutler Hammer Table 5 16 Output Config FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 59 Output Trip1 Output Trip1 Settings Default Setting Monitor On Function OR Dropout Off Delay Off Delay c 5 IN1 Trip AllProt IN2 Cntrl OpenBkr Output RIy3 Output RIy3 Settings Default Settings Function OR Dropout Latched IN1 Trip BF Output Rly5 Output Rly5 Settings Default Settings Function Dropout Off Delay IN1 OR Off Delay 10 Breaker Close Bkr Output Alarm RIy6 Output Alarm Settings Default Settings Function Dropout IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OR Unla
348. uence line 0 to 90 degrees 70 5 5 1 polarizing method Gnd Dir V 3VO Select the zero sequence voltage Calculated Measured Calculated 5 5 1 Source source for ground direction 0 Calculated 1 Measured NN E polarizing Gnd Dir V 310 Select the zero sequence voltage Calculated Measured Calculated Source source for ground direction 0 Calculated Ir mi Ele polarizing 1 Measured Ix Off dual 370 1 15 Dir Switch Select memory voltage 1 to 15 Volts 5 1 threshold Increments of 1 This setting affects other settings The user must save settings after changing this setting which will take the user out of program mode The user must then reenter program mode to continue programming the remaining settings If enabled the user must go to the Test Mode by pressing the test button select Arm Disarm Trip then select Arm Trip or Disarm Trip setting CT secondary rating is automatically detected lm 1 A or 5 This setting is the programmed time delay for the T Delay setting of the time overcurrent Reset setting See Curve settings for 51P 51R and 51X elements OG 5 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 5 5 Table 5 2 Protection Setting Group Phase Overcurrent Phase time overcurrent 51P 1 amp 51P 2 and instantaneous 50P 1 amp 50P 2 protective d
349. uency set threshold Note Phase A voltage must be greater than 10 V for this function to operate 5 4 2 8 Breaker Failure 50BF Bkr Config This is the 50BF device Breaker Failure Configuration setting The Bkr Config sets the conditions for the FP 5000 to detect a breaker failure condition This function is only activated after initiation The four 50BF Bkr Config setting descriptions are shown below 50BF Bkr Config set to Off The 50BF device is turned off so no breaker failure can be detected internally or externally 50BF Bkr Config set to Internal The 50BF function will be initiated by an internal trip signal 50BF Bkr Config set to External The 50BF function will be initiated by an external signal 50BF Bkr Config The 50BF function will be initiated by set to Both either an internal or external trip signal 50BF Bkr This includes the 50BF device Failure Breaker Failure setting which is only applied if the 50BF Bkr Config setting is not set to off The default con figuration for the output logic maps the Breaker Failure trip i e Breaker State Lockout to output Relay 3 so that a separate lockout relay device 86 can be used to provide backup tripping The breaker failure function continues to monitor all phase currents after a trip is initiated by either the FP 5000 or an external device The breaker failure trip output operates if the phase or ground currents do not drop below the
350. units are used to supervise the relay elements establish the fault direction see figure 5 3 that are responsible for tripping ground faults Ground direction supervision includes zero sequence voltage polarizing negative sequence voltage polarizing and dual polariz ing This includes single phase to ground and double phase to ground faults see figures 5 3 and 5 4 Ground Directional Units Maximum Torque 67VIX lo o x 0 180 180 00 180 V V V Gnd Dir V 3V0 te Vear amp V3I0 Source These settings allow the user to select if the zero sequence voltage is calculated internally or measured through the 4th voltage input and 4th CT A zero sequence current is compared to a zero sequence voltage to establish the fault direction in the zero sequence voltage polarized direction unit The polarizing current shall be measured through an independent CT that reflects current passing through a power transformer neutral or delta winding A polariz ing current is compared to a zero sequence Figure 5 1 Phase Direction I Imin ES 67PZ0 67P V b V gt Vmem E 7 7 A 200ms 0 Derive Vmem m Figure 5 2 Phase Directional Supervision Logic Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 41 IL17569C Page 5 42 Effective Dat
351. up but not trip Setto OR AND NOR NAND Disable The Function setting defines the output of the blocking logic gates with inputs IN1 IN2 INS and IN4 The default setting is Disable See Section 9 for a detailed description of the logic settings This setting defines the Setting Group for which the logic gate programming is active This setting is also linked to the System Config settings which is where the total number of settings groups 1 to 4 is programmed These settings define the logic inputs to Logic Gates 1 through 6 See the settings table and Section 9 for a complete description of the logic input settings Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 5 53 IL17569C Page 5 54 Effective Date 12 05 5 4 8 Cold Load Pickup Settings A greater amount of current than normal load current may be experienced due to the load inrush when manually or automatically closing the breaker after it had been open for a prolonged time This high starting current causes some overcurrent elements to unneces sarily trip the breaker The cold load pickup function prevents this from happening The cold load pickup function is initiated only if 1 Cold load pickup control function is enabled 2 The breaker had been opened for a specified amount of time before closing 3 Not in the process of auto reclosing Once a cold load pickup control is initiated the instantaneous overcurrent elements cur
352. ure PowerNet Software uses distributed client server architecture The individual applications act as clients sending control commands and requests for information to NetPower DeviceServers Upon receiving a request from a PowerNet Software application or based on pre configured parameters NetPower DeviceServers communicate with devices to either acquire data or control devices The distributed architecture of PowerNet Software allows you to run different applications on one or more computers at the same time You can also run multiple copies of some applications on different computers simultaneously In addition applications can be run at a remote networked location via an intranet or the Internet 10 4 3 Licensing PowerNet Software uses a floating license system to license the PowerNet Software applications Each copy of a PowerNet Software application requires a license to run it 10 4 4 PowerNet Software Applications PowerNet Software is comprised of NetPower DeviceServers that communicate with devices to either acquire data or control devices and applications that allow you to communicate with the NetPower DeviceServer Some of the applications allow you to generate reports and bills based on data collected from devices Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit FP 5000 IL17569B Effective Date 12 05 Page 10 3 10 4 5 Core Components The core components are in most cases the minimum set of component
353. ure 50BF device settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Selected Refer to reum JVaeSeleston abe _ n nn 7 NR 3 Config Select how breaker failure is Off Internal External Both Off BF Ph Current Select phase current pickup in per 2 to 500 disable Disable unit values Increments of 1 BF Gnd Current Select ground current pickup per 2 to 500 disable Disable unit values cremen of 1 Delay c Select delay time in cycles 0 to 5999 1 cycle increments Power racion Selects Apparent ET 55A and Displacement 55D device settings Value Selection Setting Value Sec Select power factor to trigger on 0 50 to 1 00 lag 0 50 to Disable 99 lead disable m 1 0 01 increments Resent PF Select power factor to reset on 0 50 to 1 00 lag 0 50 to Disable 99 lead disable 0 01 increments DENEN OO 1 second increments Displacem ent Power Factor 5 5 2 9 Trigger PF Select power factor to trigger on 0 50 to 1 00 lag 0 50 to Disable 99 lead disable IN 0 01 increments Select power factor to reset on 0 50 to 1 00 lag 0 50 to Disable 99 lead disable NEN 0 01 increments Delay s Select delay time in seconds 0 to 1000 seconds 1 second increments Zone Interlocking Selects Zone In and Zone Out settings Display Setting Description Setpoint Range Default Selected Refer to Value Selection Setting Value Sec
354. ure 2 2 FP 5000 Simple Wye Connected Application Page 2 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 2 3 AC DC POWER SUPPLY 48 125VDC 100 250 Vdc 100 120 100 240 Vac FP5000 Power Supply 101 Input d Power Suppl 102 input LY Healthy om LY Healthy 103 8 209 BREAKER o 0 210 111 211 LY f Healthy 205 5 206 o 207 gt gt gt 220 ZD 0D oko e B 2 12 0 212 113 LY 3 Com VA Main 213 14 HRLY NO VB Main 115 2 VC Main Ei 116 H Trip 2 NO VX1 Aux E Trip 1 Com VX2 Aux Trip 1 N O A pap IB 1 iC fe FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT DELTA OR OPEN DELTA PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF WYE GROUND CONNECTION Figure 2 3 FP 5000 Simple Wye Connected Application with Sync Check Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit ww
355. urves are defined by ANSI C37 112 The IEC curves are defined by IEC 255 3 The ANSI and IEC families of curves are defined by the same equation and differ only in the selection of constants A B and P as contained in Table 8 1 The trip time T in seconds is defined by the following equation T Trip Time in seconds E A D Time Multiplier Setting T D Y B Pickup Current Setting l Measured Current lou A B P Constants Page 8 2 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com The reset function describes what occurs to the accumulated tally of the TOC function if the current goes below pickup The accumulated tally is similar to how far an induction disk has traveled if an electromechanical relay was being used The time delayed reset function provides improved coordination with electromechanical and other relays The reset function is very important if the breaker re closes quickly after tripping The FP 5000 allows a choice of three different reset functions Instantaneous Reset If the current is less than the programmed pickup current the accumulated memory is erased Time Delay This is exactly like the instantaneous reset except the current must be below pickup for the set number of cycles before the accumulated memory is removed Calculated For the thermal curves the following reset time is given to zero the accumulated memory Time to Reset Accumulated Memory Time Multiplier Settin
356. use Table Cause Cause Description Value Given CommLogic Alt Communication Logic variable has changed state Communication Logic Status contains all 4 communication logic variable states Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 12 9 IL17569B FP 5000 Page 12 10 Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer As described in Section 12 1 the FP 5000 does a series of self diagnostic checking If any self test should fail the event is logged automati cally in the event log See Table 12 11 for a complete list of self test event causes Table 12 11 Self Test Event Cause Table Cause Cause Description Value Given Bt Flash Err Boot Flash Checksum Failure No value associated with this cause ProgFlash Err Program Flash Checksum Failure No value associated with this cause Ext RAM Fail External RAM Error Bad RAM Address TPU RAM Fail Internal TPU RAM Error Bad Internal TPU RAM Address Analog In Err Analog to digital conversion error No value associated with this cause Set Warning A recoverable Settings setpoint No value associated with this cause error has occurred Set Failure error has occurred A nonrecoverable Settings setpoint No value associated with this cause Display Warn Display Warning read back test failed No value associated with this cause RelNotCalibra No Calibration con
357. uts can be configured to Data log Trigger when this input becomes true the data logging function is started Control Pushbutton A data logging function is started from the FP 5000 front faceplate This can be accomplished by pushing the Status Control button selecting Control and pressing enter selecting Trigger Datalogger and pressing enter and pressing enter a second time This function is useful for testing the data logging function Communication Channel Using external communications channel to initiate the data logging function The Interval setpoint determines how often data will be recorded This parameter along with the knowledge that the data will be sampled a maximum of 1024 times sets the period of time that the logging will take place without loss of information If set to 1 second the total time of recording of data without loss is 17 minutes and 4 Seconds If set to 3600 seconds the total time of recording of data without loss is 42 days 16 hours The Value setpoints eight in all describe what data values are recorded at each interval Eight data measurements can be selected from the following All current inputs IA IB IC IX IR lavg All current sequential components 10 11 12 All phase current demand IA Demand IB Demand IC Demand All phase current Total Harmonic Distortion IA THD IB THD IC THD All Wye voltage inputs VA VB VC VLNavg Use only if voltage connecti
358. values of the FP 5000 Load parameters Fundamental Phasors Energy Demand and Minimum amp Maximum values These values include system power currents amp voltages frequency power factors THD current amp voltage phasors system demands etc Refer to Section 4 6 to see all parameters displayed while in Monitor Mode View Setting Pushbutton The View Setting pushbutton allows the user to go in to View Settings Mode and view all of the FP 5000 settings It is important to note when pressing the View Setting pushbutton the user can only go in and view the settings not change the settings Refer to Section 4 6 to see all settings displayed while in View Settings Mode Refer to Section 5 for programming the settings Log Pushbutton The Log pushbutton allows the user to go in to the Log Mode and view all of the data Log recorded by the FP 5000 The Log data consists of the Trip Log Event Log and History Log Refer to Section 4 6 to see all data displayed while in Log Mode Status Control Pushbutton The Status Control pushbutton allows the user to go in to the Status Control Mode view all of the status parameters and set all of the control parameters of the FP 5000 The user can also view the Boot Code and Application Code versions by selecting the Version sub menu Refer to Section 4 6 to see all status and control displays and options Refer to Section 5 for programming the control op
359. ve function operations at the time of the trip Effective Date 12 05 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Page 12 13 IL17569B Page 12 14 FP 5000 Effective Date 12 05 Table 12 15 Trip Log Record Line by Line continued Line Display Description 21 Output Gate Status A group of status flags detailing the state of the logic output gate driving each output relay as well as the state of auxiliary LED at the time of the trip 22 Logic Block Status A group of status flags detailing the logical state of the programmable blocking gates output at the time of the trip 23 Logic Gate Status A group of status flags detailing the logical state of the programmable logic gates and timing gates at the time of the trip 24 SYSALM Pickup A group of status flags detailing the system alarm pickups at the time of the trip 25 SYSALM Timeout A group of status flags detailing the system alarm time outs at the time of the trip 26 Breaker Status A group of status flags detailing the breaker state and associated alarms at the time of the trip 27 Direction Status A group of status detailing the state of all the direction units at the time of the trip 28 Sync Control A group of status detailing the state of sync check related flags and cold load pickups at the time of the trip 29 Ogx Input Settings Shows the program settings of the inputs on the output logic gate that ha
360. vented if the open signal is being requested A slow breaker alarm is raised if the breaker closes too slowly see 8 9 8 Slow Breaker Alarm f the faceplate pushbutton is used a warning message is given if already in the closed state or a breaker state alarm see 8 9 6 Breaker State Alarm is active or a slow breaker alarm see 8 9 8 Slow Breaker Alarm is active 8 9 3 Open Breaker The FP 5000 has been designed to issue an open breaker signal from one of its programmable contact outputs The default NO STATE MONITORING ALL OUTPUTS 0 y BKR STATE OPEN GREEN LED MONITOR1 VALID gt MONITOR1 MONITOR2 VALID Be BKR STATE CLOSED RED LED ON gt 0 02 PER UNIT gt 057 TRIP 1 MONITOR EVENT MONITOR2 TRIP 1 FAULT SIMULATION 5 BKR OPERATIONS DUTY ACCUMULATION PER PHASE ULATE Figure 8 12 Breaker Monitoring Times in cycles unless stated otherwise Page 8 12 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 FRONT PANEL CLOSE BREAKER gt 7 CLOSE BLOCKING CN PANEL CLOSE aug cios esl og CLOSE REQUES BKR CLOS Page 8 13 LATCI BKR STATE CLOSED gt log 1 N SYNC E REQUEST SYNC U ij E 8 d NO STATE MONITORING gt
361. w eatonelectrical com Page 2 3 1117569 Page 2 4 Effective Date 12 05 AC DC POWER SUPPLY FP 5000 48 125VDC 100 250 Vdc 100 120 VAC 100 240 Vac Power Supply Input Power Supply Input LY Healthy om LY Healthy 0 LY Healthy arm Com arm N O arm N C BREAKER CLOSE F ll 52 FP5000 TB2 Pewee ELCHE 0 0 2 2 2 Vg Main 2 2 2 2 2 2 01 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FOR MAXIMUM BREAKER DIAGNOSTICS USE BOTH 52A AND 52B CONTACTS SOME DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO IS USED A RELAY FAILURE ALARM SHOULD PROVIDE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION AS CIRCUIT IS NO LONGER PROTECTED RELAY FAILURE OUTPUT IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED FP5000 CAN INITIATE A BREAKER CLOSE VIA THE FRONT PANEL INTERFACE AND OR REMOTE ACTIVATION THROUGH COMMUNICATION OR DISCRETE INPUT 4 RESIDUAL CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF ZERO SEQUENCE CT E T N Cutler Hammer 52B WYE GROUND PT CONNECTION MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF DELTA OR OPEN DELTA CONNECTION Figure 2 4 FP 5000 Simple Open Delta Application Page 2 4 For more information visit www eatonelectrical com Effective Date 12 05 E T N Cutler Hammer AC DC POWER SUPPLY FP 5000 48 125VDC 100 250 Vdc 100 120VAC 100 240 Vac FP5000 Power Supp
362. wn pushbuttons or to step forward or backward through a list of settings a page at a time 2 Use the Previous pushbutton to back out of the settings menu However when the Save Settings Window appears Enter must be pressed in order to accept and save your setting changes If the Previous pushbutton is pressed again all your changes will be discarded Numeric ranges are looped so that going past one end of an interval brings you to the beginning of the other end of the range for the setting Similarly lists are also looped Upon entry to the Set Function the user will view the Setting Main Screen where the selections will be seen three at a time using the up and down navigation pushbuttons Setting Main System Config Protection System Alarms Logging Contact Input CFG Output Config Programmable Logic Cold Load Pickup Clock Communications Change Password Effective Date 12 05 ETN Cutler Hammer FP 5000 IL17569C Effective Date 12 05 Page 2 7 We will only be concerned with System Config and Protection unbalanced functions are the only alarm functions enabled All settings within the Quick Start section of this manual other protection and alarm functions are turned off and must be set to enable their operation The comes pre configured as default Select the category and press the Enter pushbutton to proceed The from the factory for the most common applications The can be actual setting o
363. xceeds the setpoint 5 4 4 Logging Settings The following are setpoints needed to configure the Logging functions Current Demand Interval m Power Demand Window Interval m Event Log Enable Sets the interval in number of minutes from 1 to 60 minutes in 1 minute intervals After each specified interval the average current for that period is calculated and updated Sets the window to Fixed or Slide If Fixed window is selected after each specified interval the average power for that period is calculated and updated If Slide window is selected the average power is calculated and updated every minute for the interval specified For example if a 15 minute demand window is selected the calculated demand is the average power during the last past 15 minutes updated every minute Sets the interval in number of minutes from 1 to 60 minutes in 1 minute intervals After each specified interval the average value of real reactive and apparent power is calculated and updated These settings are used to define what pickup functions get recorded in the Event Log and can be used to prevent frequent and normal events from filling up the event log memory The default setting for all settings under Event Log Enable is No except for Pickup I Pickup V Pickup Freq Pickup PF Pickup Page 5 50 Selecting Yes will enable specified current related pickup and dropout events to be logged Sele
364. y Log of FP 5000 trip events and breaker operations This information is useful for breaker maintenance See Displays 4 15 and 4 16 for History Log displays Display 4 15 Total History Log Total History Log Display Meanings Operate Hours 00 00 00 Number of hours of operation Power Up IOC Trips TOC Trips Unbal Trips Volt Trips Freq Trips Power Trips Total Trips 00 00 00 mm dd yy Page 4 22 Number of times powered up The number of instantaneous overcurrent trips The number of time overcurrent trips The number of phase unbalance trips The number of voltage related trips The number of frequancy trips The number of power trips The totla number of trips The number of breaker operations Phase Aaccumulated interrupted amperes Phase B accumulated interrupted amperes Phase C accumulated interrupted amperes The time of the last History Log reset The date of the last History Log reset Output Status Event Detail Information Display 4 16 Breaker History Log Breaker History Log Display Meanings IC Accum 0 RstTime 00 00 00 RstDate mm dd yy 4 6 4 Status Control Status Control The number of breaker operations Phase Aaccumulated interrupted amperes Phase B accumulated interrupted amperes Phase C accumulated interrupted amperes The time of the last Breaker Log reset The date of the last Breaker Log
365. y4 Rly5 Output Alarm and Output Aux LED are Delay Unit configured by the Output Config settings described previously therefore they won t be discussed in this section On Delay c See Section 9 Programmable Logic Application for detailed information about the logic functions This section will only describe how to set the programmable logic settings Figure 5 3 Logic Setting Flowchart on the following page shows an example of how to program Logic Gate 1 Off Delay c The Figure 5 3 flowchart is an example of programming Logic Gate 1 to be a NAND gate of setting group 2 with IN1 Trip G OC 1 Select programmable Logic from the Setting Main setting display menu and press Enter PB 2 Select Logic Gate 1 press Enter PB Logic Latches 1 and 2 3 Press Enter PB and choose Function to be NAND with up down PBs press Enter PB Setting Group 4 Select Set Group using up down PBs press Enter PB choose Set Group to 2 using up down PB s press Enter PB 5 Select IN1 using up down PBs press Enter PB Set In 6 Select Trip using up down PBs and press Enter PB 7 Select G OC using up down PBs and press Enter PB 8 Select G OH to be Direct then press Enter PB which finishes Logic Gate 1 programming Reset In Press Previous PB to back out of Logic Gate 1 programming and return to Programmable Logic display to program other logic gates Logic Gates 1

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

- Brooks Construction  熊本市中心市街地の暑熱環境調査に関する研究  Samsung 460EXN User Manual  Samsung AQV09PWCX User Manual  Page 1 of 16 of tender SGI6095P15 dated 29.01.2015 Procurement  user guide guide d'utilisation bedienungsanleitung  An Expert`s Guide to the Lout Document Formatting System  Nikon P310 User Manual  Documentation du DR2.1  Phonix S9070CFB mobile phone case  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file